manualshive.com logo in svg

R&S RTO6, User Manual

Share
Download
R&S RTO6 User Manual Download Page 2495

Remote control commands

R&S

®

RTO6

2495

User Manual 1801.6687.02 ─ 05

Parameters:

<State>

ON | OFF
*RST: 

OFF

ADVJitter<m>:DCOMposition:COMPonents<n>:ENABle 

<State>

Enables the measurement for the specified jitter component.

Suffix: 

<m>

.

1..2

<n>

1..29
See 

Table 24-20

Parameters:

<State>

ON | OFF
*RST: 

OFF

ADVJitter<m>:RESult:STATistics 

<State>

Enables statistics measurements for the advanced jitter analysis.

Suffix: 

<m>

.

1..2

Parameters:

<State>

ON | OFF
*RST: 

OFF

ADVJitter<m>:RESult:STEPresponse 

<State>

Enables a step response diagram for the advanced jitter measurements..

Suffix: 

<m>

.

1..2

Parameters:

<State>

ON | OFF
*RST: 

OFF

ADVJitter<m>:RESult:COMPonents<n>:HISTogram 

<State>

Enables a histogram for the selected measurement component.

Suffix: 

<m>

.

1..2

<n>

1..29
See 

Table 24-20

Jitter analysis and clock data recovery

Summary of Contents for RTO6

Page 1: ...R S RTO6 Oscilloscope User Manual 1801668702 Version 05 B1 2 Ihr Ansprechpartner Your Partner dataTec AG E Mail info datatec eu www datatec eu...

Page 2: ...red trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator Inc in...

Page 3: ...3 Options described in this document 20 2 4 Conventions used in the documentation 22 3 Getting started 23 3 1 Preparing for use 23 3 2 Instrument tour 29 3 3 Operating the instrument 41 4 Instrument...

Page 4: ...Qualification 226 6 8 Sequence 229 6 9 Zone trigger 232 6 10 External trigger input 236 7 Waveform analysis 239 7 1 Zoom 239 7 2 Reference waveforms 249 7 3 Mathematics 256 7 4 History 274 7 5 XY dia...

Page 5: ...option R S RTO6 K510 509 13 4 UART RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 option R S RTO6 K510 520 13 5 Audio signals option R S RTO6 K510 529 13 6 Custom Manchester NRZ option R S RTO6 K510 547 13 7 CAN and CAN FD op...

Page 6: ...14 3 Trigger 996 14 4 Measurements on digital channels 1009 14 5 Data export 1010 14 6 Mathematics 1011 14 7 Search 1011 15 Waveform generator Option R S RTO6 B6 1013 15 1 Setup of the waveform genera...

Page 7: ...mbedding 1199 20 2 Deembedding settings 1200 20 3 Responses 1209 20 4 Proven probe proven cable 1210 21 Compliance tests 1216 21 1 USB compliance test 1216 21 2 Ethernet compliance tests options R S R...

Page 8: ...tion and setup 1324 24 9 Trigger 1388 24 10 Waveform analysis 1437 24 11 Cursor measurements 1468 24 12 Automatic measurements 1479 24 13 Spectrum analysis 1565 24 14 Mask testing 1582 24 15 Search 16...

Page 9: ...Contents R S RTO6 9 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 24 28 Deprecated commands 2581 List of commands 2583 Index 2665...

Page 10: ...Contents R S RTO6 10 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05...

Page 11: ...d Safety Instructions The printed Safety Instructions are delivered with the product Throughout the documentation safety instructions are provided when you need to take care during setup or operation...

Page 12: ...ing If Rohde Schwarz provides accessories designed for your product e g a carrying bag you can use the product outdoors Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet you can operate the product up to a...

Page 13: ...that nobody can trip over loose cables If the product needs an external power supply use the power supply that is deliv ered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a...

Page 14: ...ally skilled persons use the products for measurements on hazardous contact voltages These working conditions require special education and experience to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which elec...

Page 15: ...lly protected secondary circuits This measurement category is also known as CAT I CAT II For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation by a standard socket...

Page 16: ...nd environment safety see Table 1 1 Identification of the product Table 1 1 Labels regarding product and environment safety Chassis grounding terminal Take care when handling electrostatic sensitive d...

Page 17: ...to other property 1 4 Where to find key documents on Rohde Schwarz Certificates issued to Rohde Schwarz that are relevant for your country are provided at www rohde schwarz com key documents e g conce...

Page 18: ...Find complex signal details with advanced trigger capabilities Measure more with deep and responsive memory The large 15 6 touchscreen and the streamlined user interface of R S RTO6 oscillo scopes he...

Page 19: ...dures DDR3 Compliance Tests Procedures ScopeSuite Automation The following test fixture manuals are available R S RT ZF1 USB 2 0 Compliance Test Fixture Set R S RT ZF2 Ethernet Compliance Test Fixture...

Page 20: ...m license texts of the used open source software It can also be read directly on the instrument www rohde schwarz com firmware rto6 2 2 4 Application notes application cards videos These documents dea...

Page 21: ...Custom Manchester NRZ 1801 7019 02 R S RTO6 520 Triggering and decoding Automotive Protocols LIN CAN CAN FD FlexRay SENT CXPI 1801 7025 02 R S RTO6 530 Triggering and decoding Aerospace Protocols MIL...

Page 22: ...ds program code Filenames commands coding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are di...

Page 23: ...when transporting or shipping the prod uct later 3 Using the delivery notes check the equipment for completeness 4 Check the equipment for damage If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged...

Page 24: ...alone operation place the instrument on a horizontal bench with even flat surface The instrument can be used in horizontal position standing on its feet or with the support feet on the bottom extended...

Page 25: ...For the order number see data sheet b Mount the adapter kit Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter kit 2 Push the product onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit closely to the...

Page 26: ...esets some hardware components and initiates a new alignment to ensure proper instrument functioning Then it restores the user settings to the state before the disturbance 3 1 6 Connecting to power Fo...

Page 27: ...s be sure to comply with the warm up phase specified in the data sheet To shut down the product The product is in the ready state Press the Power key All current settings are saved and the software sh...

Page 28: ...t work directory When a USB device is disconnected from the R S RTO6 Windows immediately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the corresponding driver The properties of externa...

Page 29: ...r with the usual display in a win dow You can move this window to an external monitor 7 To access Windows display settings tap Additional settings The touchscreen of the R S RTO6 has a screen resoluti...

Page 30: ...four channel inputs to connect the input signals using active and passive probes The input connectors are provided with a special Rohde Schwarz active probe inter face and they are BNC compatible Thus...

Page 31: ...mouse and USB flash drive Probe Compensation Probe compensation terminal to support adjustment of passive probes to the oscillo scope channel Protective earth conductor 4 mm banana jack to connect gr...

Page 32: ...ot to secure the instrument against theft 10 Ref In Ref Out reference input and output of the OCXO reference signal 11 External trigger input 12 External trigger output 13 Slot for optional exchangeab...

Page 33: ...n page 28 DisplayPort DisplayPort connector for an external monitor or projector It supports DisplayPort version 1 3 Ext Trigger In The BNC connector for external trigger input is used to control the...

Page 34: ...option R S RTO6 B6 The waveform generator generates various function and arbitrary waveforms sweeps and parallel patterns For detailed specifications refer to the data sheet The option can be installe...

Page 35: ...nt triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled Norm The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs The Norm LED lights up in green Remote command...

Page 36: ...horizontal position of the waveform or the position of the reference point on the screen To set the value to zero press the knob The current value is shown in the input box in the upper right corner o...

Page 37: ...ghts up in the corre sponding channel color The effect of the keypress depends on state of the channel If channel is off turns on the channel and selects it If the channel is on and in focus selected...

Page 38: ...lation of mathematical waveforms using various mathematic operations on other waveforms Press the key repeatedly to toggle the selected math waveform If no math waveform is active the key closes the d...

Page 39: ...knob provides an alternative way to navigate in dialog boxes and to enter numeric data Multiuse The multiuse knob has various functions It lights up when a function is active on the knob In numeric en...

Page 40: ...rent one The key is illuminated as long as history acquisitions are displayed HD Activates the high definition mode and opens the HD Mode dialog box Autoset The instrument analyzes the enabled channel...

Page 41: ...or details refer to the user manual chapter Remote Desktop Connection Remote monitoring and control of the instrument from a connected computer is also possible with a standard web browser and a LAN c...

Page 42: ...tion keys and rotary knobs The front panel provides frequently used functions and controls to operate the instrument Use knobs to set levels and scales and keys to initiate actions and to open dialogs...

Page 43: ...aveforms channel reference and math waveforms together with histograms masks etc Zoom details XY waveforms spectra and other special waveforms are shown in separate diagrams By default the diagram nam...

Page 44: ...t the positions The trigger point is the zero point of the diagram The trigger position can be moved outside the diagram A red trigger position marker indicates that the trigger position is not visibl...

Page 45: ...area and of the associated zoom diagram have the same color different zooms are marked with different colors So it is easy to assign zoom area and zoom diagram As for waveform diagrams you can change...

Page 46: ...ectly in the diagram The rectangular histogram area indicates the part of the wave form that is considered in the histogram The vertical histogram counts the voltage val ues and the horizontal histogr...

Page 47: ...tic measurements mask testing or a search the result table shows the results of the action The position of the result table is adjustable It can be docked default for measurements floating minimized t...

Page 48: ...can be shown For a four channel instru ment 12 channel waveforms are available Reference waveforms Four waveforms can be used as reference for comparison and analysis Math waveforms Eight mathematic w...

Page 49: ...id function helps to arrange the diagrams Waveform states Depending on its place on the screen and the effect of settings a waveform has one of the following states Off Active The waveform is shown in...

Page 50: ...signal icon Remote command LAYout SIGNal UNASsign on page 1306 To set the waveform back to its previous diagram immediately use Undo To arrange a waveform using the SmartGrid See Chapter 3 3 5 Rohde S...

Page 51: ...guration is deleted when you use Preset and RST To arrange a waveform using the SmartGrid You can arrange waveforms in one of the existing diagrams or in a new diagram 1 Drag the signal icon to the di...

Page 52: ...g the toolbar Using the toolbar is easy and straightforward Some of the toolbar functions are one click actions These actions are performed immediately when you tap the icon Other toolbar functions ar...

Page 53: ...is retained when you switch off and on the instrument and you can save it in the user preferences and user defined preset 1 To open the toolbar configuration tap the icon in the toolbar 2 Select the r...

Page 54: ...Clear FFT Autoset and Preset Annotate Run Stop and Single Save Reference Find Level Save Waveform Force Trigger Zone trigger Demo Spectrogram option R S RTO6 K37 You can configure the content of the...

Page 55: ...ngs in a saveset You can reload the saveset using the Recall toolbar icon or using Menu Save Recall Recall tab Saveset with preview The filename is created according to the autonaming pattern defined...

Page 56: ...DD on page 1438 Hardware zoom Zoom Changes the instrument settings horizontal and vertical scales as well as trigger level and offset to display a part of the diagram in greater detail Coupled zoom Zo...

Page 57: ...erlay menu opens Measure Performs automatic measurements Tapping the icon opens the overlay menu where you select the category the measurement types and measured waveform Tap the dia gram with the wav...

Page 58: ...the focused waveform is exported or a multichannel export is performed if configured Zone trigger Defines a zone trigger which combines the trigger condition with the intersection or non intersection...

Page 59: ...tab Result position Mask test and search results are always shown in a floating result box which you can drag to a convenient position using the SmartGrid To arrange the results on the display 1 If t...

Page 60: ...log Font size 3 3 8 Using dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way To open a dialog Perform one of the following actions Open...

Page 61: ...dialog box tap the Maximize icon in the small box 3 3 9 Entering data To set parameter values and enter other data you use the various knobs and the on screen keypad or keyboard Using scale position...

Page 62: ...respectively To increase the displayed value in fixed steps tap Inc To decrease the value in fixed steps tap Dec To toggle between small steps and large steps tap the Steps icon To get the value that...

Page 63: ...ksp deletes the last character before the cursor 3 Tap Enter to complete the entry 3 3 10 Instrument information and notifications In the upper right corner of the screen you see the Rohde Schwarz log...

Page 64: ...unctional description on a setting and the correspond ing remote command The general help opens the help window with a table of contents where you can browse and search for information 3 3 11 1 Displa...

Page 65: ...ow forward To increase or decrease the font magnifier with or sign respectively To navigate the Help use the touchscreen To search for a topic in the index The index is sorted alphabetically You can b...

Page 66: ...arch for trigger qualification finds all topics with exactly trigger qualification A search for trigger qualification finds all topics that contain the words trigger and qualification Use Match whole...

Page 67: ...ions to some keys The following settings and procedures are described in the current chapter System settings 67 Option settings 71 Appearance settings 74 Display settings 90 Frontpanel settings 94 Pre...

Page 68: ...the instrument information which you see in the dialog box to the clipboard Open Source Ack Opens the open source acknowledgment document which provides verbatim license texts of the used open source...

Page 69: ...te command DIAGnostic SERVice COMPutername on page 1297 Obtain IP address automatically If enabled the IP address of the oscilloscope is obatained automatically IP Address Indicates the currently defi...

Page 70: ...ox to configure a net work connection Only users with administrator rights can fulfill this task 4 1 3 GPIB settings For a description of the GPIB settings see Chapter 22 5 2 2 Remote settings on page...

Page 71: ...nt The change of this setting takes effect at the next instrument startup See Chapter 22 1 1 Logon on page 1224 for restrictions of the standard user and how to change the auto logon User autolo gon A...

Page 72: ...versible so ensure that you register it for the cor rect instrument The address of the tool is https extranet rohde schwarz com service For registration you need the device ID of the instrument on whi...

Page 73: ...e an option you have to note the response key or to save the response to a file The R S License Manager needs the response key 4 2 1 3 Using a license server Software licenses can also be provided by...

Page 74: ...adds all availa ble Rohde Schwarz products smart cards or devices to a list and automatically shows the first product that is detected By default the Licenses list opens with an initial filtering for...

Page 75: ...ulative occurrence of the values Remote command DISPlay COLor SIGNal m USE on page 1298 Color Shows the current color of the selected waveform To change the color tap the button and select a color The...

Page 76: ...he intensity of the specific waveform color varies according to the cumulative occurrence of the values The more often a value occurs the darker the color of the data point is displayed The following...

Page 77: ...tables DISPlay COLor PALette COUNt on page 1299 DISPlay COLor PALette ADD on page 1298 DISPlay COLor PALette REMove on page 1298 DISPlay COLor PALette POINt INSert on page 1299 DISPlay COLor PALette...

Page 78: ...te command DISPlay DIAGram GRID on page 1300 Show labels If selected labels mark values on the x and y axes in specified intervals in the dia gram Remote command DISPlay DIAGram LABels on page 1300 Sh...

Page 79: ...command DISPlay DIAGram XFIXed on page 1301 Keep Y grid fixed If enabled the horizontal grid lines remain in their position when the position of the curve is changed Only the values at the grid lines...

Page 80: ...right of the diagram area Remote command DISPlay SIGBar STATe on page 1306 Show date time If enabled the date and time are shown near to the Rohde Schwarz logo at the upper right corner of the screen...

Page 81: ...ws all zooms of a diagram in one zoom window The zoomed areas are overlaid for better comparison of the zoomed waveforms The setting affects all zoom diagrams See also Chapter 7 1 Zoom on page 239 Rem...

Page 82: ...eas absolute posi tions move with the waveform display when the scales the vertical position or offset or the reference point are changed The position mode applies to all labels of the selected wavefo...

Page 83: ...ist Copy Copies the selected line in a new line Remove Deletes the selected line Only single lines can be removed You can also delete a label by using the toolbar Tap the Delete icon and then the labe...

Page 84: ...adability in the dialog box improves Result dialog With these settings you can change the appearance of the result dialogs Font size Result dialog Defines the font size of the text in result boxes The...

Page 85: ...forms are displayed by rhombus shaped points Vertical line and rhombus The cursors are displayed as vertical lines The intersections of the cursors with the waveforms are displayed by rhombus shaped p...

Page 86: ...ts all measurements except for the peak list Remote command MEASurement m DISPlay GROuping on page 1315 Result position Defines the default position of the result table when a new measurement is start...

Page 87: ...igure the look of the labels for peaks in the spectrum dia gram Frame type Defines the layout of the labels full border underline or none Remote command MEASurement m RESult LABorder on page 1315 Inve...

Page 88: ...page 1317 Show hits If selected the mask hits are highlighted on the screen You can define the color and the time of the hit display These settings are not applied to trigger zones which are based on...

Page 89: ...d into Remote command MTESt COLor INTerior on page 1319 Mask with contact Sets the color of masks segments that were touched at the border In this case the resolution is not sufficient to detect if th...

Page 90: ...review Result icon on the sidebar Docked Fixed tab below the diagrams Remote command DISPlay RESultboxes DEPosition on page 1673 4 4 Display settings In the Settings Display dialog box you can define...

Page 91: ...bled each new waveform point remains on the screen until this option is disabled Use infinite persistence to display rare events in the signal Remote command DISPlay PERSistence INFinite on page 1320...

Page 92: ...ge 1320 Waveform style Select the style in which the waveform is displayed Vectors The individual waveform points are connected by a line Define the strength of the line using the Intensity knob Dots...

Page 93: ...creen 4 4 4 Monitors settings Access Menu Settings Display Monitors In the Monitors tab you can extend or duplicate the instrument display to a second monitor or projector external display The followi...

Page 94: ...Performance Show Displays the Performance results box The Performance result box shows information on the current acquisition perfor mance values of the R S RTO6 The instrument groups acquired wavefo...

Page 95: ...ttings for the selected action Screenshots Save Recall key Save tab Screenhot see Chapter 12 3 1 Screenshot settings on page 476 Report Save Recall key Save tab Report see Chapter 12 4 1 Report settin...

Page 96: ...thod used Squared Moderate acceleration method used Exponential Strong acceleration method used Acceleration interval Defines the delay time during which the movement of the Multiuse knob is analyzed...

Page 97: ...administrator rights can fulfill this task 4 5 4 LED Access Settings Frontpanel LED Brightness Defines the luminosity of illuminated front panel keys and knobs 4 5 5 Aligning the touchscreen When the...

Page 98: ...trument setup including display set tings except for transparency and intensity You can save the current configuration to a preset file and load a previously saved preset file You can then specify tha...

Page 99: ...command Chapter 24 7 1 System on page 1296 4 6 3 Restoring settings When you have changed many different settings on the instrument and are no longer sure which settings are causing which effect in th...

Page 100: ...loaded and Enable user defined preset is disabled the Preset key also resets the instrument settings to factory defaults 4 7 Maintenance settings In the Settings Maintenance dialog box you define the...

Page 101: ...ult of the self alignment process not aligned passed or failed Detailed results are provided on the Results tab Remote command CALibration DATE on page 1322 CALibration TIME on page 1322 CALibration R...

Page 102: ...changes occur 5 1 Warm up the instrument before you start the self alignment The minimum warm up time is indicated in the data sheet 2 Remove the probes from the input connectors 3 In the Menu Settin...

Page 103: ...elf test Pass or Fail Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice STST STATe on page 1323 Result Opens a log file with detailed information on the self test steps and operation of hard ware components which can...

Page 104: ...nstalled The tab provides information on the MSO hardware module that is installed in your instrument AWG This tab is only relevant if the waveform generator option R S RTO6 B6 is installed The tab pr...

Page 105: ...lt prefix in the file name The prefix indicates the type of data that is saved for example Histogram RefCurve Settings Remote command MMEMory AUTonaming PREFix on page 1666 User text enable If enabled...

Page 106: ...t Remote command MMEMory AUTonaming RESPath on page 1667 MMEMory AUTonaming RESall on page 1667 4 8 1 2 Defining default file paths and names When a save or load operation is performed a default file...

Page 107: ...corresponding option The specified elements are used to generate the default file name for the next stor age operation 4 8 2 CSV export Access Menu Settings key Save Recall CSV Export tab In this dia...

Page 108: ...t or margin violation of measurements Successful completion of limit and margin tests Set the path of the application executable optional parameters and the working direc tory as in a Windows shortcut...

Page 109: ...ground DC coupling shows all parts of an input signal DC coupling is available with 1 M input impedance to connect standard passive probes DC 50 coupling is the default for 50 input impedance to conne...

Page 110: ...with multiple diagrams and each diagram obtains the full vertical resolution no matter where the diagram is placed Therefore use a sepa rate diagram for each waveform instead of the traditional setup...

Page 111: ...several odd harmonics As a rule for digital signals the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 5 times higher than the clock frequency to be measured The oscilloscope is not a stand alone system You need a...

Page 112: ...e screen and build up the waveform The number of waveform samples in one waveform record is called record length The rate of recording waveform samples the number of waveform samples per sec ond is th...

Page 113: ...as method of resolution enhance ment is used To reduce the sample rate decimation methods help sample peak detect high resolution and RMS As digital waveform data is stored in the memory and the memo...

Page 114: ...ers repeatedly after a fixed time interval if the trigger con ditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes precedence If the real trig ger is faster than the auto trigger both modes are...

Page 115: ...er is the determining point of the waveform record In many scenarios you want to analyze the waveform some time before or after the trigger To adjust the horizontal acquisition window to the waveform...

Page 116: ...e to amplitudes from a few mV to 10 V Smaller or much larger signals require specialized equipment Signal frequency High frequencies require advanced equipment to get correct results Source characteri...

Page 117: ...bes the impedance variation over frequency is low but the load on the source is high If you use passive probes remember some recommendations Use a probe recommended for your oscilloscope model Use a g...

Page 118: ...probe It reads the identification and calibration data from the probe box and shows the result in the Setup and Probe Attributes tabs This data together with the deskew time for a given channel is sto...

Page 119: ...l input voltages and provide it to the oscillo scope Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe This characteristic is described by the common mode rejection ratio CMRR Gain CommonMode alGain Dif...

Page 120: ...sition that is the time across the 10 divisions of the dia gram Acquisition time Time scale 10 divisions Changing the acquisition time changes the time scale too Remote command TIMebase RANGe on page...

Page 121: ...e REFerence on page 1327 Restrict horizontal position to acquisition range If enabled the horizontal position cannot be set outside the visible waveform diagram Remote command TRIGger m OFFSet LIMited...

Page 122: ...d All serial buses are disabled All digital channels are disabled MSO option R S RTO6 B1 No CDR jitter data is acquired No zone trigger is active The roll mode depends also on sample rate and record l...

Page 123: ...nal settings to improve measurement and analysis accuracy and to reduce jitter effects 5 3 1 Skew Access Menu Horizontal Setup tab Skew Skew tab Skew compensates signal propagation differences between...

Page 124: ...measurement on the selected channel Remote command PROBe m SKEState on page 1385 Total skew offset If Extend user skew is disabled the sum of the measured Probe group delay and the Skew offset is sho...

Page 125: ...and is operating with the specified accuracy External reference Sets the frequency of an external reference input signal that is connected to the exter nal reference input on the rear panel of R S RT...

Page 126: ...nal calibration signal Remote command CALibration SOURce FREQuency on page 1386 CALibration SOURce STATe on page 1386 5 4 Acquire settings The Acquire dialog provides the acquisition configuration for...

Page 127: ...re RESolution on page 1330 Average count N single count Access Menu Acquire Setup tab N single count Menu Acquire Mode tab Average count Menu Acquire Segmented tab disable Acquire maximum Required Mat...

Page 128: ...e the discrete values of the ADC the measured samples Remote command ACQuire INTerpolate on page 1332 Sample rate mode You can choose to keep constant either the sample rate or the record length when...

Page 129: ...Ximum on page 1329 5 4 2 Mode settings Access Menu Acquire Mode tab Decimation Selects the decimation mode Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sampl...

Page 130: ...aveform arithmetic is processed Envelope Detects the minimum and maximum values in a sample interval over several acquisitions Each acquisition is done in the Peak detect decimation mode and the most...

Page 131: ...tic The higher the value is the better the noise is reduced It sets the number of acquisitions to be acquired in a fast segmentation acquisition series Thus you can acquire exactly one fast segmentati...

Page 132: ...cquire the maximum number enable Acquire maximum The maximum num ber of acquisitions is shown in the Required field Acquire a given number of acquisitions Enter the number in the Required field The ac...

Page 133: ...ber of vertical levels that the acquisition samples are mapped to quantization 16 bits of resolution represent 65536 voltage quantization levels while 8 bits of resolution represent only 256 voltage l...

Page 134: ...esulting vertical resolution in high definition mode The higher the filter bandwidth the lower the resolution For details refer to the R S RTO6 Specifications Remote command HDEFinition RESolution on...

Page 135: ...ical Bandwidth dialog C x the Bandwidth setting is not available because the bandwidth is set by the high definition filter The minimum vertical scale is 500 V div instead of 1 mV div in normal mode D...

Page 136: ...ved than in normal mode Export In high definition mode waveform data in raw format is exported to file with 16 bit word length except for peak detect decimation 2 values with 8 bit In addition you can...

Page 137: ...computer set the data format to INT 16 to transfer the complete data words see FORMat DATA on page 1292 Further restrictions The IQ mode option R S RTO6 K11 is not available if high definition mode i...

Page 138: ...Acquisition and waveform setup R S RTO6 138 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Figure 5 6 Signal path in the vertical system of R S RTO6 Vertical setup...

Page 139: ...el signal on or off The signal icon appears on the signal bar The waveform of the last acquisition is displayed in the diagram Remote command CHANnel m STATe on page 1337 Scale Defines the vertical sc...

Page 140: ...ult the horizontal grid axis remains in the center when the offset is changed To shift the axis together with the waveform disable Keep Y grid fixed in Settings Appearance Grid Remote command CHANnel...

Page 141: ...ct the bandwidth of the measurement system The channels are listed in horizontal subtabs Make sure to select the correct channel tab before you enter the settings Analog Selects the bandwidth limit Th...

Page 142: ...dth 5 5 3 Probes settings See Chapter 5 6 Probes on page 145 5 5 4 Other settings Access Menu Vertical Other External attenuation Scale Attenuation Consider a voltage divider that is part of the DUT b...

Page 143: ...the Settings tab ver tical scale position offset coupling and ground Remote command CHANnel m CPLing on page 1340 Filter characteristics Selects the type of filter that is used In the acquisition sys...

Page 144: ...tically You can change the high definition bandwidth in the Digital Filter setup which is applied to the chan nels Example RF reject for the trigger signal ensures that triggering is not caused by une...

Page 145: ...ity on the Probes tab changes according to the type of the attached probe Probes with Rohde Schwarz probe interface probe box and also many other passive voltage probes are recognized by the instrumen...

Page 146: ...see External attenuation Scale Attenuation on page 142 The shared probe settings are Type Name Bandwidth 146 Detect AutoZero Use AutoZero 147 Type Name Bandwidth The fields show the characteristics o...

Page 147: ...ge probes short the signal pin and the ground pin together and connect them to the ground of the DUT Then tap Detect AutoZero While the alignment is running the instrument switches to DC coupling to d...

Page 148: ...uring internal automatic pro cesses for example during self alignment autoset and find level Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run Continuous Is the default assignment Starts or...

Page 149: ...referenced measurements of voltages The measurement is performed continuously and in parallel to the measurements of the oscilloscope Probemeter Select Probemeter to activate the integrated R S ProbeM...

Page 150: ...PMETer VISibility on page 1348 PROBe m SETup DISPlaydiff on page 1348 PROBe m PMETer RESults SINGle on page 1349 PROBe m PMETer RESults POSitive on page 1350 PROBe m PMETer RESults NEGative on page 13...

Page 151: ...d shown in the Setup tab Probe unit Auto attenuation on page 148 If you need to change the unit or attenuation change the Mode to Manual and enter the correct values Mode 151 Vertical unit Attenuation...

Page 152: ...y that contains identification data and individual probe correction parameters The R S RTO6 can detect these probes and read out the data Furthermore these probes have a micro button and a ProbeMeter...

Page 153: ...S RTO6 153 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 5 6 4 1 R S RT ZS single ended probes Figure 5 8 Probe setup for active single ended probe R S RT ZS20 The only setting for R S RT ZS probes is the channel offs...

Page 154: ...is particu larly helpful for measurements on differential signals with high common mode levels for example current measurements using a shunt resistor You can measure the com mon mode input voltage us...

Page 155: ...RT ZPR power rail probes Figure 5 10 Probe setup for power rail probe R S RT ZPR The offset is the channel offset See Offset on page 139 If the ProbeMeter is active an additional function is provided...

Page 156: ...e probe setting allows AC coupling also at 50 inputs Remote command PROBe m SETup ACCoupling on page 1353 Copy to offset Sets the measured ProbeMeter value as offset Thus the value is considered in me...

Page 157: ...in the probe control box You can also acti vate the sound directly on the probe control box Remote command PROBe m SETup ADVanced AUDioverload on page 1354 Negative Positive Differential Overrange The...

Page 158: ...g settings under Probe Deembedding see Chapter 5 6 5 2 Deembedding for modular probes on page 159 Probe mode Sets the measurement mode of modular probes The modular probes of the R S RT ZM family have...

Page 159: ...page 139 DM Offset Compensates a DC voltage applied between the positive Vp and the negative Vn input terminal at the probe tip CM Offset Compensates a DC voltage applied to both input terminals refe...

Page 160: ...nd oscilloscope bandwidth It cannot be higher than the highest frequency in a used S parameter file Consider that most tip modules support the full bandwidth of the probe but some tip modules have lim...

Page 161: ...VT terminal of the R S RT ZM probe amplifier to the VT terminal of the R S RT ZMA40 SMA module using the red DC lead see R S RT ZM User Manual The required ter mination voltage is measured and adjust...

Page 162: ...s that cannot be detected but their characteristics are known to the R S RTO6 are called Predefined probes The following shared probe settings are available Type Name Bandwidth on page 146 Detect Auto...

Page 163: ...wn to the instrument The instrument lists only probes that match the instrument coupling and if connected also the used adapter Select the used probe on the list The corresponding Vertical unit and th...

Page 164: ...Z80 is selected enter the impedance of the measured line The actual attenuation of the transmission line probe depends on the impedance of the line Z0 Attenuation 10 Z0 100 The instrument uses the act...

Page 165: ...5 15 Probe setup for current probes R S RT ZC10 Current probes R S RT ZCxxB Current probes R S RT ZCxxB have a Rohde Schwarz probe interface they are powered and remotely controlled by the oscilloscop...

Page 166: ...he following functions DeGauss 166 Detect AutoZero 167 Zero adjust 167 Save to probe 167 DeGauss Demagnetizes the core if it has been magnetized by switching the power on and off or by an excessive in...

Page 167: ...e waveform is set to zero level Make sure to demagnetize the probe before zero adjustment The value is given in percent of the maximum range which is internally defined The actual setup range depends...

Page 168: ...an unknown probe Set the unit and the attenuation or gain of the probe Vertical unit Attenuation Gain on page 152 5 6 9 Probe attributes To check the attributes of the connected probes select Info in...

Page 169: ...1364 5 6 10 Calibration results To check the attributes of the connected probes select Info Cal Results in the Probes tab 5 6 11 Probe adapter R S RT Z2T Using the R S RT Z2T probe interface adapter...

Page 170: ...S RT Z2T probe interface adapter is connected 4 To see the information on the adapter select Adapter Attributes 5 Select the Predefined probe in the Probes tab See also Chapter 5 6 6 Setup for predefi...

Page 171: ...me horizontal scale If an amperemeter or voltmeter channel is activated it can be displayed on the screen and used as a source for Cursor measurements Automatic measurements and also histogram limit c...

Page 172: ...cteristics of your multi channel power probe Remote command ZVC Z m V n STATe on page 1375 ZVC Z m I n STATe on page 1372 Scale Defines the vertical scale for the channel in Volts per division Increas...

Page 173: ...is compensated automatically To adjust the settings tap the icon For details see Chapter 5 7 1 3 Zero compensation on page 175 Remote command ZVC Z m I n ZERComp STATe on page 1377 All on Enables all...

Page 174: ...els On The resolution of the analog channels is applied to R S RT ZVC channels The signal is automatically interpolated or decimated to get the analog resolution Off The resolution of R S RT ZVC chann...

Page 175: ...the power supply 2 Adjust the current settings in particular the shunt settings See Chapter 5 7 3 ZVC current settings on page 177 3 Connect one probe tip of the R S RT ZVC probe to the high voltage p...

Page 176: ...te command ZVC Z m V n STATe on page 1375 Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram The visual effect is the same as for Offset While the offset sets a voltage position is a graphic...

Page 177: ...ts the skew a delay value that is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument automatically Remote command ZVC Z m V n SKEW on page 1375 Reset Overload Resets the over...

Page 178: ...hannel You can set the probe bandwidth in the Setup dialog Remote command ZVC Z m I n BANDwidth on page 1367 Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram The visual effect is the same...

Page 179: ...hat reason the external shunt can be applied to get the best compromise of both for a specific measurement range Remote command ZVC Z m I n SHUNt MODE on page 1370 Internal Shunt Mode If Shunt mode is...

Page 180: ...ferential signals With R S RTO6 you can easily analyze differential signals using single ended probes or even cables The instrument processes the input of single ended probes on analog channels and cr...

Page 181: ...d waveform setup R S RTO6 181 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 5 8 1 Settings of differential signals Access Menu Vertical Differential Figure 5 18 Setup of differential signals without deembedding Differe...

Page 182: ...itive and negative signal Remote command DIFFerential m PSIGnal SELect on page 1380 DIFFerential m NSIGnal SELect on page 1380 Output P N Diff Common Select the waveforms that are displayed as result...

Page 183: ...new waveform Common Displays the common mode signal as a new waveform Remote command DIFFerential m AOUTput on page 1380 DIFFerential m BOUTput on page 1380 If deembedding by software is active use th...

Page 184: ...input channels Remote command DIFFerential m COMMon POSition on page 1382 DIFFerential m DIFFerential POSition on page 1382 5 8 3 Deembedding of differential signals To remove the parasitic effects o...

Page 185: ...r measurements Automatic measurements Histogram Mathematics In formulas use DIFF1 DIFF2 COMMON1 COMMON2 FFT spectrogram Mask test Export of waveform data You can export the differential and common wav...

Page 186: ...routine test setup It is also a good start if you need to use more complex trigger settings Autoset finds appropriate horizontal and vertical scales vertical offset and trigger conditions to present...

Page 187: ...pe The instrument precludes incompatible combinations like Peak detect with Aver age 5 If Arithmetic Average is selected for a waveform enter the Average count that is the number of waveforms used for...

Page 188: ...uisitions in the Average count field 4 Press the Single key on the front panel You can stop the running acquisition before it is finished by pressing the key again 5 9 6 Using the roll mode The roll m...

Page 189: ...er settings depend on this decision For details on filter settings and dependencies see Chapter 5 5 5 Digital filter setup on page 143 To filter the input channels only 1 Open Menu Vertical Bandwidth...

Page 190: ...plete and the holdoff time has expired Trigger setup A simple trigger setup includes Source of the trigger signal its coupling and filtering Trigger type selection and setup Horizontal position of the...

Page 191: ...for the important stages of trigger setup 6 2 1 Configuring a simple trigger Prerequisites Horizontal and vertical settings are set appropriately to the signals The acquisition is running the Run Stop...

Page 192: ...ettings see Chapter 6 4 Mode Holdoff on page 220 1 Open the Menu Trigger dialog 2 Select the Mode Holdoff tab 3 Select the Holdoff mode 4 Enter the Holdoff settings belonging to the selected mode 6 2...

Page 193: ...for channel 1 and the instrument triggers only if the signal on channel 2 is high For details on qualification settings and restrictions see Chapter 6 7 Qualification on page 226 1 On the Menu select...

Page 194: ...ital channels 220 6 3 1 Basic trigger settings Access Menu Trigger Setup tab The basic trigger settings are the trigger source and the trigger type including the trig ger level These settings are spec...

Page 195: ...r source If any other trigger sequence is selected only channel inputs Ch1 4 can be set as trigger source and all other input sources are disabled See also Chapter 6 8 Sequence on page 229 Remote comm...

Page 196: ...rigger uses the digitized trigger sig nal This signal can be qualified and filtered with the DSP filter If the trigger source is the external trigger input the coupling and filter for this signal is s...

Page 197: ...ion of the first pulse slope Positive Selects positive going pulses Negative Selects negative going pulses Either Selects both positive and negative going pulses Remote command TRIGger m GLITch POLari...

Page 198: ...width duration of a pulse with a given time limit It detects pulses with an exact pulse width pulses shorter or longer than a given time and pulses inside or outside the allowable time range The pulse...

Page 199: ...mmand TRIGger m WIDTh WIDTh on page 1395 Delta Defines a range around the given width value The combination Range Within and Delta 0 triggers on pulses with a pulse width that equals Width The combina...

Page 200: ...command TRIGger m GLITch POLarity on page 1393 TRIGger m RUNT POLarity on page 1396 Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold Remote command TRIGger m LEVel n RUNT UPPer on page 1396 Lower level Se...

Page 201: ...ithin and Outside the runt width defines the center of a range which is defined by Delta Remote command TRIGger m RUNT WIDTh on page 1397 Delta Defines a range around the given runt width Remote comma...

Page 202: ...command TRIGger m LEVel n WINDow LOWer on page 1398 Time condition Selects how the time limit of the window is defined Time conditioning is available for the vertical conditions Stay within and Stay...

Page 203: ...specified time Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display TA or TB on the right edge of the display The range of the trig...

Page 204: ...r both edges at the same time Either Slope Sets the edge for the trigger You can analyze the interval between positive edges or between negative edges Remote command TRIGger m INTerval SLOPe on page 1...

Page 205: ...e between two pulses Remote command TRIGger m INTerval WIDTh on page 1402 Delta Defines a range around the Interval width value Remote command TRIGger m INTerval DELTa on page 1402 6 3 9 Slew rate Acc...

Page 206: ...per level Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the slew rate measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Remote command TRIGger m LEVel n SLEW UPPer on p...

Page 207: ...mum and mini mum slew rate limits respectively Remote command TRIGger m SLEW RATE on page 1404 Delta Defines a time range around the given slew rate Remote command TRIGger m SLEW DELTa on page 1405 6...

Page 208: ...e voltage change Negative Falling edge a negative voltage change Both Both the rising and the falling edge Remote command TRIGger m SETHold CSOurce EDGE on page 1405 Clock level Sets the voltage level...

Page 209: ...tay steady above or below the data level The setup time can be negative In this case the hold time is always positive If you set a negative setup time the hold time is adjusted by the instrument Remot...

Page 210: ...e 196 Use data level for clock level on page 209 6 3 12 Pattern Access Menu Trigger Setup tab Type Pattern The pattern trigger is a logic trigger It provides logical combination of the input chan nels...

Page 211: ...red For qualification you can select all channel signals except for the trigger source In pattern trig ger setup the trigger source channel is selected by default and you can select all other channel...

Page 212: ...l For state and pattern trigger the trigger level is a decision threshold If the signal value is higher than the trigger level the sig nal state is high 1 or true for the Boolean logic Otherwise the s...

Page 213: ...he left and the MSB on the right side For convenient and comprehensive triggering on specific serial data options for serial protocol analysis are provided If option R S RTO6 K13 is installed you can...

Page 214: ...1411 Clock edge Explicit clock Together with the clock level the clock edge sets the point in time when the state of the data signal is checked Positive Rising edge a positive voltage change Negative...

Page 215: ...6 3 14 TV Video trigger Access Menu Trigger Setup tab Type TV The TV or video trigger is used to analyze analog baseband video signals You can trigger on baseband video signals from standard definiti...

Page 216: ...h positive signal polarity trigger level 300 mV Standard Selects the TV standard or Custom for user defined signals HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines the scanning system p for...

Page 217: ...number Triggers on a specified line Enter the line number in Line Remote command TRIGger m TV MODE on page 1413 Line Sets the number of the line to be triggered on if Mode is set to Line number Usual...

Page 218: ...ure 6 3 Bi level left and tri level right sync pulses This setting is available for user defined video signals if Standard is set to Custom Remote command TRIGger m TV CUSTom STYPe on page 1416 Line p...

Page 219: ...s of a frame in sequence Segmented Progressive segmented frame uses progressive scanning to capture the frame and interlaced scanning for transmission and display Remote command TRIGger m TV CUSTom SC...

Page 220: ...Trigger menu Mode Holdoff tab Holdoff conditions define a waiting time after the current trigger until the next trigger can be recognized Run Stop Single Front panel keys to start and stop a continuo...

Page 221: ...isition is running in normal mode and no valid trigger occurs forcing the trig ger provokes an immediate single acquisition Thus you can confirm that a signal is available and use the waveform display...

Page 222: ...ime scaling defines the factor the horizontal scale is multipied with Auto time shows the resulting holdoff time Auto time Auto time scaling Horizontal scale Off No holdoff Remote command TRIGger m HO...

Page 223: ...ues Remote command TRIGger m LEVel n NOISe STATe on page 1424 Size mode Selects whether the hysteresis is defined in absolute or relative values The setting is available only in manual hysteresis mode...

Page 224: ...Remote command DISPlay TRIGger LINes on page 1392 Hysteresis transparency Defines the transparency of the hysteresis area above or below the trigger level Only visible if Show trigger lines is enabled...

Page 225: ...e Trigger out signal setup on page 225 Report Creates and saves a report using the settings defined in Menu key Save Recall key Save tab Report Start executa ble Starts an external application Tap Set...

Page 226: ...rigger out is set to On trigger The setting defines the delay of the first pulse edge to the trigger point The mini mum delay is 800 ns Pulse length Sets the length of the trigger out pulse Remote com...

Page 227: ...cuits using SPI several slave devices use the same lines for reading and writing data and each slave has its own select line To trigger on write access of specific slave the write line is the trigger...

Page 228: ...CD LOGic on page 1420 TRIGger m QUALify n B LOGic on page 1419 TRIGger m QUALify n B ENABle on page 1418 TRIGger m QUALify n C LOGic on page 1419 TRIGger m QUALify n C ENABle on page 1418 TRIGger m QU...

Page 229: ...ne or a specified number of B trigger conditions occur If the reset condition is not fulfilled the latest B trigger causes the trigger event and then the sequence starts again The B trigger can only c...

Page 230: ...The B trigger condition is configured in the same way as the A trigger The instrument disables settings that do not fit the previous settings in the sequence The reset condition R can be a timeout or...

Page 231: ...auses the trigger event The waiting time for B triggers can be restricted with a reset condition timeout or reset event Remote command TRIGger m SEQuence COUNt on page 1428 Reset on event Reset event...

Page 232: ...a signal Separate read write cycles define a zone in the eye diagram Identify a tube violation of signals with an infrequent non monotonic edge Filter events in the history after acquisition has finis...

Page 233: ...zone must not intersect If average or envelope acquisition is enabled only triggered waveforms are used for envelope and average calculation on channel and math waveforms 6 9 2 Creating trigger zones...

Page 234: ...ne tap the corner points of the zone on the screen If all points are set tap Finish zone in the signal bar If a zone trigger is already defined you can also add a new mask to the zone trigger when cre...

Page 235: ...he history memory The history saves all acquisitions that fulfill the trigger condition that is set during acqui sition zone trigger condition or another trigger condition If Apply zone trigger to his...

Page 236: ...trigger system uses the digitized signal The trigger system of the instrument is a separate system thus the signal processing by enhancement decimation and arithmetic has no impact on the trigger sig...

Page 237: ...DC and AC components of the trigger signal 1 M AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components Remote command TRIGger m ANEDge COUPling on page 1434 Filter If the...

Page 238: ...tive Selects the falling edge that is a negative voltage change Both Selects the rising as well as the falling edge This option is not availa ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input Re...

Page 239: ...he diagram directly The hardware zoom changes the horizontal and vertical scales of the diagram so that you see the selected section There are different ways to initiate and configure the zoom functio...

Page 240: ...ed zoom creates a copy of the selected zoom area Coupled zoom areas always have the same size size coupling They can be positioned separately or together position coupling Zoom areas can be used for g...

Page 241: ...ndard zoom Displays a magnified section of the diagram in an additional zoom diagram It is a dis play zoom instrument settings are not changed Touch and hold the zoom area to open the Zoom dialog box...

Page 242: ...ttings Appear ance Diagram see Chapter 4 3 4 Diagram appearance settings on page 79 Selected diagram Indicates which of the waveform diagrams is selected for zooming Mode Selects how the window for th...

Page 243: ...ge 1445 LAYout ZOOM VERTical ABSolute STARt on page 1444 Y stop Start Stop Defines the upper limit of the zoom area on the y axis Remote command LAYout ZOOM VERTical RELative STOP on page 1445 LAYout...

Page 244: ...M VERTical RELative SPAN on page 1445 LAYout ZOOM VERTical ABSolute SPAN on page 1443 SEARch RESDiagram VERT ABSolute SPAN on page 1636 SEARch RESDiagram VERT RELative SPAN on page 1637 X mode Defines...

Page 245: ...areas To define the zoom area graphically on the touchscreen For graphical zooming you use your finger on the screen 1 On the toolbar tap the Standard Zoom icon 2 Touch the position that you want to d...

Page 246: ...ouble tap the zoom dia gram The Zoom dialog box for numeric definition is opened To create a new zoom using the Zoom dialog box 1 There are two ways to create a new zoom If you want to create a new un...

Page 247: ...s 7 Under Y position define the y value of the center point of the zoom area 8 Under Y range define the height of the zoom area When you close the dialog box the specified area is magnified in a new z...

Page 248: ...reas for one diagram that are coupled If you change the size of one zoom area the size of all coupled zoom areas is changed as well Fur thermore you can couple also the position in order to move all c...

Page 249: ...zoom then the zoom into the display The reverse approach is also possible Cre ate a zoom diagram and then apply the hardware zoom to the waveform diagram Both the waveform and the zoom diagrams are c...

Page 250: ...creen 5 A reference waveform can have its own scaling settings or it can be scaled accord ing to the source settings By default the scaling of the reference waveform is cou pled to the source settings...

Page 251: ...4 To load the waveform from the specified file tap Open To load the waveform from a different file tap Open Select the file from the file selection dialog box Only BIN files are displayed in the file...

Page 252: ...r one of the four available reference waveforms Show Displays the reference waveform in the diagram Remote command REFCurve m STATe on page 1447 Signal Selects a signal as the reference waveform Sourc...

Page 253: ...nly xml and csv formats are meant for further processing in other applications Remote command REFCurve m OPEN on page 1447 REFCurve m SAVE on page 1448 REFCurve m DELete on page 1448 Clear The selecte...

Page 254: ...t to original Restores the original vertical settings of the reference waveform vertical scale posi tion and offset if vertical scaling is set to Independent Remote command REFCurve m TOORignal on pag...

Page 255: ...esses the curve Remote command REFCurve m RESCale VERTical FACTor on page 1450 Offset Vertical Rescaling Moves the reference waveform vertically Enter a value with the unit of the waveform Like vertic...

Page 256: ...ses the curve Remote command REFCurve m RESCale HORizontal FACTor on page 1452 Position Horizontal Rescaling Vertical Rescaling Moves the waveform horizontally Enter a value with a time unit suitable...

Page 257: ...easurements even if the math waveform is not active 1 In the Math menu select Math Setup Alternatively press the Math key 2 Define the math expression for calculation in one of the following ways Chap...

Page 258: ...ters Chapter 7 3 3 1 Settings in the Operator editor on page 259 Chapter 7 3 5 Filters on page 269 Chapter 9 1 3 FFT configuration settings on page 378 Chapter 7 3 4 Equation on page 261 Display 258 E...

Page 259: ...lied to envelope waveforms and waveforms with Peak detect decimation Remote command CALCulate MATH m ENVSelection on page 1457 7 3 3 Operator editor In the Operator editor you can define the most comm...

Page 260: ...time value Not possible on envelope waveforms and waveforms with Peak detect decimation log x Calculates the logarithm of the source value based on 10 ln x Calculates the natural logarithm of the sour...

Page 261: ...7 3 4 Equation In the Equation tab you can enter complex formulas to define a math waveform The formula editor helps to enter formulas easily with correct syntax using a large selection of operators...

Page 262: ...xa exponentiation with base x x base a exponent x a division multiplication subtraction addition 0 9 numeric characters decimal point Exp exponentiation with base 10 e Enter expression complete inser...

Page 263: ...Usage Comment FormulaEditor expression x absolute x value abs x x square root of x sqrt x x2 x x pow x log10 common logarithm base 10 log x loge natural logarithm base e ln x log2 binary logarithm ba...

Page 264: ...or or nor negation of or nor xor exclusive or xor nxor negation of exclusive or nxor 7 3 4 5 Math functions comparison Table 7 7 Comparison Icon Description Usage Comment FormulaEditor expression equa...

Page 265: ...orrelation x1 x2 unbiased with x1 waveform 1 and x2 waveform 2 correlation x1 x2 performs an unbiased correlation Auto correlation Used to find repeating patterns for example a peri odic signal obscur...

Page 266: ...R tpye source limit shape or FIR userdef source path See Chapter 7 3 5 2 FIR filter in the formula editor on page 270 Type of FIR filter highpass or lowpass see FIR filter Characteristics of FIR filte...

Page 267: ...the formula you need a keyboard onscreen keyboard or a connected usual one Math expression Description Step2FreqRespNormMag x points Where x is the waveform channel math reference points is the number...

Page 268: ...129 7 3 4 11 Defining a formula in the formula editor 1 Open the Menu Math dialog 2 Select the Equation tab 3 Double tap the editing area The Formula Editor is displayed 4 Enter the math formula inclu...

Page 269: ...s You can set up a FIR filtered math waveform in the basic math editor or in the advanced editor Both ways are described below in this chapter 7 3 5 1 FIR filter in the math setup Access Math Setup ta...

Page 270: ...he limits given above Bandpass and bandstop FIR filter CSV file To define a bandpass or bandstop you need a CSV file that contains the comma sepa rated filter coefficients The maximum number of filter...

Page 271: ...on channel 2 with 3 GHz cut off fre quency enter FIR highpass Ch2 3e 09 gaussian Bandpass and bandstop FIR filter The syntax for the bandpass filter is FIR userdef source path Source is the input cha...

Page 272: ...cal range and Vertical maximum Auto Vertical scale and Vertical offset are read only For FFT only the Vertical maximum is read only Vertical Scale Defines the scale of the y axis in the math function...

Page 273: ...t on waveforms MinHold Determines the minimum result for each input value from the data of the current acquisition and some acquisitions before MaxHold Determines the maximum result for each input val...

Page 274: ...sitions considered by the waveform arithmetics is not limited Time Restarts the envelope and average calculation after the time defined in Time Waveforms Restarts the envelope and average calculation...

Page 275: ...history data is also pos sible either completely or a part of the data The number of stored history waveforms depends on the memory size the number of enabled channels and the record length The shorte...

Page 276: ...Menu Acquire History tab Show history Export history Enables the history mode and allows you to save history waveforms to file The history display is enabled automatically when you press the History b...

Page 277: ...ed The newest acquisition of the complete acquisition series always has the index 0 Remote command CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory STOP on page 1462 Current acquisition Accesses a particular acquisition...

Page 278: ...m WAVeform n HISTory TSDate on page 1464 CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory TSABsolute on page 1464 CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory TSRelative on page 1464 CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory TSRReference on page 14...

Page 279: ...waveforms If you want to see the complete acquisition series without any setup simply tap Play in the quick access History dialog box For specific analysis of history data use the history Viewer setup...

Page 280: ...ber of the required acquisition in Acquistion index The newest acquisition in the memory always has the index 0 Older acquisi tions have a negative index c Tap Save or Save As to save the waveform dat...

Page 281: ...Make sure to select the tab of the required XY diagram Enable If activated the XY waveform is active and shown in a diagram or it is minimized in a signal icon Remote command WAVeform m XYCurve STATe...

Page 282: ...diagram Remote command WAVeform m XYCurve RATio on page 1465 Swap XY Replaces the source of the x axis with the source of the y axis and vice versa Remote command WAVeform m XYCurve SWAP on page 1466...

Page 283: ...one of the following One of the waveforms of any channel A reference waveform The results of a mathematical function 5 In the Y source field define the signal source that supplies the y values of the...

Page 284: ...sults at the current cursor positions The cur sors can be positioned manually or can be configured to follow the waveform You can measure on one waveform or on two different waveforms sources Up to 4...

Page 285: ...Slope of the waveform between the cursors if measured on one source 8 1 1 2 Cursor measurements on spectrum waveforms If the measurement source is a spectrum waveform the results have a different mean...

Page 286: ...e waveform that you want to measure 2 Press the Cursor key The cursor lines and the measurement results are displayed To disable one cursor measurement 1 Tap the Delete icon on the toolbar 2 Tap a cur...

Page 287: ...he current maximum cursor 2 indicates the current minimum If both horizontal and vertical cursors are displayed the hori zontal cursors are placed at the crossing points of the vertical cursors with t...

Page 288: ...on page 85 To add labels to cursor lines 1 Open the Cursors dialog box for example with Menu Cursor 2 Select the subtab for the cursor set you want to configure 3 Select the Advanced tab 4 For each ve...

Page 289: ...ce with waveform tracking Figure 8 3 Setup for cursor on 2 sources Cu1 Cu2 Cu3 Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement or cursor set are configured on separate tabs For each cursor set a horizont...

Page 290: ...r measurement Any of the input signal math reference or XY waveforms can be selected Remote command CURSor m SOURce on page 1470 Second source Source 2 Enables and selects a second source for the curs...

Page 291: ...The horizontal cursors track the waveform The first cursor line indicates the current vertical minimum and the second cursor line indicates the maximum If the waveform changes e g during a running mea...

Page 292: ...ple the horizontal and vertical cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same if one cursor is moved Remote command CURSor m YCOupling on page 1474 CURSor m XCOupling on pag...

Page 293: ...ontal cursors By defaYult the cursors are labeled as Cu1 Y1 Cu1 Y2 Cu2 Y1 Cu2 Y2 Cu3 Y1 Cu3 Y2 Cu4 Y1 Cu4 Y2 Remote command CURSor m LABel Y 1 2 on page 1476 8 1 3 3 Peak Search tab Access Cursor key...

Page 294: ...EXT on page 1479 Next left Cursor 2 is set to the next peak to the left of the current position Remote command CURSor m MAXimum LEFT on page 1478 Next right Cursor 2 is set to the next peak to the rig...

Page 295: ...pectrum waveforms It is valid for cursor measure ments spectrum measurements and peak search The following figure shows a cursor measurement on a spectrum waveform If Peak excursion is 30 dB the peaks...

Page 296: ...rgin checks on page 363 Measurement categories The various measurement are grouped in several categories The category defines which sources can be analyzed Time domain Amp Time amplitude and time meas...

Page 297: ...using the toolbar icon on page 297 Using the Measure menu Pressing the Measure key on the front panel or using the Measure menu See Chapter 8 2 1 2 Configuring measurements on page 297 To start a meas...

Page 298: ...tings icon indicates whether further settings are required Tap the measure ment A dialog box opens and you can adjust the measurement The settings are explained in the following chapters Chapter 8 2 5...

Page 299: ...re Setup tab This section describes the settings that relate to all measurements Specific settings are described in the corresponding category chapters Chapter 8 2 5 2 Settings for amplitude time meas...

Page 300: ...rces depends on the selected category and installed options Remote command MEASurement m SOURce on page 1480 Active measurements Add Remove The Active Measurements list shows the measurements that are...

Page 301: ...bed in detail in the following chapters The following additional results are available Statistics You can enable statistical evaluation of the measurement results and select the statistical results th...

Page 302: ...indicate the state of the limit and margin checks Icon Description No icon no result value The instrument cannot measure the required value for example if the acquisition does not contain at least one...

Page 303: ...lts on page 303 To clear the measurement results 1 On the Display menu tap Clear all 2 To restart measurement statistics without deleting other results select Reset on the Result Analysis tab The resu...

Page 304: ...he gate settings are defined on the Gate tab Each measurement group can use its own gate Make sure to select the correct mea surement group 8 2 3 1 Using measurement gates If you have enabled the meas...

Page 305: ...lected measurement and displays the gate Remote command MEASurement m GATE STATe on page 1546 Apply to all meas If you enable the gate coupling the gate settings of the selected measurement are copied...

Page 306: ...ATE ABSolute STOP on page 1547 MEASurement m GATE RELative STOP on page 1547 SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP on page 1632 SEARch GATE RELative STOP on page 1633 Zoom Zoom coupling is available if a zoom is...

Page 307: ...ment determines the high and low signal levels based on amplitude and histogram measurements of the acquisition The reference levels are set relatively to the determined signal levels However for irre...

Page 308: ...vel Levels tab 2 Define the Source the waveform for which the reference is defined The source can be any signal input math or reference waveform 3 Select Mode Auto 4 Define the Signal level the method...

Page 309: ...reference levels b If Level definition is relative select one of the predefined Relative levels If default percentages do not fit select User defined and enter the percentages for the upper middle an...

Page 310: ...ated or you set them directly The following setups are available according to the selected Mode Automatic reference level mode In automatic reference level mode the reference levels are always relativ...

Page 311: ...rence and signal levels Figure 8 6 Manual reference level mode absolute level definition Source Defines the source for which the reference levels are defined The source can be any signal input math or...

Page 312: ...ility The high signal level is the upper absolute peak the maximum signal level and the low signal level is the level with the mean probability in the lower half of the histogram Upper mean probabilit...

Page 313: ...the high signal level The high signal level is set in manual reference level mode for absolute level definition and user signal level selection Remote command REFLevel m ABSolute HIGH on page 1556 Low...

Page 314: ...reference level required for example to determine a fall for manual refer ence level mode absolute level definition and user reference level Remote command REFLevel m ABSolute LLEVel on page 1559 His...

Page 315: ...ment m REFLevel RESult TOUTer on page 1565 Top inner Defines an area beneath the high signal level which is still considered to be high level Remote command REFLevel m ABSolute TITube on page 1562 MEA...

Page 316: ...emote command REFLevel m RELative OTUBe on page 1561 Relative inner Defines a percentage of the signal level by which the absolute signal level may be higher than the low signal level or lower than th...

Page 317: ...Meas type Symbol Description Result High XHigh High signal level Low XLow Low signal level Amplitude XAmpl Amplitude of the signal the difference of high and low signal lev els XAmpl XHigh XLow Max X...

Page 318: ...by the rise time Result in V s V Hz blue vertical lines in the picture below Slew rate falling Steepness of the falling edge voltage difference between the higher and lower reference level divided by...

Page 319: ...of a triggered signal Measurement all events in the acquisition is possible f Frequency fPeriod Frequency of the signal reciprocal value of the period fPeriod 1 TPeriod Pos duty cycle RPosCyc Positive...

Page 320: ...sing edge of the first pulse to the falling edge of the N th pulse Define N for the measurement t Setup Hold Setup Hold time TSetup and THold Setup and Hold time measurement with positive and or negat...

Page 321: ...ed If the signal passes the mean value an edge is counted A positive pulse is counted if a rising edge and a following falling edge are detected A neg ative pulse is counted if a falling edge and a fo...

Page 322: ...22 Area level 322 Pulses slope 323 Measured slope 323 Settings for delay and phase measurements analog sources 323 Settings for delay and phase measurements digital sources 324 Setup Hold measurement...

Page 323: ...e is measured either between rising edges or between falling edges The first edge is taken for the measurement In single mea surements it works the same way as Either Only available for analog measure...

Page 324: ...ces Delay measurement on digital channels is reduced to measure the time between two subsequent rising or two subsequent falling edges The edge direction is set with Edges slope Setup Hold measurement...

Page 325: ...t defines the waveform used as clock in the setup hold measurement Data source The Data source is identical to the 2nd Source of the measure ment It sets the data signal Clock ref level See Clock ref...

Page 326: ...e first pulse to the falling edge of the N th pulse Remote command MEASurement m AMPTime PTCount on page 1496 Edges slope Sets the edge direction to be considered The setting is relevant for edge coun...

Page 327: ...the reference level of the measurement source on which the delay is measured upper middle or lower level Signal threshold See Signal threshold on page 322 Remote command MEASurement m AMPTime DTOTrig...

Page 328: ...You can select from the measurements enabled for Amp Time or Spectrum Figure 8 9 Arithmetic with two measurement results Constant Performs an operation between a measurement result and a user defined...

Page 329: ...ARameter n GROup on page 1503 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic PARameter n GROup on page 1507 Operator Selects the operation type to be performed on the selected operands You can choose between and A...

Page 330: ...ment b Select the source that is the waveform with the delayed slope c Select the slope and the reference level d Check the trigger settings 4 Enable the measurement Note the result 5 Turn the horizon...

Page 331: ...u Settings Display Signal Waveform style Vectors To obtain optimized settings for an eye measurement use the Autoset function that is provided on the right side of the Eye tab The following characteri...

Page 332: ...s ER Eye base Eye top 100 Prerequisite Eye base 0 and Eye top 0 because extinction ratio is defined only for positive values dB Extinction ratio dB ER dB 10 log Eye top Eye base Eye height The vertica...

Page 333: ...vel Eye fall time Duration for signal to fall from 90 to 10 of the high signal level Eye bit rate Frequency between two crossings Eye amplitude Eye top Eye base Jitter peak to peak Average of the jitt...

Page 334: ...e of the tab Autoset Defines optimized settings for eye diagram measurements on the selected source Remote command MEASurement m EYEJitter AUToscale on page 1509 8 2 7 Spectrum measurements Spectrum a...

Page 335: ...pulsed signals Occupied bandwidth From the defined center frequency symmetric sample value pairs to the left and right are integrated until a user defined percentage of the total power is reached The...

Page 336: ...eaks For each peak the frequency and the power value are listed in a table row The number of determined peaks can be defined You can sort the results by frequency or power value and the peak labels ar...

Page 337: ...13 Parameters of peak list measurement with option R S RTO6 K37 Enable Enables the peak list measurement for the spectogram N db down The threshold until which the samples to the left and right of the...

Page 338: ...trum waveforms It is valid for cursor measure ments spectrum measurements and peak search Remote command CURSor m THReshold on page 1631 MEASurement m SPECtrum ATHReshold on page 1514 Peak excursion D...

Page 339: ...values the harmonics peaks are shown relatively to the carrier in dBc Remote command MEASurement m SPECtrum RESult n MODE on page 1515 Result labels For peak lists only requires option R S RTO6 K37 Us...

Page 340: ...gram displays horizontal bars across amplitude values A horizontal or time frequency histogram displays vertical bars over time frequencies You can define up to 8 histograms in a diagram one of them i...

Page 341: ...of histogram measurements There are various measurements available to analyze histograms Note that graphical changes is the diagram e g changing the diagram size or the size of the result table reset...

Page 342: ...maximum count value in the upper half of the histogram Lower peak value The signal value at the maximum count value in the lower half of the histogram Maximum The highest signal value with a probabil...

Page 343: ...ogram range Marker Probability The marker value according to the selected probability domain marker type minus the defined limit Note that the value is restricted to the histogram range Rough jitter e...

Page 344: ...played 5 To adjust the histogram range a Double tap the histogram b Tap Advanced Settings on the overlay menu c Adjust the start and stop values To create and configure a histogram in the dialog box 1...

Page 345: ...ines the source of the histogram Any analog channel waveform math or reference waveform can be selected Also measurements can serve as histogram source In this case the density distribution of the res...

Page 346: ...ABSolute STARt on page 1524 LAYout HISTogram HORZ ABSolute STOP on page 1524 LAYout HISTogram HORZ RELative STARt on page 1525 LAYout HISTogram HORZ RELative STOP on page 1525 Start Stop Vertical Def...

Page 347: ...value at the maximum sample value in the upper half of the histogram Lower Peak The y value at the maximum sample value in the lower half of the his togram Maximum The highest y value with a probabil...

Page 348: ...verview of optical measurements Table 8 9 Optical measurements Meas type Description Result Average power Measure for the true average component of an optical signal Optical modulation amplitude OMA M...

Page 349: ...range for the optical modulation amplitude Remote command MEASurement m OPTical OMAMplitude RELative STARt on page 1519 Stop Sets the end value of the range for the optical modulation amplitude Remot...

Page 350: ...6 K540 100BASE T1 R S RTO6 K560 Table 8 10 Protocol measurements Meas type Description result Field value Value of a field over time Frame to frame The distance between two frames Trigger to frame The...

Page 351: ...protocol measurements Access Measure Setup tab Protocol category Protocol measurements require that a supported protocol is enabled first If further settings are available for a measurement a settings...

Page 352: ...s and fields are depending on the enabled protocol Table 8 11 Available protocol frames Protocol Frame Field I2C W R Address 2 Addr ACK R W Data SPI MISO MOSI Word CAN CAN FD Remote Data ID FDF BRS ES...

Page 353: ...SFD Dest Src Len Type Data FCS Idle Triplet 100BASE T1 MAC Fill Preamble SFD Dest Src Len Type Data FCS Idle Triplet Also if a label list is loaded and enabled for the protocol the symbolic label nam...

Page 354: ...FRame DIRection on page 1544 MEASurement m PROTocol T2FRame FLD on page 1544 MEASurement m PROTocol T2FRame FRM on page 1544 MEASurement m PROTocol T2FRame VALue on page 1545 Field value Opens a dialo...

Page 355: ...abel list is loaded and enabled for the protocol sometimes there are defined calcu lations and formatting for the displayed field value In this case the measurement dis plays the value according to th...

Page 356: ...mi nate noise from the evaluation see Signal threshold on page 322 Spectrum measurements you can eliminate noise from the evaluation see Threshold and Peak excursion on page 295 To enable statistics u...

Page 357: ...eset new statistics are compiled beginning with the next acquired waveform If limit and margin check is enabled the icons in the result table indicate if statistical results exceed a limit or margin T...

Page 358: ...d 8 2 12 3 Histograms on measurement results Histograms are available not only for channel math and reference waveforms but also on measurement results These histograms cannot be configured and they a...

Page 359: ...f measurement results over a longer period of time For scaling settings of the long term diagram see Chapter 8 2 12 6 Horizontal long term scaling on page 362 Measurement for plot Selects the measurem...

Page 360: ...page 1538 Enable Histogram Displays a histogram of measurement results the cumulative occurrence distribution of measurement results in a graphic Enabling the histogram enables also the statistics and...

Page 361: ...Immediately resets the histogram the long term measurement and the statistics Stopping and starting the acquisition does not reset these analyses but only stops and continues them To delete all result...

Page 362: ...e command MEASurement m MULTiple on page 1534 MEASurement m MNOMeas on page 1534 8 2 12 6 Horizontal long term scaling In this dialog box you define the horizontal scale of long term measurement diagr...

Page 363: ...s from which one point of the long term measurement is created This setting is only available if Scale mode is set to Waveforms Remote command MEASurement m STATistics RCOunt on page 1535 Measurements...

Page 364: ...fine the valid value range for each active measurement The margins must always be within the valid value range If necessary the limit or margin values are adapted to match the selected valid range See...

Page 365: ...Valid range Set the limits and margins for each measurement and also specify the valid range Upper limit Upper margin Lower margin Lower limit within outside outside upper lower Upper margin Upper li...

Page 366: ...m HISTogram LCHeck n LOWer LIMit on page 1530 MEASurement m HISTogram LCHeck n LOWer MARGin on page 1531 MEASurement m HISTogram LCHeck n UPPer LIMit on page 1530 MEASurement m HISTogram LCHeck n UPPe...

Page 367: ...es the waveform data to the file Remote command MEASurement m ONViolation WFMSave on page 1551 Trigger Out Pulse Creates a pulse on the Trigger Out connector on limit violation When Trigger Out Pulse...

Page 368: ...meas icon is not visible on the toolbar add it to the toolbar see Chap ter 3 3 6 2 Configuring the toolbar on page 53 1 Tap the waveform that you want to measure 2 Tap the Quick measurement icon on th...

Page 369: ...ap Set as QuickMeas to save the setup The saved iQuickMeas setup is used when you start a new quick measurement 9 Enable the measurement Set as QuickMeas Saves the current QuickMeas setup The saved Qu...

Page 370: ...original time base and the results display can be restricted to a specified frequency range t s FFT f Hz Frames Segments To convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier...

Page 371: ...everal window functions that can be used in FFT analysis Each of the win dow functions has specific characteristics including some advantages and some trade offs Consider these characteristics careful...

Page 372: ...u can easily determine the results for the current center frequency by moving the cursor to that frequency C1 to Center If you detect a point of interest in the spectrum diagram you can place the curs...

Page 373: ...l values result in high precision as the distance between two distinguishable frequencies is small Higher val ues decrease the precision but increase measurement speed The minimum achievable RBW depen...

Page 374: ...y a basic spectrum waveform using the toolbar 1 Add the FFT icon to the toolbar see Chapter 3 3 6 2 Configuring the toolbar on page 53 2 Tap the FFT icon on the toolbar The FFT overlay menu opens 3 Ta...

Page 375: ...m See To config ure the spectrum of FFT analysis on page 375 To configure the spectrum of FFT analysis By default a suitable frequency range for the expected horizontal values according to the resolut...

Page 376: ...f the Advanced FFT dialog box select the Record length controlled option This option is only available if no gate is being used Use Gate disabled 6 Select the most suitable Window type for your source...

Page 377: ...that define the Relative Start and Relative Stop times If a zoom area has already been defined in the original diagram and you want to use the same time base for FFT analysis select Zoom coupling The...

Page 378: ...essary define an FFT function to be used for the coupled math waveforms so that a spectrum is displayed See Chapter 7 3 1 Displaying math waveforms on page 257 9 1 3 FFT configuration settings FFT set...

Page 379: ...Window type 381 Use color table 381 Type Selects between the magnitude and phase spectrum type Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT TYPE on page 1568 Display If activated a diagram for the defined math...

Page 380: ...Span 2 to Center Span 2 The position of the span is defined using the Center frequency setting Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT SPAN on page 1568 Full span Displays the full frequency span Remote...

Page 381: ...ous different window functions are provided in the R S RTO6 to suit different input signals Each of the window functions has specific characteristics including some advantages and some trade offs Cons...

Page 382: ...not useful Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT USEColtab on page 1580 9 1 3 2 FFT overlap Access FFT FFT setup Overlap tab In this tab you define the settings for the magnitude and phase of the freque...

Page 383: ...shows two envelope waveforms the minimums floor and maximums roof These envelopes indicate the range of all FFT values that occurred Average The average is calculated over all segments RMS The root me...

Page 384: ...inition 384 Zoom 385 Gate description 385 Relative Start 385 Relative Stop 385 Record Length RBW Coupling 386 Required acquisition time 386 Use Gate Enables FFT gating and shows the gate If enabled th...

Page 385: ...tings are configured using absolute or relative values Absolute The gate is defined by absolute start and stop values Relative The gate s start and stop values are defined by a percentage of the value...

Page 386: ...necessary and possible the record length is extended to acquire the required number of samples Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE COUPling on page 1572 Required acquisition time The required acq...

Page 387: ...can be coupled at the same time for instance M1 can be coupled to M2 while M3 is coupled to M4 Note that the formula of the coupled math waveforms is not changed If necessary you must select an FFT fu...

Page 388: ...alysis R S RTO6 388 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Figure 9 1 Scale settings of magnitude spectrum Figure 9 2 Scale settings of phase spectrum See also Vertical scaling mode Manual Auto Vertical Offset F...

Page 389: ...H m VERTical MAXimum on page 1459 Vertical range Defines the range of FFT values to be displayed Remote command CALCulate MATH m VERTical RANGe on page 1458 Unwrap If enabled phase shifts due to a lim...

Page 390: ...ensity of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the...

Page 391: ...rsor measurements on spectrum waveforms provide easy center definition and peak search functions see Chapter 8 1 1 2 Cursor measurements on spectrum waveforms on page 285 9 2 3 Configuring spectrogram...

Page 392: ...to the diagram area and drop it A new window is displayed for the selected time line and the original diagram dis plays the other time line 5 To view a different waveform from the spectrogram move th...

Page 393: ...signal icon is displayed on the signal bar for each time line SGxTL1 2 You can enable and display two time lines at the same time This allows you to com pare the results at different times The positio...

Page 394: ...ested Fail criteria for test Actions to be taken on violation or successful completion Mask Definition A mask can be created in several ways The individual mask points are defined either on the touch...

Page 395: ...nd the number of Acq remaining is 0 as long as the number of tested acquisitions is less the Nx Single count number the state is Run ning If you run the acquisition with Run Stop or the number of play...

Page 396: ...ccess App Cockpit Analysis tab Mask Define Mask The Define Mask tab provides all settings for the mask test itself the waveform to be tested and saving loading the mask definition The content of the T...

Page 397: ...on page 1584 Mask Type Sets the method of mask definition User The mask is created manually by tapping the mask points on the touch screen and or by entering the numerical x and y values of the mask...

Page 398: ...ontent of the Mask Definition tab depends on the selected Mask Type User or Waveform Below you find the specific settings 10 2 2 1 Mask definition user mask Access App Cockpit Analysis tab Define Mask...

Page 399: ...segment at the end of the list Remove the selected mask segment from the list Select the region that builds the mask Inner region the segment points form a closed geometrical shape which is the mask...

Page 400: ...zontal and vertical numerical coordinates Here you can Insert a new point before the selected point Append a new point at the end of the list Remove the selected point from the list Change the x and y...

Page 401: ...d MTESt SEGMent RESCale XFACtor on page 1591 Offset Y Rescale Moves the mask segment vertically The specified offset is added to the y values of all points of the selected mask segment To take effect...

Page 402: ...stretched The result is a tolerance tube around the waveform that is used as mask During mask testing using a waveform mask the record length is limited to 1 MSam ple The source for a waveform mask i...

Page 403: ...imits is highlighted Horizontal width Sets the width of the mask in horizontal direction The specified number of divisions is added to the positive x values and subtracted from the negative x values o...

Page 404: ...tch the mask in y direction The scaling axis is the hori zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit Values 100 stretch the mask and values 100 compress it Figure 10 4 Waveform mask w...

Page 405: ...ed without failure Set the number of acquisitions to be tested Average count N single count Start Single Testing a continuous acquisition or a defined number of waveforms against the mask and initiate...

Page 406: ...s failed or when it has passed successfully Most actions can be initiated either on failure or on success On violation The action is initiated when the fail criteria is fulfilled On successful complet...

Page 407: ...ger out signal setup on page 225 Remote command MTESt ONViolation TRIGgerout on page 1596 Report Action on mask Creates and saves a report using the settings Remote command MTESt ONViolation REPort on...

Page 408: ...e masks of various shapes You can also use User masks to define free mask shapes 10 3 1 Test definition for eye mask tests Access App Cockpit Analysis tab Define Mask tab 1 Select the Source the chann...

Page 409: ...l voltage values of the eye shape enter and thus define the position of the eye shape on the display Remote command MTESt EYEMask HPOSition on page 1603 MTESt EYEMask VPOSition on page 1603 Main width...

Page 410: ...o be relevant Symmetric Top Bottom setup Sets bottom and top offsets to the same value so that the outer regions are symmetric to the eye shape Remote command MTESt EYEMask TBSYmmetric on page 1602 Wi...

Page 411: ...mask test 416 Configuring the mask and hit display 416 Running a mask test 417 Saving and loading masks 417 Mask testing on history acquisitions 418 10 4 1 Setting up user masks 10 4 1 1 Creating user...

Page 412: ...Insert to create a new mask segment 6 Set the corner points of the mask segment a Select the Segment b Tap Configure The User Mask Points dialog opens c In the Definition of segment area tap Insert P...

Page 413: ...and mask definition double tap the last point To delete a mask segment on the touch screen 1 On the toolbar tap the Delete icon 2 Tap the mask segment you want to delete To delete a point on the touch...

Page 414: ...ments table and tap the required button below Insert to add a new segment before the selected segment Append to add a new segment at the end of the list Remove to delete the selected mask segment from...

Page 415: ...egments table 4 Tap Configure 5 To stretch or compress the selected mask segment enter the Factor X for hori zontal scaling and the Factor Y for vertical scaling The x values and y values of all point...

Page 416: ...the limit of violation tolerance hits 5 Tap Action on mask 6 For each action select when the action will be executed On violation if the mask test has failed On successful completion 10 4 3 Configurin...

Page 417: ...r test a specified number of acquisitions 1 Open App Cockpit Analysis tab Mask Define Mask tab 2 Select Enable If the acquisition is running the test starts immediately 3 If the acquisition is not run...

Page 418: ...fying user masks on page 412 The mask test is defined see Chapter 10 4 2 Setting up a mask test on page 416 The mask display is configured see Chapter 10 4 3 Configuring the mask and hit display on pa...

Page 419: ...h is performed continuously on the acquired data until acquisition is stopped If acquisition is stopped and you enable a search the data of the last acquisition is searched Enabling the search zoom wi...

Page 420: ...le with the position and if available further parameters for each result The tables row can be sorted and you can define a maximum number of table entries in the Result Presentation dialog box As with...

Page 421: ...EARch ALL on page 1605 Source Defines the waveform to be searched The source can be any analog and digital input signal math or reference waveform or track While the instrument triggers only on real i...

Page 422: ...h TRIGger SLEWrate STATe on page 1607 SEARch TRIGger SETHold STATe on page 1606 SEARch TRIGger STATe STATe on page 1607 SEARch TRIGger PATTern STATe on page 1606 Copy from trigger A Copies the trigger...

Page 423: ...p Hold 430 State 432 Pattern 432 11 2 2 1 Edge The edge search works the same way as the edge trigger Slope Sets the edge type rising edge Positive falling edge Negative or both Remote command SEARch...

Page 424: ...command SEARch TRIGger GLITch POLarity on page 1609 SEARch TRIGger GLITch RANGe on page 1609 SEARch TRIGger GLITch WIDTh on page 1609 Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search The value is used...

Page 425: ...n page 1618 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh on page 1618 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa on page 1617 Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search The value is used for all search event types that require on...

Page 426: ...per level Lower level Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds The amplitude of a runt crosses the first threshold twice in succession without crossing the second one Remote command SEARch TRIGger L...

Page 427: ...SEARch TRIGger WINDow TIMerange on page 1620 SEARch TRIGger WINDow WIDTh on page 1620 SEARch TRIGger WINDow DELTa on page 1619 Upper level Lower level Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds The a...

Page 428: ...e is used for all search event types that require one trigger level The search trigger level is search specific you can define different levels in different searches for the same event Remote command...

Page 429: ...10 SEARch TRIGger INTerval WIDTh on page 1611 SEARch TRIGger INTerval DELTa on page 1610 Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search The value is used for all search event types that require one t...

Page 430: ...SEARch TRIGger SLEWrate DELTa on page 1614 Upper level Lower level Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds When the signal crosses a level the slew rate measurement starts or stops depending on the...

Page 431: ...te command SEARch TRIGger LEVel VALue on page 1607 Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search The value is used for all search event types that require one trigger level The search trigger level...

Page 432: ...Gger STATe CEDGe on page 1628 SEARch TRIGger STATe CLEVel on page 1628 State pattern State settings are the same as for the state trigger See also Pattern on page 211 Remote command SEARch TRIGger STA...

Page 433: ...page 1625 SEARch TRIGger PATTern ABCD LOGic on page 1625 Timing condition Mode Range Time Width Delta Additional time limitation to the pattern see Additional settings Timing on page 212 Remote comman...

Page 434: ...ng the dialog box To perform a simple search 1 If more than one waveform is in the diagram select the waveform to be searched for by tapping it in the diagram 2 Select the Search icon on the toolbar T...

Page 435: ...er A The selected trigger settings are applied to the search settings 6 Repeat the previous steps to define further events for the same search 7 To perform the search only on a part of the waveform co...

Page 436: ...olute The gate is defined by absolute start and stop values Relative The gate s start and stop values are defined by a percentage of the value range Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE MODE on pa...

Page 437: ...signal source of the measure ment FFT or search Remote command MEASurement m GATE ZCOupling on page 1548 MEASurement m GATE ZDIagram on page 1549 CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE ZCOupling on page 1574 SEARc...

Page 438: ...ion If several zoom diagrams are defined select the zoom diagram you want to use for gat ing 4 Tap Use gate to enable the gate 5 Optionally tap Display state to display the gate area in the diagram 11...

Page 439: ...listed in descending order i e the largest value at the top To change the sorting direction enable Sort ascending Remote command SEARch RESult SORT ASCending on page 1638 Clear results Clears the sear...

Page 440: ...he search Remote command SEARch RESDiagram SHOW on page 1636 Y mode Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the y axis values Remote command LAYout ZOOM VERTical MODE on page 1...

Page 441: ...ABSolute SPAN on page 1635 SEARch RESDiagram HORZ RELative SPAN on page 1636 11 4 3 Configuring the search results presentation Initially the Search Results box is displayed in front of the other dia...

Page 442: ...for the first result that was found 2 If you need to adjust the search zoom area you can drag the area or their edges on the screen You can also enter the limits of the search zoom window in the Searc...

Page 443: ...d recall waveform data and results 452 Screenshots 475 Reports 480 File selection dialog 482 12 1 Save and recall user settings To repeat measurements at different times or perform similar measurement...

Page 444: ...e management R S RTO6 444 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Figure 12 1 Save tab Access to load instrument settings Menu key Save Recall key Recall tab User settings Figure 12 2 Recall tab Save and recall u...

Page 445: ...File 446 User preferences 448 Saveset with preview function 449 Saving and loading settings 450 12 1 1 Savesets Savesets contain the complete instrument and measurement configuration including a scree...

Page 446: ...MMEMory SAV on page 1646 12 1 1 2 Load saveset settings Access Menu key Save Recall key Recall tab Savesets Load from file Enter the file name to load the setting data from and select the file format...

Page 447: ...ne File data to and select the file format with the for mat button on the right Double tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box See also Chapter 12 5 File selection dialog on page 482 B...

Page 448: ...ences If enabled the user preferences settings are also restored together with the saveset and reference waveform User preferences settings include the user specific display settings like diagram layo...

Page 449: ...om and select the file format with the for mat button on the right Double tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box See also Chapter 12 5 File selection dialog on page 482 By default use...

Page 450: ...saveset was stored in another directory use the path buttons at the bot tom or tap Open to open the required directory Tap Sort by to sort the files according to the Last modified date or the File nam...

Page 451: ...olbar 1 Tap Menu and select Save Recall 2 Select the Recall tab 3 Press the Saveset button 4 Tap Load to load the settings from the specified file Tap Open to navigate to a different file Select the f...

Page 452: ...nd recall waveform data and results Access Menu key Save Recall key Save tab You can export various data to file waveform data histograms and measurement results For information on data export in I Q...

Page 453: ...is required to restore the waveform from data or to analyze the data values of the data file 12 2 1 1 Header files The header files of XML and BIN waveform files are written in XML format The header...

Page 454: ...metics Off Envelope or Average InterleavedTraceCount Number of y values saved at each sampling time The value is usually 1 The value is 2 if min and max values are saved for each sample for example fo...

Page 455: ...izontal stop value of data including the settling time for further computation If the waveform is a spectrum the XStart and HardwareXStart values may be slightly smaller than the specified start frequ...

Page 456: ...iv and channel 4 has 40 mV div MultiChannelBaseYStart Number of channels and minimum value of the vertical range for each individual channel for example 4 0 25 0 0 13 0 28 MultiChannelBaseYStop Number...

Page 457: ...alueType TOADone BaseUnitRelative Base unit indication UseInterSampleTriggerOffset ISO_TRG SC_POST SC_TRG 12 2 1 2 Waveform data files The waveform data files indicated by Wfm in the filename contain...

Page 458: ...rleaved x y data The first waveform is an envelope the second one is a normal waveform In CSV files the data values for a given sampling time are written in one row 1 96e 008 0 0079051387 0 0059288535...

Page 459: ...edTraceCount SignalHardwareRecordLength No of expor ted acquisitions If Interleaved x y is enabled one horizontal value is added per sample The total num ber of values in the file is No of values 1 In...

Page 460: ...s If enabled you can export the data of selected input channels Selected sources into one file If disabled you can export one Source on page 460 waveform You can reload exported multiple channels if t...

Page 461: ...the Cursor set to be used for export Gate Saves the data included in the measurement gate if a gated mea surement is defined for the source waveform Select the Measure ment for which the required gate...

Page 462: ...69559 V 3 478260869559 mV 61 0 0000771986 0 4 7091146 mV When reloading an exported raw BIN waveform the waveform position after reload is not the same as for the exported waveform Remote command EXPo...

Page 463: ...ttings Access Menu key Save Recall key Save tab Waveform History tab In this dialog you can configure the export of the history waveform data to file Select the channels and scope in the Setup tab Exp...

Page 464: ...d CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory PLAY on page 1463 Save to file Enter the filename to save the waveform to Double tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box By default the filename has the p...

Page 465: ...the number of acquisitions to be acquired and stored with Acquisition count The maximum amount of data that can be written is shown in Max file size Enabling Data logging stops a running acquisition T...

Page 466: ...ence of exported values absolute or relative Histogram range XStart XStop YStart YStop Name of the exported histogram Data conversion Using the header data you can calculate the waveform value to whic...

Page 467: ...ram INCidence on page 1656 Horizontal range Vertical range Displays the Start and Stop limits of the histogram area Save to file Enter the filename to save the waveform histogram to Double tap the fil...

Page 468: ...nimized boxes and docked boxes Select the results that you want to save to file All results are written into one file Note If the result box is minimized only the columns shown on the result icon are...

Page 469: ...5 Result plots analysis Access Menu key Save Recall key Save tab Result Plots You can export the data of long term measurements the measurement histogram and track data to file The measurement export...

Page 470: ...lative histo gram values Data conversion of measurement histogram data Using the header data you can calculate the measurement value to which a histogram value belongs MeasValue XStop XStart 1000 Hist...

Page 471: ...is set in relation to the sum Remote command EXPort HISTogram INCidence on page 1656 Save to file Enter the filename to save the measurement data to Double tap the filename to open the file selection...

Page 472: ...e The data file contains the comma separated list of the pixel values The number of lines and columns corresponds to the number of lines and rows of the eye diagram image Content and format of the bin...

Page 473: ...rm to an xml csv or bin file The data export of several channels into one file is also possible Files in bin format can be reloaded to the R S RTO6 as reference waveforms Instead of a complete wavefor...

Page 474: ...ap Save to save the waveform data to the specified file Tap Save As to save the waveform data to a different file or file type Select the file from the file selection dialog box To save a waveform usi...

Page 475: ...luded in the screenshot The Image toolbar icon saves the current display to a file according to the settings in Menu Save Recall Save tab Screenshot See also Image on page 55 You can configure the Cam...

Page 476: ...0 46 Instrument Material Number 1329 7002k44 Instrument Serial Number 123456 Image Size 1280x800 Megapixels 1 0 12 3 1 Screenshot settings Access Menu Save Recall Save tab Screenshot In the Screenshot...

Page 477: ...w of the screenshot with the current display view e g after changes to the settings have been made or an additional channel has been activated White background Inverts the background color So you can...

Page 478: ...necessary You can store the file using Save as Alternatively save the file and close the Paint application to return to the Screenshot dialog then save the edited image The changes are not shown in t...

Page 479: ...ct the file format png jpg or another one 4 To change the directory tap Save As and configure the path The symbols of often used target folders are listed on the left of the file explorer By default s...

Page 480: ...so included You can create the report manually or automatically on defined events Press the Camera key Tap the Create report toolbar icon Before add the icon to the toolbar see also Chapter 3 3 6 2 Co...

Page 481: ...t on page 1666 Logo By default the Rohde Schwarz logo is shown in the header of the report pages You can switch the logo off or select your logo to be shown A preview of the selected log file is shown...

Page 482: ...external storage device usually a USB flash drive or to a folder on a connected network drive The path list provides all available drives and folders On the left shortcut icons provide access to often...

Page 483: ...ement R S RTO6 483 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Save Select Selects the specified file for the open or save operation and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without selecting a file Fil...

Page 484: ...RTO6 K540 741 RFFE option R S RTO6 K550 754 Ethernet 100BASE T1 option R S RTO6 K560 776 Ethernet 1000BASE T1 option R S RTO6 K560 794 USB option R S RTO6 K570 812 USB 3 1 option R S RTO6 K570 840 USB...

Page 485: ...tings are protocol specific They are described in the related chapters K510 Low speed serial buses I C Chapter 13 2 2 I C configura tion on page 496 Custom Manchester NRZ Chapter 13 6 2 Custom Man che...

Page 486: ...Chapter 13 22 2 USBPD config uration on page 863 USB SSIC Chapter 13 24 2 M PHY configu ration on page 893 RTO6 K580 MIPI M PHY D PHY C PHY Buses MIPI D PHY Chapter 13 23 2 D PHY configu ration on pag...

Page 487: ...Executes Autoset for the horizontal and vertical scale Adjusts the horizontal scale to display at least one frame or packet Executes Find thresholds to determine the thresholds If necessary performs b...

Page 488: ...g the symbolic label The frame captions of the decoded signal show the symbolic label instead of the ID or address values Hence it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes You can a...

Page 489: ...table this result is shown in the decode zoom With Zoom window you can also select the zoom used for coupling For an introduction to zoom settings and setup see Chapter 7 1 2 Zoom settings on page 24...

Page 490: ...a delimiter are ignored Values with a special character comma newline or double quote must be enclosed in double quotes Text in double quotes must be escaped by double quote characters The format of...

Page 491: ...e selected protocol type for example on start and stop of messages or on specified data pat terns in the message Search dialog here you can configure protocol specific search settings In the Measureme...

Page 492: ...on page 1673 Include details Includes the detailed results for all frames Remote command BUS m EXPResult DETail on page 1673 Export to file Enter the filename to save the results to Double tap the fi...

Page 493: ...ompatible file format Remote command BUS m EXPResult SAVE on page 1673 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor If you want to enter a specified address or data pattern the bit pattern editor helps you to enter the...

Page 494: ...in the left column the ASCII col umn displays to indicate that the value is not defined Where applicable frequently used values are provided in a Predefined values list below the pattern table for ex...

Page 495: ...that either is written to or read from R W bit specifies if the data is written to or read from the slave ACKnowledge bits is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was successful...

Page 496: ...n trigger on various parts of I C messages The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible You can trigger on Start or stop...

Page 497: ...channel or math waveform because the time correlation of these waveforms might differ Alternatively digital channels can be used if MSO option R S RTO6 B1 is installed Digital and analog channels cann...

Page 498: ...sed for the parallel and the serial buses You can set the thresholds either in the parallel bus con figuration or in the serial bus configuration Remote command BUS m I2C SCL THReshold on page 1677 BU...

Page 499: ...two lines to input channels and set the thresholds For details on configuration settings see Chapter 13 2 2 I C configuration on page 496 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2 Select the tab of the...

Page 500: ...or clock source is a math or reference waveform you cannot trigger on that bus Remote command TRIGger m SOURce SBSelect on page 1675 Trigger type Selects the trigger type for I C analysis Some trigger...

Page 501: ...edge bit the instrument triggers if the data line remains HIGH during the clock pulse following a transmitted byte You can also localize specific missing acknowledge bits by setting the No Ack condi t...

Page 502: ...ta condition You can specify Adress Type R W bit Address on page 503 Position on page 504 Data on page 504 The address conditions are the same as for the Address trigger type and Data on page 504 No A...

Page 503: ...igger on data only regardless of the address Remote command TRIGger m I2C AMODe on page 1680 TRIGger m I2C ADOR n ADRType on page 1682 Address The trigger address setup consists of a comparison condit...

Page 504: ...2C DPTO on page 1683 Data Specifies the trigger conditions for the data bit pattern In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pat tern in other formats use the bi...

Page 505: ...page 487 The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings The color coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the...

Page 506: ...Tools Press Display settings in the Decode Results table to access the Display tab Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 24 17 3 3 Decode results on page 1684 13 2 5 Search on deco...

Page 507: ...for a start condition without previous stop condition Repea ted start conditions occur when a master exchanges multiple mes sages with a slave without releasing the bus Stop Searches for the end of th...

Page 508: ...MODe on page 1696 SEARch TRIGger I2C ACCess on page 1697 Data setup Condition Position Index min Index max Value min Value max The data setup consists of the condition position and one or two index va...

Page 509: ...1 2 Search results on page 420 Chapter 11 4 2 Display zoom settings on page 440 The remote commands for the search reults are described in Chapter 24 17 3 5 I C search results on page 1701 13 3 SPI bu...

Page 510: ...s a slave device data may be transfer red in either or both directions simultaneously Figure 13 4 Simple configuration of SPI bus The data bits of a message are grouped by following criteria A word co...

Page 511: ...at the same time For triggering on a serial bus analog or digital channel sources are required Remote command BUS m SPI SCLK SOURce on page 1709 Polarity SCLK Two settings define the clock mode the c...

Page 512: ...me For triggering on a serial bus analog or digital channel sources are required Remote command BUS m SPI SSELect SOURce on page 1709 BUS m SPI MISO SOURce on page 1710 BUS m SPI MOSI SOURce on page 1...

Page 513: ...el bus con figuration or in the serial bus configuration Remote command BUS m SPI SCLK THReshold on page 1711 BUS m SPI MISO THReshold on page 1711 BUS m SPI MOSI THReshold on page 1711 BUS m SPI SSEL...

Page 514: ...lock line SCLK is used as limiter between two frames See also Frame condition on page 514 Remote command BUS m SPI TIMeout on page 1712 13 3 2 3 Configuring SPI signals For configuration assign the li...

Page 515: ...alysis Frame start SS Trigger on the start of the frame when the slave select signal SS changes to the active state This trigger type is available if Frame condition is set to SS Frame start Timeout T...

Page 516: ...OSI or MISO one pattern is defined the maximum pattern length is 256 bit If the trigger type is MOSI MISO two patterns must be found at the same time Thus both patterns must have the same length and t...

Page 517: ...d for the SPI signal to be analyzed 1 Press the Bus key and selet the Shortcuts tab 2 Press Setup trigger 3 Select the serial bus that is set to SPI 4 Select the Trigger type 5 For more complex trigge...

Page 518: ...rate Tools Press Display settings in the Decode Results table to access the Display tab Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Chapter 24 17 4 3 SPI decode results...

Page 519: ...frame condition is set to CLK timeout MOSI Searches for a specified data pattern expected on the MOSI line MISO Searches for a specified data pattern expected on the MISO line MOSI MISO Searches for s...

Page 520: ...e listed in Chapter 24 17 4 5 SPI search results on page 1723 13 4 UART RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 option R S RTO6 K510 13 4 1 The UART RS232 interface The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART c...

Page 521: ...wn to the receiver Trigger The R S RTO6 can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals Start bit Packet start Parity errors and breaks Stop errors A serial pattern at any or a specified positio...

Page 522: ...w the threshold The interpretation of HIGH and LOW is defined by the Polarity Note If the sources are digital channels the same threshold values are used for the parallel and the serial buses You can...

Page 523: ...ART SBIT on page 1731 Parity Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection None No parity bit is used Odd The parity bit is set to 1 if the number of data bits set to 1 is even Even...

Page 524: ...t start bit after the defined end pat tern Timeout Defines a timeout between a stop bit and the next start bit Enter the minimum time that marks the end of a packet A new packet starts with the first...

Page 525: ...t In the Bus Setup tab The correct Protocol is selected The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The co...

Page 526: ...ggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit the data line remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART word Stop error Triggers if the stop bit is a logic 0 Remote command TRIGger m UART TYPE on p...

Page 527: ...ords before the first word of interest These offset words are ignored If the Position defines a range the first and the last words of interest are defined The setting is available if packet detection...

Page 528: ...box shows the detailed decoded data for each word The decoding process considers the Bit order configuration setting of the signal and displays the binary result MSB first Table 13 5 Content of the D...

Page 529: ...frame start and the maximum length of the data word For pulse code modulated signals I S standard left and right justified data for mats the level of the WS signal assigns the data words to the left a...

Page 530: ...ligned with the trailing edge of the word select pulse Thus the audio word is right aligned within the frame The R S RTO6 can decode right justified signals with MSBF and LSBF bit order 13 5 1 4 TDM T...

Page 531: ...n the Setup tab you configure the audio signal Several audio signal variants are available the I S standard signal the left and right justified data formats and the TDM interface For all audio signal...

Page 532: ...me The format is word length independent Right justified The right justified data format is similar to the left justified but the last byte of the last word in the frame is aligned with the trailing e...

Page 533: ...FSYNC Selects the source of the word select line for I S standard left and right justified data formats or the source of the frame synchronization pulse for TDM audio signals The same waveforms as for...

Page 534: ...d low if the signal value is below the threshold The interpretation of HIGH and LOW is defined by the polarity There are three ways to set the threshold Threshold Enter individual values for each line...

Page 535: ...o settings for Variant Right justified Figure 13 7 Advanced Audio settings for Variant TDM Word length Defines the number of bits in an audio data word The minimum length is 4 bit the maximum is 32 bi...

Page 536: ...f channels transmitted on the TDM audio line Remote command BUS m I2S CHANnel TDMCount on page 1742 Frame offset Available for Variant TDM Sets the number of bits between the frame start and the start...

Page 537: ...tab The correct Protocol is selected The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus i...

Page 538: ...pattern Description of specific trigger type settings Channel on page 539 Data condition on page 539 Window This trigger checks if the decoded data values stay inside a window that is formed by a data...

Page 539: ...0 Error condi tion The oscilloscope uses the WS or FSYNC line to monitor the channel and frame length An error is detected when two consecutive frames have different length The instrument triggers on...

Page 540: ...46 TRIGger m I2S TCONdition n DMAX on page 1746 Window length Sets the number of words that is used as time limit for the Window trigger type The instrument triggers if the data condition is fulfilled...

Page 541: ...up tab enable Decode 2 In the Serial Bus dialog Display tab select additional result display settings Show table and Show binary 3 If required enable Zoom coupling For a description of the display set...

Page 542: ...Insuffcient waveform length indicates that the frame is not completely contained in the acquisition TDM x Value Data value of the TDM channel Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter...

Page 543: ...annel of I S standard signal The track is a special measurement waveform so it can be used for further analysis like cursor measurements and zoom The instrument uses the bus data format to interpret a...

Page 544: ...the track waveforms in the protocol settings Show Track Waveform s Enables and displays the tracks for the selected channels of the decoded bus using continuous auto scale See also Chapter 13 5 5 Tra...

Page 545: ...es of a single acquisition The track is available for most amplitude time measurements except for High Low Amplitude Max Min Peak to peak Mean RMS S dev Pos and Neg overshoot and Area and for jitter m...

Page 546: ...you want to analyze the trend 7 In the Measurements dialog select the Plot tab 8 Under Long term select Enable An empty trend diagram is displayed 9 Tap Settings 10 In the Measurement Long Term Setup...

Page 547: ...802 3i In terms of a logical Boolean operation the Man chester value of each bit as per G E Thomas is the exclusive disjunction XOR of the original data value and the clock value A 0 is expressed by a...

Page 548: ...cally discriminate an idling bus from monotonic sequences of H or L violations For these biphase situations R S RTO6 K510 offers a Gap Time detec tion feature which allows to distinguish long interval...

Page 549: ...pter 13 6 2 6 Configuring custom Manchester NRZ signals on page 566 Otherwise proceed with the configuration settings 13 6 2 1 Custom Manchester NRZ configuration settings Access Bus Custom Setup tab...

Page 550: ...annels Triggering the analog channels For NRZ Clocked Decoding the analog mathematical reference and digital channels Digital channels can be only used if MSO option R S RTO6 B1 is installed Digital a...

Page 551: ...dle period the data signal starts with a low to high transition Idle high The base value of the clock is 1 after an idle period the data signal starts with a high to low transition Remote command BUS...

Page 552: ...ock Polarity The available settings are First Edge At Idle low data are captured on the clock s rising edge low to high transition and propagated on a falling edge At Idle high data are captured on th...

Page 553: ...to exceed the upper threshold a high to low transition requires the signal to fall below the lower threshold You can set a hysteresis only for the enable signal NRZ coding standards use a single volta...

Page 554: ...Teresis ENBLe on page 1760 Find thresh olds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresh olds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude Remote command BUS m SETReflev...

Page 555: ...y for NRZ Unclocked and also for triggering on signals in any coding standard Default bit rate is 10 Mbps permitted bit rates range from 300 bps to 2 Gbps For more details on the bit rate see Chapter...

Page 556: ...res of Manchester coding on page 547 Remote command BUS m CMSB GAPTime VALue on page 1762 13 6 2 3 Frame format configuration This dialog enables you to describe the generic format and logical structu...

Page 557: ...d Explore to store created sets of frame descriptions into files in xml format or load existing files of this kind The frame identification is executed top down in the order in which the frame formats...

Page 558: ...number of Field descriptions is not limited The Remove button deletes a selected field description from the active frame description The field result can be selected to be displayed in a specified res...

Page 559: ...ondition is 00111000 if Condition is 111000 and the bit order is LSB accordingly the condition in MSB format would be 000111 then if Bit s is 4 the truncated condition is 1000 for LSB and 0001 for MSB...

Page 560: ...cell within the frame description B1 If the cell is located anywhere before the Variable Length Array cell the condition acts as a key to identify a frame type as in case A B2 If the cell is located...

Page 561: ...le the software to correctly terminate the array Otherwise the bits could not be assigned correctly and it would not be possible to determine where a repletion starts and where it ends With an end of...

Page 562: ...the honeycomb display The frame that contains the field is marked in the same way except if another higher priority error is found within this frame Block The block operator is represented by the and...

Page 563: ...result columns of the decode table No index means that the result is not displayed The decode table supports three result columns which have to be unique for each frame type For different frame types...

Page 564: ...scription attributes including a link for the fileFrameDescription xsd This schema file which is installed in the system ena bles the software to validate an XML file before opening it Frame A frame d...

Page 565: ...ant bit first Color allows you to set a user defined ARGB hexadecimal color value The Result Column has four options none which is the default 1 2 3 13 6 2 5 Custom Manchester NRZ display settings Acc...

Page 566: ...b of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 3 In the Setup tab select the protocol Custom 4 Switch to the Trigger tab tap Source and select Serial bus This prevents using digital waveforms Math an...

Page 567: ...d coding standard and trigger type The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup You can adjust the Gap time and Bit rate also in the...

Page 568: ...and after the detected start of the data frame The trig ger instant is after the last bit of the specified data pattern Data Pattern Specifies the data pattern that is to be found and triggered The p...

Page 569: ...odes and when the count matches the word length the next bit is treated as the stop bit Gap Time Sets the minimum gap time for synchronization The trigger is set to a position after the gap time when...

Page 570: ...ou can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the Trigger type dependent settings To specify these parameters select a field from this list and define the data and or index ope...

Page 571: ...sets the start value of a data range Max Sets the end value of a data range if Condition is set to In range or Out of range Remote command TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced DMAX on page 1771 TRIGger m CMSB ADV...

Page 572: ...Type and select the trigger type to be used for custom serial bus protocol analysis 6 Depending on the selected custom serial bus coding standard more setup condi tions have to be specified For inform...

Page 573: ...efine individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the Trigger type dependent settings To specify these parameters select a field from this list and define the data and or index operators a...

Page 574: ...X do not care Remote command BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o BIT on page 1775 Data Defines for the selected field how a data check is executed Condition Defining specific data or a data range requires...

Page 575: ...coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display The decode information condenses or expands depending on the horizontal scale Various data forma...

Page 576: ...start the search you have to configure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data set the search source to SerBus for the configured proto col For general information on how...

Page 577: ...page 1788 SEARch TRIGger CMSB FRAMe m FLD n IOPerator on page 1788 SEARch TRIGger CMSB IOPerator on page 1788 Error Condition Searches for two error conditions CRC Error or Parity Error Remote command...

Page 578: ...ecture for example for brake power train and engine man agement Today it is also used in many other systems for example in industrial machines aerospace subsea merchant marine etc More than 20 years a...

Page 579: ...7 02 05 13 7 2 CAN and CAN FD configuration 13 7 2 1 CAN and CAN FD configuration settings Access Bus CAN Setup tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected Figure 13 13 Configurat...

Page 580: ...on the signal bar Remote command BUS m STATe on page 1670 Data Sets the source of the selected data line Usually the source is one of the analog channels Reference and math waveforms are available as...

Page 581: ...tion Remote command BUS m CAN FDATa ENABle on page 1798 BUS m CAN FDATa FRAMe n STANdard on page 1809 Standard Only available for CAN FD buses Non ISO Signals are decoded according to the the Bosch CA...

Page 582: ...this rate is 1 Mbit s The bit rate is uniform and fixed for a given CAN or CAN FD bus To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values tap the button beside the field To enter a specific value...

Page 583: ...ime segments is defined in time quanta according to network and node conditions during CAN development For CAN FD signals you can define the sysnchronization settings separately for the arbitration ph...

Page 584: ...ened due to resynchronization Resynchronization corrects the phase error of an edge caused by the drift of the oscillators The jump width defines the maximum number of time quanta for phase correction...

Page 585: ...Idle PTT and CSV Files for CAN CAN FD Label list files are protocol specific A PTT label file for CAN protocols contains three values for each identifier Identifier type 11 bit or 29 bit long Identif...

Page 586: ...re channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus is selected Serial bus Selects the serial bus to be triggered on Make sure...

Page 587: ...t Frame type Triggers on a specified frame type data remote error or overload For data and remote frames also the identifier format is considered For details see Frame type on page 589 ID type on page...

Page 588: ...the specified data pattern The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier trigger type see Identifier setup Condition Identifier min Identifier max on page 590 Data conditions are set w...

Page 589: ...ote frames are only available in the CAN protocol The remote frame initiates the transmission of data by another node The frame format is the same as of data frames but without the data field Error Wh...

Page 590: ...ters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 The length of the bit patterns is restricted to the selecte...

Page 591: ...nt is 12 34 56 and it is sent little endian by the LIN node With Data length 2 and Transfer Big endian you trigger on the data of the first two bytes that is 56 34 With Data length 3 and Transfer Litt...

Page 592: ...k which is a complex checksum calculation method The transmitter calculates the CRC and sends the result in the CRC sequence The receiver calculates the CRC in the same way A CRC error occurs when the...

Page 593: ...igger type Identifier Data e Select the standard CAN FD or Any 2 In this example the identifier does not matter Set the ID type Any 3 Define the data setup as described in the examples Example Trigger...

Page 594: ...denses or expands depending on the horizontal scale Various data formats are available to show the result values The binary results of data bytes are displayed MSB first For CAN protocol the endiannes...

Page 595: ...arious events in the decoded data You can find the same events that you can trigger on and even many more since several event types can also be combined Before you can start the search you have to con...

Page 596: ...byte of the specified data pattern The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier search cri teria see Identifier setup Condition Identifier min Identifier max on page 597 Data conditio...

Page 597: ...FTYPe on page 1819 ID type Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit Identifier length of the CAN base frame format The instrument trig gers on the sample point of the IDE bit 29 bit Identifier leng...

Page 598: ...CAN DMIN on page 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DMAX on page 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DLCCondition on page 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DLC on page 1822 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m NDBYtes on page 1822 Data positio...

Page 599: ...o define the pattern For data fields longer than 8 byte you can define the posi tion where the specified pattern starts The following example demonstrates how the data pattern and data position is def...

Page 600: ...ic data message or a signal and its value that appears inside the message Access 1 Press Bus 2 In the Setup tab set Protocol CAN CAN FD 3 In the Shortcuts tab select Setup trigger 4 In the trigger dia...

Page 601: ...rch is used at the same time Remote command TRIGger m CAN SYMBolic SIGValue on page 1832 Condition Sets the operator to set a specific data pattern or symbolic value Equal or Not equal or a data range...

Page 602: ...s applied the symbolic search for messages and signal which are defined in the DBC file is available Symbolic search is an alternative to the other search criteria you can either search for symbolic v...

Page 603: ...ed at the same time Remote command SEARch TRIGger CAN SYMBolic SIGValue on page 1835 Condition Sets the operator to set a specific data pattern or symbolic value Equal or Not equal or a data range Thi...

Page 604: ...in a motor vehicle are the control of doors windows wing mirrors and wipers 13 8 1 The LIN protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics frame format identifiers and trigger p...

Page 605: ...16 Structure of a byte field Data bytes are transmitted LSB first The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits This combination is known as protected identifier...

Page 606: ...r 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 LIN standard Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding The most c...

Page 607: ...the signal threshold levels and bitrate Find thresholds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the mid dle reference level of the measured amplitude Note If the sourc...

Page 608: ...ues for each identifier Identifier value Symbolic name for the identifier Example of a LIN PTT file FILE_VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL_NAME lin Labels for LIN protocol Column order Identifier Label Labels for...

Page 609: ...e_Sensor Master1 Temperature1 12 0 Slave_Sensor Master1 Frames Sensor_Frame Error 30 Temperature 20 Status 0 Master_Frame Error 15 Speed 10 Schedule_tables Sensor_Frame delay 10 000 ms Master_Frame de...

Page 610: ...page 606 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2 At the left hand side select the vertical tab of the bus you want to set up 3 Select the tab of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 4 Tap the...

Page 611: ...LIN analysis Start of frame Sync Triggers on the stop bit of the sync field Identifier Sets the trigger to one specific identifier or an identifier range Enter only the 6 bit identifier without parit...

Page 612: ...Identifier setup Condition Frame ID min Frame ID max The identifier setup consists of the condition and one or two identifier pattern Condition Defines the operator to set a specific identifier Equal...

Page 613: ...transfer direction you can trigger on a number of bytes less than the data length of the frame that means on the first bytes that are transmitted For Little Endian transfer direction the exact number...

Page 614: ...ttern on page 1844 TRIGger m LIN CRCDatalen on page 1844 TRIGger m LIN STANdard on page 1845 TRIGger m LIN IPERror on page 1843 TRIGger m LIN SYERror on page 1843 13 8 3 2 Triggering on LIN signals Pr...

Page 615: ...s frame contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the Decode results table The endianness setting Transfer is a trigger setting and not considered for decod ing The binary results...

Page 616: ...orrectly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data set the search Source to the serial bus that is configured for the protocol to be analyzed See also Chapter 11 Search functions on page 419...

Page 617: ...of the condition and one or two frame ID patterns The identifier setup settings are the same as in the LIN trigger setup see Identifier setup Condition Frame ID min Frame ID max on page 612 Remote co...

Page 618: ...s To get search results Enable the search You can minimize shift or close the search dialog The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines For an int...

Page 619: ...common measurement Two thresholds have to be defined as differ ential voltages Logic For measurements of logic signals for example of the logic signal inside the FlexRay node between the communicatio...

Page 620: ...ame time in a bus Remote command BUS m FLXRay SOURce n on page 1866 Thresholds Threshold values are used for digitization of the signal For measurements on a FlexRay bus two thresholds are required to...

Page 621: ...8 BUS m FLXRay PRLogic on page 1868 BUS m FLXRay THReshold n on page 1867 BUS m FLXRay THData on page 1867 BUS m FLXRay THENable on page 1867 BUS m SETReflevels on page 1671 Polarity Selects the wire...

Page 622: ...0x0AB 0 2 Ignition_Info uses cycles 0 2 4 6 62 0x0AB 1 2 GearBoxInfo uses cycles 1 3 5 7 63 Symbolic label symbolic name of the identifier specifying the device function Example FlexRay PTT file FILE_...

Page 623: ...ect the channels for the sources 7 Adjust other settings if necessary 8 Set the logical thresholds 9 Enable Decode 13 9 2 FlexRay trigger 13 9 2 1 FlexRay trigger Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup trigge...

Page 624: ...t on header and payload data Indicator bits see Indicator bits on page 625 Frame identifier see Frame ID min max on page 626 Payload length see Payload length min max on page 626 Cycle count see Cycle...

Page 625: ...ad preamble Null frame Synch frame Startup frame Indicators 5 bits Payload pre amble Indicates a Network Management Vector in the payload segment The NMV allows the host processor to send data directl...

Page 626: ...any format see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Trigger type Identifier data Remote command TRIGger m FLXRay FCONdition on page 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay FMIN on page 1873 TRIGger m FLXRay FM...

Page 627: ...range Trigger type Identifier data Position Operator for the data position Select Off if the position of the required pattern is not relevant for the trigger condition Index Sets the number of data b...

Page 628: ...activate the nodes of the system Remote command TRIGger m FLXRay SYMBol on page 1877 Error conditions Triggers on one or more errors in the frame Trigger type Error conditions FSS Error in a Frame St...

Page 629: ...on page 487 The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings The color coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies...

Page 630: ...es do not transmit data therefore is displayed Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 24 17 10 3 Decode results on page 1878 13 9 4 Search on decoded FlexRay data Using the search fu...

Page 631: ...e Payload length min max on page 632 Cycle count see Cycle count min max Step on page 632 Data position see Position Index min max Data setup on page 633 Data bit pattern see Condition Data min max Da...

Page 632: ...ge 1892 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay STFRame on page 1891 Frame ID min max The frame ID contains the number of the slot in which the frame is transmitted Each frame ID occurs only once during a FlexRay cycle...

Page 633: ...ting point of the pattern is defined by Position Index min max Data setup on page 633 The pattern comparison is byte aligned and the instrument triggers at the end of a byte The setup conditions are t...

Page 634: ...ESult FLXRay FRAMe m ADID on page 1894 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m CSSTate on page 1894 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m CSValue on page 1895 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m CYCount on page 1895 SEARch RESu...

Page 635: ...single transmis sion Nevertheless SENT is characterized by its simplicity and yet very high customiz ability to meet the individual requirements of the applications SENT operates via a three wire conn...

Page 636: ...or ID type manufacturer diagnostic etc The slow channel transmission provides two serial message formats Short and Enhanced for customizing the secondary data The data of both the fast and the slow ch...

Page 637: ...its 0 LSB specific application 1 specific application 2 Serial Data message or specific application e g Infineon TLE4998S 3 MSB 1 message start 0 Serial Data message or specific application e g Infine...

Page 638: ...hannel transmissions Figure 13 18 One serial message composed of 16 SENT consecutive fast channel transmissions Enhanced Serial Messages The transmission of an enhanced serial message format requires...

Page 639: ...nd reference waveforms is not pos sible SENT enables you to trigger on Calibration synchronization pulse Transmission sequence Serial messages Error conditions 13 10 2 SENT configuration 13 10 2 1 SEN...

Page 640: ...l threshold levels and bitrate Find thresholds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the mid dle reference level of the measured amplitude Remote command BUS m SENT D...

Page 641: ...er all nibbles except the communication nibble Remote command BUS m SENT CRCMethod on page 1901 Pause pulse Determines whether a pause pulse is transmitted after the checksum nibble You can use this p...

Page 642: ...FAUToset on page 1671 13 10 2 3 Configuring SENT protocol The configuration of the SENT is simple assign the two lines to input channels and set the thresholds For details on configuration settings se...

Page 643: ...Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus is selected Type Selects the event of the SENT transmission sequence or message to be triggered on Th...

Page 644: ...ing on a serial message depends on the serial protocol selected with Serial protocol Short Enhanced and the associated setting parameters Short serial message Sequence Identifier triggers at the end o...

Page 645: ...quence Note The displayed parameters depend on the selected Sequence The instrument displays the data setting parameters when you select Status Data see Type on page 643 Sequence Transmission Sequence...

Page 646: ...specify a range with conditions In range and Out of range Remote command TRIGger m SENT TDMX on page 1905 Serial Message setup Configures the trigger conditions for a serial message Note The displayed...

Page 647: ...ge with conditions In range and Out of range Remote command TRIGger m SENT SIMX on page 1906 Data Condition Serial Message setup Selects the operator to set a specific data pattern or a data range The...

Page 648: ...lse duration of frame n Pulse Period Error Detects an error in the Calibration Sync pulse in transmission sequences An error occurs when a nibble has any of the following Number of ticks at low is few...

Page 649: ...y of translating the decoded data into user for mat The label lists are highly customizable The format of supplying the label list description is through a xml file and is explained with an example se...

Page 650: ...VALUE TYPE ENUM sb VALUE TYPE Representation of the Bits ENUM UNSIGNED_INT INT FLOAT DOUBLE Default UNSIGNED_INT The Signal Value is calculated according to the following Translated_Value Encoded_Valu...

Page 651: ...SENT sb DESCRIPTION sb PROJECT sb FRAMES sb FRAME NAME Air Temperature STATE ON sb DESCRIPTION sb DESCRIPTION sb ID VALUE 0 sb ID VALUE sb ID LENGTH 4 sb ID LENGTH sb DATA SIZE 16 sb DATA SIZE sb FRA...

Page 652: ...sb ENUM INDEX 6 LABEL P1 P2 sb ENUM INDEX 7 LABEL P Default T sb ENUM INDEX 8 LABEL P Sensor Specific T sb ENUM INDEX 9 LABEL P1 P2 Default T sb ENUM INDEX 10 LABEL P1 P2 Sensor Specific T sb ENUM IND...

Page 653: ...ORDER MSB sb BYTE ORDER sb VALUE TYPE ENUM sb VALUE TYPE sb FACTOR 1 0 sb FACTOR sb OFFSET 0 0 sb OFFSET sb MIN 0 sb MIN sb MAX 4096 sb MAX sb ENUM VALUES sb ENUM INDEX 0 LABEL No Error sb ENUM INDEX...

Page 654: ...CTOR sb OFFSET 0 0 sb OFFSET sb MIN 0 sb MIN sb MAX 10000 0 sb MAX sb UNIT sb UNIT sb SIGNAL sb SIGNAL ID Channel_2 sb SHORT NAME TPS2 sb SHORT NAME sb DESCRIPTION sb DESCRIPTION sb BIT POSITION 7 sb...

Page 655: ...ZE sb SIGNALS sb SIGNAL ID Channel_1 sb SHORT NAME MAF sb SHORT NAME sb DESCRIPTION sb DESCRIPTION sb BIT POSITION 23 sb BIT POSITION sb BIT LENGTH 16 sb BIT LENGTH sb BYTE ORDER MSB sb BYTE ORDER sb...

Page 656: ...el_1 sb SHORT NAME MAF sb SHORT NAME sb DESCRIPTION sb DESCRIPTION sb BIT POSITION 23 sb BIT POSITION sb BIT LENGTH 14 sb BIT LENGTH sb BYTE ORDER MSB sb BYTE ORDER sb FACTOR 1 0 sb FACTOR sb OFFSET 0...

Page 657: ...T 0 0 sb OFFSET sb MIN 0 sb MIN sb MAX 256 0 sb MAX sb UNIT sb UNIT sb SIGNAL sb SIGNALS sb FRAME sb FRAME NAME Pressure Sensor STATE OFF sb SHORT NAME P sb SHORT NAME sb DATA SIZE 24 sb DATA SIZE sb...

Page 658: ...IT sb SIGNAL sb SIGNAL ID Channel_2 sb SHORT NAME Temperature sb SHORT NAME sb DESCRIPTION sb DESCRIPTION sb BIT POSITION 11 sb BIT POSITION sb BIT LENGTH 12 sb BIT LENGTH sb BYTE ORDER LSB sb BYTE OR...

Page 659: ...p tab enable Decode 2 In the Protocol dialog Display tab select additional result display settings Show decode table and Show binary signals For a description of the display settings see also Chapter...

Page 660: ...ode Results table to access the Display tab Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Chapter 24 17 11 3 Decode results on page 1909 13 10 6 Search on decoded SENT da...

Page 661: ...ne search Calibration Sync Searches for the end of the Calibration Synchronization sequence i e the falling edge This setting does not require any input parameters Transmission Seq Searches for the en...

Page 662: ...nfigures the search conditions for the transmission sequence Note The displayed parameters depend on the selected Sequence The instrument displays the data setting parameters when you select Status Da...

Page 663: ...res the search conditions for a serial message Note The displayed parameters depend on the selected Sequence The instrument indicates the data setting parameters when you select ID Data see Sequence o...

Page 664: ...1 SSM Data Condition Serial Message setup Selects the operator to set a specific data pattern or a data range The available operators Equal Not equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Greater or eq...

Page 665: ...e search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines For an introduction to search results see Chapter 11 1 2 Search results on page 420 Chapter 11 4 2 Displ...

Page 666: ...power consumption Support of two methods for frame transfer management the event trigger method and the polling method The event trigger method can be used when the focus is placed on the responsive n...

Page 667: ...the following fields Data Length Code DLC 4 bits that indicate the length of the data byte of a normal frame Network Management NM 2 bits indicating if the frame is in wakeup or sleep mode Counter CT...

Page 668: ...is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus Alternatively digital channels can be used if MSO option R S RTO6 B1 is installed Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time For t...

Page 669: ...lied as Threshold Hysteresis and Threshold Hystere sis Remote command BUS m CXPI HYSTeresis on page 1931 Expected IBS length Sets a range for the expected inter byte space IBS length The standard has...

Page 670: ...window is displayed Remote command BUS m CXPI BITRate ENABle on page 1930 BUS m CXPI BITRate VALue on page 1930 BUS m CXPI RESult BITRate on page 1930 13 11 2 3 Display settings Access Bus Display tab...

Page 671: ...re that In the Bus Setup tab The correct Protocol is selected The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus...

Page 672: ...er only on frames that fulfill these conditions See Data on page 677 Set an index or index range to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions See Index on page 678 Normal Poll Trigger type...

Page 673: ...frame See NM on page 678 Set a CT value expected in the frame See CT on page 678 Set a data pattern condition to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions See Data on page 677 Set an index...

Page 674: ...See Index on page 678 Long Poll Trigger type Triggers on a long poll frame You can refine the trigger condition Set a frame ID pattern or a frame ID range to trigger only on frames that fulfill these...

Page 675: ...hex and a parity of 1 It is used only in the polling method PTYPE PID Trigger type Triggers on a PTYPE field followed by a PID field Optionally you can define a frame ID pattern or a frame ID range t...

Page 676: ...ing a transmission error UART error For the CXPIstandard each 8 bit byte is transported as a 10 bit UART word framed by a start bit 1 and stop bit 0 An UART error occurs if the identified sym bol does...

Page 677: ...Defines the operator to set a specific DLC extend Equal or Not equal or a DLC extend range DLC Extend min DLC Extend Defines the bit pattern of the DLC extend In binary format use the following charac...

Page 678: ...CXPI DATA IMIN on page 1935 NM Sets the value of the network management NM field 2 bits indicating if the frame is in wakeup or sleep mode Remote command SEARch TRIGger CXPI NM on page 1952 CT Sets th...

Page 679: ...h Source to the serial bus that is configured for the protocol to be analyzed See also Chapter 11 Search functions on page 419 13 11 4 1 Search settings Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup search Search ty...

Page 680: ...ame ID on page 680 PTYPE Searches for a PTYPE field PTYPE PID Searches for a PTYPE field followed by a PID field You can refine the frame identifier see Frame ID on page 680 Remote command SEARch TRIG...

Page 681: ...ta setup settings are the same as in the CXPI trigger setup see Data on page 677 Remote command SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA DCONdition on page 1946 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA DMAX on page 1946 SEARch TRIGg...

Page 682: ...Search results on page 420 Chapter 11 4 2 Display zoom settings on page 440 The columns in the search result table are the same as in the decoding table see Chapter 13 11 5 CXPI decode results on page...

Page 683: ...box 8 Press Run Stop to start acquisition 9 To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events tap Enable in the search setup dialog The R S RTO6 displays the Search Results box that lists...

Page 684: ...code results contains information about all decoded frames Details frame contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the Decode results table Table 13 16 Content of the Decode resul...

Page 685: ...ys it is also used in spacecraft on board data handling The bus is a 2 wire bus that uses differential signals A MIL STD 1553 system consists of the following components Bus Controller BC initiates an...

Page 686: ...t Mode Code indicates the number of words that are sent received by the RT A maximum of 32 words is allowed This field may be used for the transmission of the mode code value Parity checks if there ar...

Page 687: ...e uses Broadcast Command a logic 1 indicates that the preceding valid command word was a broadcast command and a logic 0 that it was not Busy a busy state indicates that the RT or the subsystem is not...

Page 688: ...lected See also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Source Sets the source of the selected data line Waveform 1 of channel signals math wave forms and reference waveforms can be used For...

Page 689: ...The time is measured between the mid bit zero crossings According to the standard the minimum idle time is 4 s The minimum gap time is relevant for protocol configuration and error trigger If Check m...

Page 690: ...ier RTA hexadecimal remote terminal address value Sub Addr hexadecimal sub address value Sub Address Label Name the label name corresponding to the value of the sub address Symbolic label symbolic nam...

Page 691: ...essary tap the Check max response button to select it and set the maxi mum response time 13 12 3 MIL STD 1553 trigger 13 12 3 1 Trigger settings MIL STD 1553 Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup trigger Mak...

Page 692: ...Word Triggers on the selected word type Data Word Triggers on a specified data word or data word range Command Status Word Triggers on a specified command word or on a status word Command Word Trigger...

Page 693: ...lse or word type You can select to trigger on Command Status on All or on Data sync pulses word types Remote command TRIGger m MILStd TPSPecifier on page 1969 Remote Terminal Address The RTA setup con...

Page 694: ...acters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pat tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Condition Sets the comparison condition to a specific va...

Page 695: ...ss Mode The subaddress mode setup consists of the condition and one or two subaddress mode patterns In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pat tern in other fo...

Page 696: ...IGger m MILStd STATus DBCaccept on page 1968 TRIGger m MILStd STATus INSTrument on page 1969 TRIGger m MILStd STATus MERRor on page 1969 TRIGger m MILStd STATus SREQuest on page 1969 TRIGger m MILStd...

Page 697: ...measured between the mid bit zero crossings According to the standard the RT shall respond to a valid command word within the time period of 4 to 12 s The max response time is relevant for protocol co...

Page 698: ...results are shown in two tables Decode results contains information about all decoded frames Details frame contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the Decode results table Tabl...

Page 699: ...rameters remote terminal address data pattern and data index Command Status Word Searches for command or status words Additional search parame ters remote terminal address and 11 bit information Comma...

Page 700: ...n setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup see Data Pattern on page 694 Remote command SEARch TRIGger MILStd DATA DCONdition on page 1976 SEARch TRIGger MILStd DATA DMIN on page 1976 SE...

Page 701: ...1976 SEARch TRIGger MILStd CMD CMAX on page 1977 T R Transmit receive Specifies the data direction of the selected command For details see T R Transmit receive on page 696 Remote command SEARch TRIGge...

Page 702: ...nds SEARch RESult MILStd WCOunt on page 1980 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m INFO on page 1982 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m RTADdress on page 1982 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m STARt on page 1981 SEARch RESu...

Page 703: ...uses 4 data field bits to represent a decimal digit Discrete data a combination of BNR and or BCD or individual bits that express specific equipment conditions Maintenance data and acknowledgment Will...

Page 704: ...Selects the wire on which the bus signal is measured A Leg or B Leg The setting affects the digitization of the signal Remote command BUS m ARINc POLarity on page 1985 Thresholds Sets the threshold v...

Page 705: ...x gap The standard defines a minimum of 4 bit times to separate two subsequent words Timing settings are relevant for protocol configuration and error trigger If Min gap and or Max gap are enabled the...

Page 706: ...014o Magnetic Heading 015o Wind Speed 075o Gross Weight 125o Universal Time Coordinated s 13 13 2 3 Configuring ARINC 429 signals For configuration assign the line to the input channel set the thresho...

Page 707: ...p tab The correct Protocol is selected The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus...

Page 708: ...word see Error Conditions on page 709 Remote command TRIGger m ARINc TYPE on page 1986 Label Data Sets the trigger on a defined word format You can define the label the data and the SDI SSM bits sepa...

Page 709: ...the data In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Data Max...

Page 710: ...ap BITS on page 1988 TRIGger m ARINc MINGap SELect on page 1988 TRIGger m ARINc MAXGap BITS on page 1989 TRIGger m ARINc MAXGap SELect on page 1989 13 13 3 2 Triggering on ARINC 429 Prerequisites A bu...

Page 711: ...the trigger point Label The value of the label bytes SDI The state of the SDI bits DATA All 32 bits of the word SSM The state of the SSM bits Label Name The label name Data 32 bit The value of the da...

Page 712: ...ondition Identifies various errors in the frame see Error Conditions on page 709 Remote command SEARch TRIGger ARINc TYPE on page 1993 Label setup Condition Label min Label max The label setup consist...

Page 713: ...Ding on page 1995 SEARch TRIGger ARINc ERRor PARity on page 1995 SEARch TRIGger ARINc ERRor TIMing on page 1996 13 13 5 2 ARINC search results To get search results Enable the search You can minimize...

Page 714: ...ecode results 721 Search on decoded SpaceWire data 723 13 14 1 SpaceWire basics The SpaceWire links are a Point to point P2P connection between a node and another node or a rooter The link is full dup...

Page 715: ...ing of an Escape ESC and a Flow Control Token FCT Time Code consisting of an ESC followed by a single data character Figure 13 28 SpaceWire control codes 13 14 2 SpaceWire configuration 13 14 2 1 Spac...

Page 716: ...Rce on page 2000 Threshold setup Sets the threshold value for the strobe data signal Threshold Enter individual values for each line directly in the fields Couple thresholds Enables coupling i e the s...

Page 717: ...eck is the main indicator for the decoder to do packet alignment Remote command BUS m SWIRe BPOSition on page 1999 Min Gap SpaceWire can have idle phases where strobe and data signals are not being se...

Page 718: ...e honeycomb display Available are Off Edges Binary 13 14 2 4 Configuring the SpaceWire signals For configuration assign the lines to the input channels and define the logical thresh olds and the hyste...

Page 719: ...he serial bus are channel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus is selected Type Selects the trigger type for the SpaceWire...

Page 720: ...0 or X do not care To enter the pat tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Condition Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a...

Page 721: ...e basic trigger settings proceed in the following way 1 Press the Bus key and select the Shortcuts tab 2 Press Setup trigger 3 Tap the Source button and select the Serial bus trigger source 4 Select t...

Page 722: ...contains information about all decoded frames Details frame contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the Decode results table Table 13 20 Content of the Decode results table Col...

Page 723: ...erBus for the configured proto col For general information on how to handle the search functionality see Chapter 11 Search functions on page 419 13 14 5 1 SpaceWire search setup Access Bus Shortcuts t...

Page 724: ...d SEARch TRIGger SWIRe TIME CONDition on page 2013 SEARch TRIGger SWIRe TIME MAX on page 2013 SEARch TRIGger SWIRe TIME MIN on page 2013 Data Data Pattern Sets the specified data type for the data pat...

Page 725: ...AMe m STATe on page 2015 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m STOP on page 2015 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m TYPE on page 2016 13 14 5 3 Searching SpaceWire Prerequisite A serial bus is configured for the Space...

Page 726: ...26 Ethernet configuration 727 Ethernet trigger 732 Ethernet decode results 736 Search on decoded Ethernet data 737 13 15 1 The Ethernet protocol The two Ethernet protocol variants that R S RTO6 K540 c...

Page 727: ...he correct serial bus is selected See also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus Remote command BUS m TYPE on page 1670 Decode...

Page 728: ...olarity Normal or Inverted of the data signal This setting is only avail able in 10BASE T Remote command BUS m ETHernet POLarity on page 2017 Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization o...

Page 729: ...e diagram Remote command BUS m THReshold on page 1671 13 15 2 2 Ethernet display settings Access Bus Display tab For common display settings see Chapter 13 1 3 Display on page 487 To enhance the decod...

Page 730: ...00 1B C5 06 C0 00 36 LuxconSy 00 1B C5 06 D0 00 36 TesElect 00 1B C5 06 E0 00 36 TwoDimen 00 1B C5 06 F0 00 36 LlcEmzio 00 1F BE Shenzhen 00 21 8F Avantgar 00 21 90 GoliathS 00 21 91 D Link 00 21 92...

Page 731: ...oneycomb display Available are Edges Shows where the decoder identified transitions through the threshold Binary Shows the bits as identified by the decoder Descramble Shows the bits after signal has...

Page 732: ...u need information on how to get started with triggering on Ethernet 10BASE T signals see Chapter 13 15 3 2 Triggering on Ethernet signals on page 736 Other wise proceed with the Ethernet trigger sett...

Page 733: ...er to any bit pattern data that can be freely specified starting from the beginning of the frame The trigger instant is after the last bit of the specified data pattern Adv frame Triggers on an advanc...

Page 734: ...ETHernet BITRate on page 2019 Bit index Defines the position of the first bit of the data pattern Bit index oper ator Sets the operator Equal Greater or equal or In range Bit index Sets the bit index...

Page 735: ...ge Remote command TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TCONdition on page 2024 TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TMAX on page 2024 TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TMIN on page 2024 Frame check Defines the frame check sequence va...

Page 736: ...see Chap ter 13 15 3 1 Ethernet trigger settings on page 732 13 15 4 Ethernet decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete the signal can be decoded 1 In the Protocol dialog Se...

Page 737: ...e all the bytes in a separate data table activate Show details The data format is always hexadecimal CRC FrameCheck Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC Destination Symbol Translation or symbolic label of the d...

Page 738: ...ou need information on how to get started with searching Ethernet data see Chap ter 13 15 5 3 Searching Ethernet data on page 741 Otherwise proceed with the Ethernet search setup 13 15 5 1 Ethernet se...

Page 739: ...SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMIN on page 2032 SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMAX on page 2032 Length Type Frame To search for a frame length or frame type a type length pattern or optionally a range...

Page 740: ...he search dialog The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines For an introduction to search results see Chapter 11 1 2 Search results on page 420 C...

Page 741: ...eria according to Chapter 13 15 5 1 Ethernet search setup on page 738 6 To acquire a waveform press Single The R S RTO6 performs an Ethernet decode according to the thresholds and pro tocol settings o...

Page 742: ...protocol with a fixed word length of 64 bits The structure of MDIO frames is shown in the following tables Table 13 23 MDIO frame structure according to Clause 22 Management Frame Fields Frame PRE ST...

Page 743: ...PMA that there is no data to convey Instead of a specific hardware trigger the option R S RTO6 K540 uses a predefined generic serial bus pattern trigger It simply triggers on a bit pattern in the dat...

Page 744: ...d Data Defines the source settings for the data signal Typically select any of the analog channels C1 C4 or digital channels D0 D15 depending on your application but not the same as for Clock Math or...

Page 745: ...et standard 2 0 V and 0 8 V Auto thresholds Executes a measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude Couple thresholds Overwrites the...

Page 746: ...resented in the decode table The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display Available are Final Edges Binary 13 16 2 3 Configuring MDIO signal...

Page 747: ...ccess Bus Shortcuts tab Setup trigger In this section all trigger settings are described The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setu...

Page 748: ...fines the protocol type of the selected serial bus Remote command BUS m TYPE on page 1670 MDIO Trigger Type Selects the trigger type for MDIO analysis Frame Start Sets the trigger to the start of fram...

Page 749: ...ATA ADDRESS 16 bits For the parameters to be specified see ST on page 749 OP on page 749 PHYAD PRTAD on page 749 REGAD DEVAD on page 750 and DATA ADDRESS on page 750 Remote command TRIGger m MDIO TYPE...

Page 750: ...ct the trigger type to be used for MDIO protocol analysis 6 If the trigger type Data is selected the frame pattern has to be specified For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings...

Page 751: ...lause 45 only 01 Write frame in Clause 22 or Clause 45 10 Read frame in Clause 22 or Post Read frame in Clause 45 11 Read frame in Clause 45 PHYAD PRTAD Address field shown as 2 hex characters corresp...

Page 752: ...r general information on how to handle the search functionality see Chapter 11 Search functions on page 419 If you need information on how to get started with searching MDIO data see Chap ter 13 16 5...

Page 753: ...50 REGAD DEVAD Sets the register address or device address 5 bits of the frame pattern available only in search criteria type Data Remote command SEARch TRIGger MDIO REGI on page 2050 DATA ADDRESS Def...

Page 754: ...erial bus that is set to MDIO e g SB1 unless already selected The search dialog for MDIO protocol analysis is opened There are no additional search criteria to be specified 5 To acquire a waveform pre...

Page 755: ...r it is write only Only one of the masters is the active master bus owner master BOM which can initiate command sequences on the bus The interface has two lines one clock signal SCLK controlled by the...

Page 756: ...bits P Address frames 8 bits P BP Command frame Address and data frames Figure 13 32 General structure of a RFFE Write command sequence SSC Command payload 8 bits P SA 4 bits Data frames 8 bits P Addr...

Page 757: ...ddition you can find command sequences of master to master communication and interrupt sum mary and identification command sequences 13 17 2 RFFE configuration 13 17 2 1 RFFE configuration settings Ac...

Page 758: ...al bus Alternatively digital channels can be used if MSO option R S RTO6 B1 is installed Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time For triggering on a serial bus analog or digital ch...

Page 759: ...ab Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate Remote command BUS m FAUToset on page 1671 Glitch filter Enables the glitch filter on the SCLK and SDATA l...

Page 760: ...lect the tab of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 3 In the Setup tab select the protocol RFFE 4 Select the RFFE Version 5 Select the Read mode 6 Tap SCLK and select the waveform of the clock...

Page 761: ...mmand BUS m RFFE VERSion on page 2060 Type Selects the trigger type for RFFE analysis The instrument triggers always at the end of the met trigger criteria Remote command TRIGger m RFFE TYPE on page 2...

Page 762: ...66 Set a register address condition to trigger only on command sequences that write data to the specified register See Address on page 766 Set a data pattern condition to trigger on data patterns expe...

Page 763: ...count of data frames in the command payload followed by 2 address frames with the address of the first extended register and reads back up to 8 data frames You can refine the trigger condition using t...

Page 764: ...on to trigger only on command sequences that write data to the specified register See Address on page 766 Set a data pattern condition to trigger on data patterns expected in the message See Data on p...

Page 765: ...command sequences that write data to the specified register See Address on page 766 Set a data pattern condition to trigger on data patterns expected in the message See Data on page 767 and Index on p...

Page 766: ...CONDition on page 2066 TRIGger m RFFE SADD MIN on page 2067 TRIGger m RFFE SADD MAX on page 2067 Address Defines the register address The register address setup consists of the condition and one or tw...

Page 767: ...which data frames are relevant for the trigger The setting is available for all Extended Register command sequences which can transfer more than one data frame The index allows you to check for a cert...

Page 768: ...d Decode is enabled 1 Press the Bus key and selet the Shortcuts tab 2 Press Setup trigger 3 Tap the Source button and select the Serial bus trigger source 4 Tap Serial bus and select the serial bus th...

Page 769: ...also Chapter 13 1 4 Content and format of the PTT file on page 489 Remote command BUS m RFFE SEQuence n SYMBol on page 2073 13 17 5 RFFE decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is com...

Page 770: ...nd sequence SA MID Address of the SA MID BC Byte count decimal value Address Register address hex value Label Symbolic name of the address if a label list is applied Table 13 27 Content of the Details...

Page 771: ...oded data set the search Source to the serial bus that is configured for the protocol to be analyzed See also Chapter 11 Search functions on page 419 13 17 6 1 RFFE search setup Access Bus Shortcuts t...

Page 772: ...ge 774 Extended Register Read Searches for Extended Register Read command sequences This search uses the same additional parameters as the Extended Register Write search Extended Register Write Long S...

Page 773: ...nsferred between masters this is the non BOM address The slave address settings are the same as in the RFFE trigger setup see Slave Addr MID on page 766 Remote command SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD CONDiti...

Page 774: ...IN on page 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE DATA IMAX on page 2080 Data Defines the pattern of the interrupt identification sequence which consists of interrupt slots 15 to 0 The setting is only available for...

Page 775: ...2 RFFE configuration on page 757 and Decode is enabled 1 Press the Bus key and selet the Shortcuts tab 2 Tap Setup search 3 If the dialog box does not contain a search entry tap the Add icon to creat...

Page 776: ...77 100BASE T1 trigger 782 100BASE T1 decode results 787 Search on decoded 100BASE T1 data 789 13 18 1 100BASE T1 basics The BR PHY has the following objectives Provides a PHY that supports full duplex...

Page 777: ...in the best part of a twisted pair channel This in turn improves return loss reduces crosstalk and EMI allows for a more aggressive Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC filtering and lower cost often lo...

Page 778: ...HBTO FTYP on page 2088 BUS m HBTO FDIF on page 2087 BUS m HBTO FDAP on page 2087 BUS m HBTO FDAM on page 2087 Reverse Defines the reversed signal settings The reverse direction is optional and can be...

Page 779: ...gnal can have three states High the signal value is higher than the positive threshold Low the signal value is below the negative threshold Zero signal is between the positive and the negative thresho...

Page 780: ...089 Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate Remote command BUS m FAUToset on page 1671 13 18 2 3 100BASE T1 display settings Access Bus Display tab F...

Page 781: ...code layer is displayed Ternary sym bols Decoded ternary symbols Scrambled bits Scrambled ternary bits Descrambled bits Descrambled ternary bits Reversed Bits Reserved bits 13 18 2 4 Configuring 100BA...

Page 782: ...trigger setup For a list of supported trigger conditions refer to data sheet Make sure that In the Bus Setup tab The correct Protocol is selected The data sources of the serial bus are channel signal...

Page 783: ...k Data Index The frame contains addresses of the devices and MAC control information that define how to go about transmitting and receiving frames IDLE Type Triggers on an idle frame The frame is used...

Page 784: ...s use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Data Max The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions In range and Out of range Remote command...

Page 785: ...tern In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Data Max The...

Page 786: ...m HBTO DATA DMIN on page 2095 TRIGger m HBTO DATA DMAX on page 2095 Index Sets the specified value or range within this series of data that is considered for the analysis The index setup consists of...

Page 787: ...used for 100BASE T1 protocol analy sis 6 To refine the trigger settings configure additional settings which are available for some trigger types For details see Chapter 13 18 3 100BASE T1 trigger on p...

Page 788: ...ource address of the frame Type Length The sub protocol e g HTML video etc determines what meaning this field has Since the content of this data area is not decoded the interpretation of this field is...

Page 789: ...d data To search on decoded data set the search source to SerBus for the configured proto col For general information on how to handle the search functionality see Chapter 11 Search functions on page...

Page 790: ...ddress pattern In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Dat...

Page 791: ...tern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Data Max The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions In range and Out of range Remote command SEARch TRIGger HB...

Page 792: ...h The index setup consists of the condition and one or two index values Condition Defines the operator to set a specific index e g Equal or a range Index Min Index Defines the bit pattern of the index...

Page 793: ...ded and analyzed The search for events is set up in the following way 1 Press the Bus key and selet the Shortcuts tab 2 Tap Setup search 3 If the dialog box does not contain a search entry tap the Add...

Page 794: ...sted pair cable or better cable Achieves bit error rate BER of less than 1e 10 Support for up to at least 15 meters of cable length in the automotive link segment To achieve the above objectives 1000B...

Page 795: ...See also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Forward Defines the forward signal settings You can choose between a differential and single ended signal and set the source channel for the...

Page 796: ...of the data signal You can select between Normal and Inverted For Normal polarity active high is defined as 1 V and active low is defined as 1 V For Inverted polarity active high is defined as 1 V and...

Page 797: ...s function in the bus network Decode layer Selects the decode layer Decoding is performed in several steps and the end results are presented in the decode table The decode layer selects an interim ste...

Page 798: ...ress the Bus key on the front panel 2 Select the tab of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 3 In the Setup tab select the protocol 1000BASE T1 4 Select the type and source for the reversed and...

Page 799: ...s is selected Type Selects the trigger type for 1000BASE T1 analysis Remote command TRIGger m TBTO TYPE on page 2126 Frame Start Type Triggers on the start of frame MAC Frame Type Triggers on a media...

Page 800: ...he interface in the device that receives the frame If the destination address does not match the interface s own Ethernet address then the interface is free to ignore the rest of the frame Condition D...

Page 801: ...ger m TBTO SADDress MAX on page 2133 Length Type Sets the specified length type to be triggered on The length type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns The value in this field...

Page 802: ...setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns Condition Defines the operator to set a specific data e g Equal or Not Equal or a range Data Min Data Defines the bit pattern of the data p...

Page 803: ...te command TRIGger m TBTO ERRor FEC on page 2131 CRC error Errors Triggers on a frame that has a mismatch of the cyclic redundancy check CRC value between the transmitting and receiving device Remote...

Page 804: ...3 19 4 1000BASE T1 decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete the signal can be decoded 1 In the Serial Bus dialog Setup tab enable Decode 2 In the Serial Bus dialog Display t...

Page 805: ...e g Idle MAC or data Destination Destination symbol of the frame Source Source address of the frame Type Length The sub protocol e g HTML video etc determines what meaning this field has Since the con...

Page 806: ...rch on decoded 1000BASE T1 data Using the search functionality you can find various events in the decoded data You can find the same events that you can trigger on and even many more since several eve...

Page 807: ...me Type Searches for a Media Access Control MAC frame that matches the specified Destina tion address Source address Length Type Frame check Data or Index condition The frame contains addresses of the...

Page 808: ...Remote command SEARch TRIGger TBTO DADDress CONDition on page 2135 SEARch TRIGger TBTO DADDress MIN on page 2136 SEARch TRIGger TBTO DADDress MAX on page 2135 Source address Sets the specified source...

Page 809: ...LENGth MIN on page 2140 SEARch TRIGger TBTO LENGth MAX on page 2139 Frame check Sets the specified frame check to be searched for The frame check setup consists of the condition and one or two data p...

Page 810: ...data that is considered for the search The index setup consists of the condition and one or two index values Condition Defines the operator to set a specific index e g Equal or a range Index Min Inde...

Page 811: ...Enable the search You can minimize shift or close the search dialog The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines For an introduction to search resu...

Page 812: ...according to Chapter 13 19 5 Search on decoded 1000BASE T1 data on page 806 6 To acquire a waveform press Single The R S RTO6 performs an 1000BASE T1 decode according to the thresholds and protocol s...

Page 813: ...e high speed protocol HSIC High Speed Inter Chip is used for the communication between on board devices Figure 13 35 USB Topology mass storage device printer USB hub and mouse human interface device c...

Page 814: ...LSB sent first while the most significant bit byte MSB is sent last HSIC High Speed Inter Chip an industry standard for USB chip to chip intercon nection with a 2 signal strobe data source synchronous...

Page 815: ...where the PID fields starts Figure 13 38 Start of a high speed packet after an SE0 the packet starts with a SYNC field or SOP followed by the data packet SE0 Single ended zero both D and D wire are on...

Page 816: ...DATA1 MDATA DATA2 are followed by a CRC16 which is 16 bits long over the data field No CRC is used for handshake packets EOP end of package the devices determine the length of the data field with the...

Page 817: ...us PING 0xB4 Used for monitoring high speed data flow Token packets IN OUT SETUP and PING packets have the following format SYNC PID ADDR ENDP CRC5 EOP Start of frame packets SOF have the following fo...

Page 818: ...CRC5 error CRC16 for USB 1 x only frame length error for USB 1 x only Bus Event Triggering on reset resume or suspend 13 20 2 USB 2 0 configuration If you need information on how to get started with c...

Page 819: ...also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Protocol type Defines the USB protocol technology and transmission speed USB Low speed Selects USB 2 0 low speed protocol 1 5 Mbit s Figure 13 40...

Page 820: ...Protocol analysis R S RTO6 820 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 USB Full speed Selects USB 2 0 full speed protocol 12 Mbit s Figure 13 41 USB full speed protocol configuration USB option R S RTO6 K570...

Page 821: ...al 1801 6687 02 05 USB High speed Selects USB high speed protocol 480 Mbit s As the signal is differ ential there is only one source and one threshold to be defined Figure 13 42 USB high speed protoco...

Page 822: ...rence and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus Remote command BUS m USB DPLus SOURce on page 2148 BUS m USB DMINus SOURce o...

Page 823: ...tude Remote command BUS m USB DPLus THReshold on page 2149 BUS m USB DMINus THReshold on page 2150 BUS m USB DIFFerential THReshold on page 2150 BUS m USB DATA THReshold on page 2150 BUS m USB STRobe...

Page 824: ...pe The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup For a list of supported trigger conditions refer to data sheet Figure 13 44 USB trig...

Page 825: ...time out Resume Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the Resume field For more information on the resume condition see the USB standard The trigger instant will be declared after the defined 20 ms ti...

Page 826: ...token types OUT IN or SETUP the following conditions can be set You can refine the trigger condition See PID error on page 829 See End Point on page 829 See Address on page 829 SOF Token For the trig...

Page 827: ...lected If an error is found in the PID s complementary form the trigger is set immediately after the 8th bit of the PID If no PID error is found no trigger is set See PID error on page 829 Remote comm...

Page 828: ...ne the trigger condition See Address on page 829 See End Point on page 829 See PID error on page 829 Error condition Sets the trigger in case of one of the following eight different error condition ty...

Page 829: ...pecific conditions is executed or not Condition Defining a specific address or an address range requires to set the operator to one of the following equal not equal less than less than or equal greate...

Page 830: ...f Condition TRIGger m USB FCONdition is set to INRange or OORange Remote command TRIGger m USB WFRN on page 2161 TRIGger m USB FCONdition on page 2156 TRIGger m USB FMIN on page 2156 TRIGger m USB FMA...

Page 831: ...r m USB WSEU on page 2162 TRIGger m USB SCONdition on page 2158 TRIGger m USB SMIN on page 2158 TRIGger m USB SMAX on page 2159 ET Defines whether an Endpoint Type ET check that meets specific conditi...

Page 832: ...e decoded 1 In the Serial Bus dialog Setup tab enable Decode 2 In the Serial Bus dialog Display tab select additional result display settings Show table and Show binary 3 If required enable Zoom coupl...

Page 833: ...Chapter 24 17 21 3 Decode results on page 2162 13 20 5 Search on decoded USB 2 0 data Using the search functionality you can find various events in the decoded data You can find the same events that...

Page 834: ...settings can be specified in the tabs below the Search criteria dialog Remote command SEARch TRIGger USB SSOP on page 2177 SEARch TRIGger USB STOKen on page 2179 SEARch TRIGger USB SDATa on page 2177...

Page 835: ...rn and optionally a packet position have to be specified You can refine the search condition See Payload check on page 837 Remote command SEARch TRIGger USB DATA on page 2171 Handshake Searches for fo...

Page 836: ...on page 2170 Glitch Error Searches for glitch errors errors in the bit period see USB standard for the definition of glitch Remote command SEARch TRIGger USB GLITcherror on page 2174 Address check En...

Page 837: ...sets the start value of a frame number range Max Sets the end value of a frame number range if Condition SEARch TRIGger USB FCONdition is set to INRange or OORange Remote command SEARch TRIGger USB W...

Page 838: ...r USB PMAX on page 2175 SEU check Enables the search for an SEU that meets specific conditions For SEU see SEU on page 831 Condition Defining a specific SEU value or an SEU value range requires to set...

Page 839: ...ote commands SEARch RESult USB PCOunt on page 2187 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STATus on page 2187 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STARt on page 2186 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STOP on page 2187 SEARch RESu...

Page 840: ...s on page 442 13 21 USB 3 1 option R S RTO6 K570 Option R S RTO6 K570 analyzes Universal Serial Bus USB signals encoded by the USB 3 1 Gen1 coding standard To use the full functionality of the option...

Page 841: ...nnector shell B USB 2 0 unshielded twisted pair C USB 3 0 USB 3 1 shielded twisted pair D USB 3 0 USB 3 1 shielded twisted pair 1 Voltage bus VCC power supply pin 5 V 2 Differential data signal D 3 Di...

Page 842: ...or Chindi ap Specific protocol features Key features of USB 3 1 Gen 1 that are addressed by option R S RTO6 K570 include Since 5 Gbps is too fast for serial pattern triggering the option uses a search...

Page 843: ...scrambling is set to 0FFFFh Any number of consecutive BRST ordered sets may be received BIAM Bus Interval Adjustment The bus interval is the period that establishes the integral boundary of service in...

Page 844: ...k to the active U0 state prior to ini tiating an isochronous transfer PNGR PING_RESPONSE This transaction packet is sent by a device in response for each PING received from the host PCAP Port Capabili...

Page 845: ...n error UDEF Unknown Undefined data cannot be identified as any specific USB 3 1 frame because the measured signal does not match with the specifications of any defined frame Therefore in this case th...

Page 846: ...for both link level and end to end flow con trol The fields in the Link Control Word are detailled in Table 13 37 Table 13 36 Short frames that start with fields HPSTART and Type and end with CRC and...

Page 847: ...um TT S Length StreamId Rsvd SSI WPA DBI PP NBI ERDY Rsvd Device Address Sub Type Rsvd D EPT Num Rsvd Num P Rsvd StreamId Rsvd Port Capa bility Sub Type Link Speed Rsvd Num HP Buf Rsvd Dir OTG Rsvd Ti...

Page 848: ...Field7 Field8 Field9 Error CRC Error Length Error Unknown Value out of range Packet Incomplete Unknown Unknown Device Notification HPSTART Type Rsvd Device Address SubType NotType CRC LCW Unknown Hea...

Page 849: ...also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Protocol type Selects the USB 3 1 protocol type SuperSpeed USB 3 1 Gen 1 with 5 Gbit s data rate Remote command BUS m USBThree TYPE on page 2189...

Page 850: ...ere are two ways to set the thresholds Threshold Enter the upper and lower values directly into the fields Find thresh olds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresh olds to the...

Page 851: ...page 2190 Zero frequency fz CTLE Sets the zero frequency for the transfer function of the CTLE algorithm Remote command BUS m CTLE Z1FReq on page 2191 Pole frequency wp1 wp2 CTLE Sets the pole 1 2 fr...

Page 852: ...f the coefficient Remote command BUS m USBThree DFE COEFficient on page 2191 Number of Taps DFE Sets a number of taps for the decision feedback filter Remote command BUS m USBThree DFE TCONt on page 2...

Page 853: ...on on how to get started with triggering on USB 3 1 signals see Chapter 13 21 3 2 Triggering on USB 3 1 on page 856 Otherwise proceed with the USB 3 1 trigger settings 13 21 3 1 USB 3 1 trigger settin...

Page 854: ...arameters for the fields listed in the Set details dialog The trigger instant is the last criterion that is fulfilled Remote command TRIGger m USBThree FRENable on page 2200 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n...

Page 855: ...rames and fields see Frame types Remote command TRIGger m USBThree FIENable on page 2200 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o ENABle on page 2200 Data Defines for the selected field how a data check is ex...

Page 856: ...203 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o IMIN on page 2203 TRIGger m USBThree IMAX on page 2203 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o IMAX on page 2203 13 21 3 2 Triggering on USB 3 1 Prerequisite A bus is con...

Page 857: ...ts Table The results are shown in two tables Decode results contains information about all decoded frames Details frame contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the Decode result...

Page 858: ...FLD o STARt on page 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o STOP on page 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o VAL on page 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o FVAL on page 2208 13 21 5 Searc...

Page 859: ...tings on page 853 Remote command SEARch TRIGger USBThree ERENable on page 2209 SEARch TRIGger USBThree ERRor m ENABle on page 2209 SEARch TRIGger USBThree FRENable on page 2209 SEARch TRIGger USBThree...

Page 860: ...e Chapter 11 1 2 Search results on page 420 Chapter 11 4 2 Display zoom settings on page 440 Remote commands SEARch RESult USBThree FCOunt on page 2215 SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m TYPE on page 2214...

Page 861: ...mation on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi gate the search results see also To display search zoom windows on page 442 13 22 USBPD option R S RTO6 K570 R S RTO6 K570 is...

Page 862: ...s defined by the message type of the message header see Table 13 42 Extended messages can have a different length up to the defined maximum length of an extended message It is used to transfer informa...

Page 863: ...essage Extended XSRS Security response Extended XSRQ Security request Extended XSTA Status Extended More information on the USBPD protocol including all specifications down to the field contents is av...

Page 864: ...Remote command BUS m USBPd SOURce on page 2219 vData Sets the threshold value of the data Remote command BUS m USBPd THReshold on page 2219 Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the data Remot...

Page 865: ...ayed as 32 bit data words If the Show decode detail is enabled you cannot do a search and trigger on USBPD frames Remote command BUS m USBPd DETail on page 2219 Show thresholds If enabled the threshol...

Page 866: ...s 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2 Select the tab of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 3 In the Setup tab set Protocol USBPD 4 Select the data source 5 Enter the Thresholds 6 Enable D...

Page 867: ...he frame type for the USBPD analysis For the available packet types see Frame packet types on page 862 You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed of the frame To specify these...

Page 868: ...only applied and the Condition Summary is only shown in the table if Enable is checked For an overview of frames and fields see Frame packet types on page 862 Remote command TRIGger m USBPd FIENable o...

Page 869: ...the following conditions equal in range Min Specifies the index or sets the start value of an index range Max Sets the the end value of an index range if Condition is set to INRange Remote command TRI...

Page 870: ...tab select additional result display settings Show table and Show binary 3 If required enable Zoom coupling For a description of the display settings see also Chapter 13 1 3 Display on page 487 The i...

Page 871: ...he Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start Frame Type Type of the frame Info Information about the frame Table 13 44 Content of the Details f...

Page 872: ...acquire decoded data To search on decoded data set the search source to SerBus for the configured proto col For general information on how to handle the search functionality see Chapter 11 Search func...

Page 873: ...USBPd FRAMe m FLD n IMAX on page 2236 SEARch TRIGger USBPd IMIN on page 2236 SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m FLD n IMIN on page 2236 SEARch TRIGger USBPd IOPerator on page 2237 SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAM...

Page 874: ...create a user defined search on page 434 4 Tap Source and select the serial bus that is set to USBPD e g SerBus1 unless already selected The search dialog for USBPD protocol analysis is opened 5 Speci...

Page 875: ...differential signal with a data rate of 80 Mbps to 1 5GHz This mode is used for the transmission of large volumes of information A low power mode LP single ended signal with a data rate 10 Mbps This m...

Page 876: ...DPHY VARiant on page 2245 Physical configuration Selects the number of data lanes and if the clock lane and low power are available Remote command BUS m DPHY CONFig on page 2243 Source Connection Def...

Page 877: ...ile the high speed mode signaling is differential Remote command BUS m DPHY CP PROBe on page 2244 BUS m DPHY DNZero PROBe on page 2247 BUS m DPHY DPZero PROBe on page 2247 BUS m DPHY DPONe PROBe on pa...

Page 878: ...r THLower on page 2246 BUS m DPHY DPZero LPOWer THLower on page 2246 Couple thresholds Set thresholds Enables coupling i e the same threshold and hysteresis value is used for all lanes Remote command...

Page 879: ...the results in multiple lanes Remote command BUS m DPHY SMLanes on page 2248 13 23 2 3 Configuring the D PHY signals For configuration assign the lines to the input channels and define the logical th...

Page 880: ...nel signals In the Trigger Setup tab The Trigger on Single event The trigger Source Serial bus The correct Serial bus is selected Serial bus Selects the serial bus to be triggered on Make sure to sele...

Page 881: ...er to the transmission end of a high speed packet HS Packet Header Type Sets the trigger to a packet header of a high speed package The header consists of a data identifier containing the Virtual Chan...

Page 882: ...LP Escape Mode Type Sets the trigger to an escape mode event LP Lane Turnaround Type Sets the trigger to a low power turnaround a reversion of the transmission direction LP HS Request Type Sets the t...

Page 883: ...Sets the specified specific word count to be triggered on The word count setup con sists of the condition and one or two data patterns In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not ca...

Page 884: ...ex Min Index Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range Index Max Sets the maximum value of a range for Condition In range Out of range Remote command For Type HS Data TRIGger m DPHY DIDX...

Page 885: ...serial bus is complete the signal can be decoded 1 In the Serial Bus dialog Setup tab enable Decode 2 In the Serial Bus dialog Display tab select additional result display settings Show table and Sho...

Page 886: ...ata Word count or data value Number of Packets Number of packets in the frame Tools Press Display settings in the Decode Results table to access the Display tab Remote commands Remote commands are des...

Page 887: ...f a high speed packet HS Packet Header Type Searches for a packet header of a high speed package The header consists of a data identifier containing the Virtual Channel and the Data Type and a Word Co...

Page 888: ...MIN on page 2264 Word Count Data Searches for a specific word count data The word count setup consists of the condi tion and one or two data patterns Condition Defines the operator to set a specific...

Page 889: ...ondition and one or two data index values Condition Defines the operator to set a specific data Equal or a data range Index Min Index Defines the minimum index Index Max The second index pattern is re...

Page 890: ...RAMe m CS on page 2269 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DATA on page 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DTName on page 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DTYPe on page 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m ECC on page...

Page 891: ...peed components like smartphones and tablets within mobile devices For more details on the specifications refer to http mipi org specifications physical layer M PHY Specification This protocol is the...

Page 892: ...ition in the range of nanoseconds Low power mode PWM supports seven gears with predefined frequency ranges This mode is used during low speed transmission for power conservation This mode utilizes the...

Page 893: ...unit Decoder 13 24 2 M PHY configuration 13 24 2 1 M PHY configuration settings Access Bus M PHY Setup tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected See also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup ge...

Page 894: ...ge 2275 Threshold setup Opens a dialog where you can set the tresholds for digitization of signals for each lane Thresholds Enter individual values for each line directly in the fields Couple threshol...

Page 895: ...formed in several steps and the end results are presented in the decode table The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display Final Final decod...

Page 896: ...Enter the Thresholds for each lane 8 Enable Decode 13 24 3 M PHY trigger 13 24 3 1 M PHY trigger settings Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup trigger Make sure that In the Bus Setup tab The correct Protoco...

Page 897: ...e This control frame is used for clock bit synchroni zation LCC Type Triggers on an M PHY Line Control Command LCC frame that matches the specified LCC Type WORD This control frame is used for configu...

Page 898: ...a UniPro DL PDU Continuation Of Pre empted Frame COF that matches the specified Prepare length TC Data Index DL PDU EOF Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame EOF frame that matches the specif...

Page 899: ...Acknowledgment Control NAC frame that matches the specified conditions Prepare length RReq CRC DL PDU AFC Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Acknowledgement and L2 Flow Control AFC frame that matches t...

Page 900: ...apter Control Protocol PACP frame that matches the specified condition Prepare length PACP Begin PACP Function ID Data Index CRC This control frame is used mainly for power mode change and L1 5 link m...

Page 901: ...tartup sequence Trigger Upr1 Type Triggers on a UniPro Trigger Upper1 frame This control frame is used for link startup sequence Trigger Upr2 Type Triggers on a UniPro Trigger Upper2 frame This contro...

Page 902: ...ves up to 75 power and is used with HS burst READ CAPABILITY Recovers data about the Optical Media Converter OMC capabilities READ MFG INFO Retrieves manufacturing ID and vendor specific information R...

Page 903: ...Ne MIN on page 2280 TRIGger m MPHY LWONe MAX on page 2280 For WORD 2 TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo CONDition on page 2280 TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo MIN on page 2281 TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo MAX on page 2281 For WORD 3...

Page 904: ...Index Min Index Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern edit...

Page 905: ...Y CRC CONDition on page 2286 TRIGger m MPHY CRC MIN on page 2287 TRIGger m MPHY CRC MAX on page 2287 Req Sets the specified Reset Link Request RReq or Credit Transmit Request CReq to be triggered on R...

Page 906: ...mats use the bit pattern editor see Chapter 13 1 7 Bit pattern editor on page 493 Data Max The second PACP Begin pattern is required to specify a range with conditions In range and Out of range Remote...

Page 907: ...or Errors Triggers on 8b10b symbol error For example some of the 10 bit combinations that do not map to 8 bit according to the specification are invalid 10 bit and therefore marked as this error Remot...

Page 908: ...which are available for some trigger types For details see Chapter 13 24 3 1 M PHY trigger settings on page 896 13 24 3 3 SSIC trigger settings The setting is available for SSIC option R S RTO6 K570 F...

Page 909: ...or this field in the Set details dialog The SSIC trigger frames and fields are the same as for USB3 1 see Frame types on page 842 Remote command TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRENable on page 2321 TRIGger m MPH...

Page 910: ...the start value of an index range Max Sets the end value of an index range if Condition is set to In range Remote command TRIGger m MPHY SSIC IOPerator on page 2325 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o I...

Page 911: ...fies the interpretation of the visual display The decode information condenses or expands depending on the horizontal scale Various data formats are available to show the result values Decode Results...

Page 912: ...nd various events in the decoded data You can find the same events that you can trigger on and even many more since several event types can also be combined Before you can start the search you have to...

Page 913: ...iPro DL PDU Continuation Of Pre empted Frame COF that matches the specified TC Data or Index condition DL PDU EOF Type Searches for a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame EOF that matches the specified FSN or C...

Page 914: ...ers data about the Optical Media Converter OMC capabilities READ MFG INFO Retrieves manufacturing ID and vendor specific information READ VEND INFO Retrieves the additional four delimited bytes contai...

Page 915: ...n on page 2305 SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWFour MIN on page 2305 SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWFour MAX on page 2305 TC Sets the specified Traffic Class TC to be searched for TC is used for classifying the traffic...

Page 916: ...RIGger MPHY DATA ICONdition on page 2307 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA IMIN on page 2307 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA IMAX on page 2308 FSN Sets the specified Frame Sequence Number FSN to be searched for The F...

Page 917: ...ation for the corre sponding TC from the remote end Data Defines the bit pattern of the RReq pattern In binary format use the following characters 1 0 or X do not care To enter the pattern in other fo...

Page 918: ...ition on page 2312 SEARch TRIGger MPHY PBEGin MIN on page 2312 SEARch TRIGger MPHY PBEGin MAX on page 2312 PACP Function ID Sets the specified PACP Function ID to be searched for The PACP Function ID...

Page 919: ...he specification are invalid 10 bit and therefore marked as this error Remote command SEARch TRIGger MPHY ERRor SYMBol on page 2314 Unknown Unipro Frame Errors Searches for unidentified UniPro frame e...

Page 920: ...log box does not contain a search entry tap the Add icon to create one as described in To create a user defined search on page 434 4 Specify the search criteria according to Chapter 13 24 5 1 M PHY se...

Page 921: ...page 2329 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n ENABle on page 2326 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRENable on page 2326 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n IMAX on page 2330 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC I...

Page 922: ...and the 5 bit block into 6 bits The 4 bit and the 6 bit blocks are then combined into a 10 bit Figure 13 49 Coding scheme of the 8b 10b The additional two bits I and j that join the stream are variab...

Page 923: ...on page 2335 Source Selects the source of the provided differential signal if Signal type Differential Remote command BUS m EBTB DIFFerential SOURce on page 2332 Source D Selects the source of the pro...

Page 924: ...ommand BUS m EBTB DMINus THReshold on page 2333 Find thresholds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude Remote comm...

Page 925: ...symbols K28 1 K28 5 K28 7 used for synchroniza tion or you can enter a pattern Remote command BUS m EBTB SYNC on page 2335 Pattern Selects a pattern that serves as a sync symbol Remote command BUS m E...

Page 926: ...n configuration settings see Chapter 13 25 2 1 8b 10b configuration set tings on page 922 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2 Select the tab of the bus you want to set up for example SB1 3 In the...

Page 927: ...ings 13 25 3 1 8b 10b trigger setup Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup trigger Type 8b 10b Selects the type of condition to be triggered on Available are K D symbol 8 bit pattern 10 bit pattern Expression...

Page 928: ...ue K D symbol Sets the y value of the data character Dx y to be triggered on if K D symbol Dx y Remote command TRIGger m EBTB DY on page 2337 8 bit pattern Sets the 8 bit pattern to be triggered on if...

Page 929: ...Error Condition Triggers on disparity errors Remote command TRIGger m EBTB DISParityerr on page 2336 Glitching error Error Condition Triggers on glitch errors Remote command TRIGger m EBTB GLITcherror...

Page 930: ...the configuration of the serial bus is complete the signal can be decoded 1 In the Protocol dialog Setup tab enable Decode 2 In the Protocol dialog Display tab select additional result display settin...

Page 931: ...b Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 24 17 26 3 Decode results on page 2339 13 25 5 Search on decoded 8b 10b data Using the search functionality you can find various events in th...

Page 932: ...bol K D symbol Selects the data character Dx y or control character to bea searched for You can specify the value of the data character to be searched for with Dx Value and Dy Value Remote command SEA...

Page 933: ...for if Type 10 bit Remote command SEARch TRIGger EBTB TBPA on page 2344 Expression Defines the expression to be searched for if Type Expression Remote command SEARch TRIGger EBTB SYME on page 2343 13...

Page 934: ...search criteria according to Chapter 13 25 5 1 8b 10b search setup on page 931 7 To acquire a waveform press Single The R S RTO6 performs a 8b 10b decode according to the thresholds and proto col sett...

Page 935: ...nd correction are also done in this layer The data link layer produces data link layer packets DLLP Physical layer includes the circuitry for the interface operation PCIe Packet Types The communicatio...

Page 936: ...LP PMASRL1 Power management Active State Request L1 DLLP PMRA Power management request acknowledg ment DLLP VENDS Vendor Specific DLLP IFC1P IFC2P Initialization flow control 1 2 posted requests DLLP...

Page 937: ...e also Chapter 13 1 1 Setup general settings on page 485 Generation Selects the generation of the PCIe technology PCIe Gen1 2 5 Gbit s Selects the PCIe generation 1 0 standard introduced in 2003 It ha...

Page 938: ...e 0 1 2 3 Select the signal sources for the logical lanes Usually the source is one of the analog channels Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the anal...

Page 939: ...ld value for the respective lane Remote command BUS m PCIE LONE THRLow on page 2349 BUS m PCIE LTHRee THRLow on page 2349 BUS m PCIE LTWO THRLow on page 2349 BUS m PCIE LZER THRLow on page 2349 High t...

Page 940: ...channel set the threshold the bitrate and the sync symbol For details on configuration settings see Chapter 13 26 2 1 PCIe configuration set tings on page 937 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2...

Page 941: ...BUS m CDR BITRate on page 2349 PLL settings Phase locked loop parameters are listed below Note Nomial bit rate bandwidth and relative bandwidth are interacting settings Modi fying one parameter also c...

Page 942: ...ata signal Remote command BUS m CDR SYNC on page 2351 Selected results The PLL requires some time to synchronize to the phase of the data stream You can select when the CDR algorithm returns clock edg...

Page 943: ...or the PCI express analysis TLP Transac tion layer Sets the trigger on a defined type of the transaction layer packet DLLP Data link layer Sets the trigger on a defined type of the data link layer pac...

Page 944: ...nconditional swap atomic op request CAS Triggers on compare and swap atomic op request transaction type Remote command TRIGger m PCIE TLP TYPE on page 2359 Sequence Number TLP Transaction layer Trigge...

Page 945: ...RIGger m PCIE TLP DEID on page 2357 Read Write TLP Transaction layer Triggers on a read and or write state Remote command TRIGger m PCIE TLP MERW on page 2358 Address Type TLP Transaction layer Trigge...

Page 946: ...for the different types according to their specifications Remote command TRIGger m PCIE DLLP TYPE on page 2355 DLLP Any Type conditions Sets the trigger to any type of DLLP DLLP MRDLLP conditions Spe...

Page 947: ...MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a mixed type presence Remote command TRIGger m PCIE DLLP MULT MIXT on page 2353 Authorized MRInit DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on an authorized state presence Remote...

Page 948: ...TLP Type MRInitFC1 InitFC2 UpdateFC DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a transaction layer type for a multi root data link layer trigger type Any Any transaction layer type P Posted credit N Non poste...

Page 949: ...ce DLLP ACK NAK conditions Triggers on the sequence field indicating what TLPs are affected by the ACK NAK Remote command TRIGger m PCIE DLLP SEQ on page 2355 DLLP Init FC1 InitFC2 UpdateFC conditions...

Page 950: ...PCIE DLLP VPAT on page 2355 Ordered set condition Triggers on an ordered set SKP OS Triggers on an SKP ordered sets Training Seq 1 2 Triggers on a training sequence ordered set Fast Training Seq Trigg...

Page 951: ...page 2356 TRIGger m PCIE ERRC INVP on page 2356 TRIGger m PCIE ERRC LCRC on page 2356 13 26 4 2 Triggering on PCIe Gen 1 2 Prerequisite A bus is configured for the PCIe Gen 1 2 signal to be analyzed F...

Page 952: ...e standard definition and the configuration settings The color coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display The decode information condenses o...

Page 953: ...frame table Column Description State State of the field Type Field type Numeric Hexadecimal value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field Tools Press Display settings in the Decode Resu...

Page 954: ...on that bus Remote command TRIGger m SOURce SBSelect on page 1675 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus Remote command BUS m TYPE on page 1670 Searches for PCI express Selects...

Page 955: ...nal swap atomic op request CAS Searches for compare and swap atomic op request transaction type Remote command SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP TYPE on page 2380 Sequence Number TLP Transaction layer Searches...

Page 956: ...PCIE TLP DEID on page 2377 Read Write TLP Transaction layer Searches for a read and or write state Remote command SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP MERW on page 2378 Address Type TLP Transaction layer Searches...

Page 957: ...or the different types according to their specifications Remote command SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP TYPE on page 2373 DLLP Any Type conditions Sets the trigger to any type of DLLP DLLP MRDLLP conditions...

Page 958: ...LP conditions Searches for a mixed type presence Remote command SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT MIXT on page 2370 Authorized MRInit DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for an authorized state presence Remot...

Page 959: ...TLP Type MRInitInit FC1 InitFC2 UpdateFC DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a transaction layer type for a multi root data link layer trigger type Any Any transaction layer type P Posted credit N Non...

Page 960: ...DLLP ACK NAK conditions Searches for the sequence field indicating what TLPs are affected by the ACK NAK Remote command SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP SEQ on page 2373 DLLP Init FC1 InitFC2 UpdateFC conditi...

Page 961: ...set Fast Training Seq Searches for a fast training sequence ordered set Electrical Idle OS Searches for an electrical idle ordered set that must be send by the transmitter before it can enter the ele...

Page 962: ...RRC DISP on page 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC ECRC on page 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC INVP on page 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC LCRC on page 2374 13 26 6 2 PCIe Gen 1 2 search results To get sear...

Page 963: ...6 SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FCOunt on page 2382 SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FLD n FVAL on page 2382 SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FLD n STATus on page 2382 SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FLD n TYPE on pa...

Page 964: ...ta Rate Type 3 DDR3 is a type of Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory SDRAM With option R S RTO6 K91 you can perform the following analysis on DDR3 data Decode the signal See Chapter 13 27 1 DDR c...

Page 965: ...page 2387 DQ Sets the channel for the data output signal You can select analog channels C1 to C4 and also active math and reference waveforms as source Remote command BUS m DDR DATA SOURce on page 23...

Page 966: ...sis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the respective lane Remote command BUS m DDR DATA HYSTeresis on page 2387 BUS m DDR STRBe HYSTeresis on page 2388 Bit rate for eye diagram Declares the nominal b...

Page 967: ...signals For configuration assign the lanes to the input channels and define the logical thresh olds and the hysteresis 1 Press the Bus key on the front panel 2 Select the tab of the bus you want to s...

Page 968: ...t started with searching for DDR data see Chap ter 13 27 2 3 Searching for DDR data on page 971 Otherwise proceed with the DDR search setup 13 27 2 1 DDR search setup Access Bus Shortcuts tab Setup se...

Page 969: ...ails dialog Remote command SEARch TRIGger DDR FIENable on page 2394 Value Set details Sets the data value of the field to be searched for The search data setup consists of a comparison condition and o...

Page 970: ...OPerator on page 2397 13 27 2 2 DDR search results To get search results Enable the search You can minimize shift or close the search dialog The search results are listed in the search result table an...

Page 971: ...SB1 7 To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events tap Enable in the search setup dialog The R S RTO6 displays the Search Results box that lists the detected events For information on...

Page 972: ...the frame Table 13 52 Content of the Details frame table Column Description State State of the field Numeric Hexadecimal value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field Remote commands Re...

Page 973: ...ical scale of the data source You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel vertical subtabs Eye 1 to Eye 4 Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the le...

Page 974: ...e command EYE m SOURce on page 2403 Reference signal In this section you can define the reference signal used for the eye diagram Clock CDR Protocol Reference signal Selects the type of waveform that...

Page 975: ...PROTocol SELect on page 2407 Horizontal settings Defines the horizontal settings Time units Horizontal settings Sets the method to define the horizontal scale of the eye diagram as absolute time or i...

Page 976: ...o a bit in the input data signal Range UI Number of unit intervals that are visible in the eye diagram Position UI Place of the zero point in the diagram in unit intervals The zero point is the alignm...

Page 977: ...FACTor on page 2405 Clock edge Explicit clock The clock edge sets the point in time when the state of the data signal is checked Positive Rising edge a positive voltage change Negative Falling edge a...

Page 978: ...bit period value 0 5 sets the clock edge to the middle of the bit period Remote command EYE m TIMReference CLOCk SAMTime on page 2407 13 27 4 2 Display settings Access App Cockpit Analysis DDR Eye Dis...

Page 979: ...the signal Remote command EYE m DISPlay PERSistence INFinite on page 2409 Time Persistence Sets a time factor that controls how long the waveform points fade away from the dis play Thus the R S RTO6 e...

Page 980: ...ontal direction Only the timestamps within the defined horizontal interval qualify for eye generation To apply the gate settings enable the State The gate definition is the same as gate definition for...

Page 981: ...gnal qualification Remote command EYE m QUALify SIGNal STATe on page 2412 Source Signal Selects the waveform to be compared Remote command EYE m QUALify SIGNal SOURce on page 2413 Condition Signal Sel...

Page 982: ...ntribute to the eye diagram same as State off Level transi tion Only bits after a signal transition contribute 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 Constant level Only bits without a preceding signal transition contribut...

Page 983: ...EYE m FILTer BPATtern RESet on page 2415 Protocol filter settings This setting is only available if the Source is set to SBx and the DDR serial bus analysis is enabled for the same bus Reset settings...

Page 984: ...n provides 16 digital channels grouped in two logic probes pods with 8 channels each The instrument ensures that analog and digital wave forms are time aligned and synchronized so that critical timing...

Page 985: ...ppears on the signal bar and indicates the assigned digital channels Individual digital channels do not have a signal icon If one or more parallel buses are active the roll mode is not available 14 1...

Page 986: ...nabled the selected digital channels are shown in the diagram Each channel is dis played as a logic signal Remote command BUS m PARallel DISPlay SHDI on page 2428 Technology Threshold Sets the logical...

Page 987: ...wing is given in the data sheet Threshold Enter the value directly in the field Technology Selects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits from a list and applies it to all digi...

Page 988: ...maximum value that is possible and useful for the signal and its settings Use this setting for noisy signals Robust Sets different hysteresis values for falling and rising edges to avoid an undefined...

Page 989: ...r positive integers Signed is used for positive and negative integers If the target file format is BIN you can save only signed and unsigned binary data The data format Signed writes signed data all o...

Page 990: ...k slope Clocked bus Selects the slope of the clock signal at which all digital channels of the bus are ana lyzed Remote command BUS m PARallel CLSLope on page 2429 14 1 1 3 Label settings Access Menu...

Page 991: ...skew value compensates delays that are known from the circuit specifics or caused by the different length of cables The skew between the probe boxes of the dig ital channels and the probe connectors o...

Page 992: ...resolution Shows the current digital resolution of the digital channels The maximum digital record length is always 200 MSa per digital channel This number is independent of the instal led memory Rem...

Page 993: ...ed with the digital probe 2 Connect the ground lead on each set of channels each pod with a probe grabber 3 Connect a grabber to one of the probes leads 4 Connect the grabber to a node in the circuit...

Page 994: ...the same for all active parallel buses 1 Open Menu Logic Setup 2 To set the thresholds use one of the following ways a Use the same value for all digital channels and all parallel buses In the Logic A...

Page 995: ...and displayed at once Thus you can see the cumulative occurrence of binary states and edge transi tions on the screen at once Bus signals are not overlapped The trigger point is always visible on the...

Page 996: ...ow Green channel is high Gray channel state is changing 3 In the diagram you can change the display order of the digital channels by drag ging the individual channels to the required position 4 To adj...

Page 997: ...Mode Holdoff on page 220 14 3 1 Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses Depending on the selected source the instrument provides the appropriate trigger types and the corresponding tr...

Page 998: ...strument provides the appropriate trigger types and the corresponding trigger settings For mixed signal analysis the following trigger types are available Edge see page 998 Width see page 999 Timeout...

Page 999: ...cal expression Defines a logical combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if Logic is set for Source If the Slope is positive the trigger occurs when the logical expression becomes...

Page 1000: ...34 Logical expression Defines a logical combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if Logic is set for Source As long as the digital signals match the logical expression true the pul...

Page 1001: ...s with a pulse width that equals Width The combination Range Outside and Delta 0 means to trigger on pulse widths Width Remote command TRIGger m PARallel WIDTh DELTa on page 2435 14 3 1 4 Timeout The...

Page 1002: ...Remote command TRIGger m PARallel TIMeout EXPRession DEFine on page 2433 TRIGger m PARallel STATe EXPRession DEFine on page 2433 TRIGger m PARallel PATTern EXPRession DEFine on page 2433 TRIGger m PA...

Page 1003: ...etup time Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while data is stable and not change its state The setup time can be negative In this case the setup interval starts after the clock edge and the h...

Page 1004: ...gger source parallel bus Clock source Selects the digital channel of the clock signal Remote command TRIGger m PARallel SETHold CSOurce VALue on page 2433 TRIGger m PARallel STATe CSOurce VALue on pag...

Page 1005: ...on page 2433 14 3 1 7 Pattern The pattern trigger identifies a logical state of several logically combined digital chan nels pattern and a time limitation holdoff The pattern definition is defined by...

Page 1006: ...switching See Timeout settings on page 1006 for a description of the settings The trigger event occurs when the pattern stays unchanged for the specified time Width Sets a pulse width as timing condi...

Page 1007: ...defines the maximum and minimum time limit respectively For the ranges Within and Outside the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits Delta Remote command TRIGger m PARalle...

Page 1008: ...ATtern CSOurce VALue on page 2433 Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if Logic is set for Source The Qualification Editor supports the entry...

Page 1009: ...D0 D1 A logic combination of digital channels Logic One of the parallel buses Par bus1 Par bus4 PB3 PB2 PB1 3 Select the trigger Type 4 Under Trigger type dependent settings configure the trigger 5 Fo...

Page 1010: ...ues is defined with Menu Logic Bus tab Data format If the data is written to XML or CSV files the selected format is used If the target file format is BIN you can save signed and unsigned binary data...

Page 1011: ...Remote commands for export to file EXPort WAVeform SOURce on page 1649 EXPort WAVeform NAME on page 1651 EXPort WAVeform SAVE on page 1651 Remote commands for remote data transfer BUS m PARallel DATA...

Page 1012: ...ossible to search on digital channels for specified events Search conditions use the same parameters as the trigger event definition see Chapter 14 3 1 Trigger settings for digital signals and paralle...

Page 1013: ...tings of the waveform generators The instrument preset does not affect the generator settings Each generator has its own preset Always use double shielded cables to prevent electromagentic interferenc...

Page 1014: ...15 1 1 General settings The general waveform generator settings are for enabling and presetting the generator and selecting the Operation Mode Enable Enables the waveform generator pattern generator...

Page 1015: ...ters of the generator to their default values The settings of the gener ators are not affected by an instrument preset They are also not stored in the user defined preset Remote command WGENerator m P...

Page 1016: ...2 05 Square Generates a square wave You can set its Frequency Period and Duty cycle Ramp Generates a ramp signal You can set its Frequency Period and Symmetry DC Generates a direct current DC signal Y...

Page 1017: ...R S RTO6 1017 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Pulse Generates a pulse signal You can set the Frequency Period and Pulse width Cardinal sine Generates a cardinal sine wave You can set the Frequency and Pe...

Page 1018: ...l 1801 6687 02 05 Cardiac Generates a cardiac signal You can set the Frequency and Period Gauss Generates a gauss signal You can set the Frequency and Period Lorentz Generates a Lorentz signal You can...

Page 1019: ...Period Remote command WGENerator m FUNCtion SELect on page 2444 Frequency Sets the frequency of the waveform The available frequency range depends on the selected Function Type see Frequency range of...

Page 1020: ...r a square waveform The duty cycle expresses for what percent age of the period the signal state is high Remote command WGENerator m FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle on page 2445 Symmetry Sets the symmetry of a...

Page 1021: ...5 1 3 2 AM modulation on page 1022 FM Frequency modulation See Chapter 15 1 3 4 FM modulation on page 1024 PWM Pulse width modulation See Chapter 15 1 3 3 PWM modulation on page 1023 FSK Frequency shi...

Page 1022: ...r signal is varied according to the modulation signal Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the AM modulation types Remote command WGENerator m MODulation AM FUNCtion on page...

Page 1023: ...2447 Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform The duty cycle expresses for what percent age fraction of the period the waveform is active i e the signal state is high Remote command WGENer...

Page 1024: ...m MODulation PWM DEPTh on page 2450 Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform the percentage of time that the waveform is rising Remote command WGENerator m MODulation PWM SYMMetry...

Page 1025: ...ulation waveform Remote command WGENerator m MODulation FM FREQuency on page 2448 Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform the percentage of time that the waveform is rising Remote...

Page 1026: ...p rate Frequency 1 Sets the frequency of the first signal in FSK modulated signal Remote command WGENerator m MODulation FSK FONE on page 2449 Frequency 2 Sets the frequency of the second signal in FS...

Page 1027: ...WEep FEND on page 2452 Sweep time Sets the duration of the sweep Remote command WGENerator m SWEep TIME on page 2452 15 1 5 Arbitrary The arbitrary waveform generator allows you to output a user defin...

Page 1028: ...ne only some of the values According to what you define the file format looks different and is handled differently With specified Rate Time values are ignored You can specify just rate and voltage val...

Page 1029: ...ormat number of samples 15 1 5 1 General settings Waveform source Selects the arbitrary waveform source You can load an existing file or load the current oscilloscope waveform Remote command WGENerato...

Page 1030: ...page 2454 Run single Generates a single period of the arbitrary waveform if Run mode is set to Single period Remote command WGENerator m ARBGen RUNSingle on page 2456 15 1 5 2 Saved waveform For a sa...

Page 1031: ...ommand WGENerator m ARBGen MULTichannel NAME on page 2453 WGENerator m ARBGen MULTichannel IMPort on page 2453 WGENerator m ARBGen MULTichannel OPEN on page 2453 15 1 5 3 Scope waveform For a scope wa...

Page 1032: ...1 Therefore normal operation may display increased emissions above the limits as speci fied in EN 55011 and or reduced interference resistance as required in EN 61326 1 table 1 basic requirements If...

Page 1033: ...format HEX BIN OCT DEC indicates how the samples are going to be interpreted Each sample is represented as 8bit value corresponding to the 8bit pattern generator considering the selected format Exampl...

Page 1034: ...gnal of the generator will be output after the trigger event You can choose between a Continuous and Single period duration Remote command PGENerator RUNMode on page 2457 Bit rate Sets the number of t...

Page 1035: ...fected by an instrument preset They are also not stored in the user defined preset Remote command WGENerator m PRESet on page 2443 PGENerator PRESet on page 2457 15 3 Output Access Gen Setup tab In th...

Page 1036: ...ts the high signal level of the output waveform Remote command WGENerator m VOLTage HIGH on page 2458 Low Sets the low signal level of the output waveform Remote command WGENerator m VOLTage LOW on pa...

Page 1037: ...bsolute level Displays the level of the noise in volts Remote command WGENerator m MODulation NLABsolute on page 2460 Absolute level For Function type DC only Sets the level for the DC signal Remote c...

Page 1038: ...age 2461 15 4 Coupling settings Access Gen Coupling In the R S RTO6 you can couple certain settings of the available waveform genera tors If one of the available coupling options is enabled for one of...

Page 1039: ...iation Frequency 1 Frequency 2 and Hop rate For Operation Mode Sweep Start frequency Stop frequency and Sweep time For Operation Mode Arbitrary Arb wfm source and Signal source You can still change th...

Page 1040: ...waveform generator This chapter explains step by step how to configure the waveform generator Configuring a function waveform 1040 Configuring a modulation waveform 1041 Configuring a sweep waveform 1...

Page 1041: ...e to the waveform 9 Press the Enable button to output the waveform at the output connector of the waveform generator Generating an PWM modulated waveform 1 Press the Gen key on the front panel 2 Selec...

Page 1042: ...the Modulation button 4 Tap Modulation type and select FSK 5 Set the Frequency 1 Frequency 2 and the Hop rate 6 If necessary change the Output settings or add Noise to the waveform 7 Press the Enable...

Page 1043: ...he Arbitrary button 4 Set the Arb wfm source to Scope waveform 5 Select the Run mode 6 Press the Signal source button and select the channel source for the waveform 7 Set the Sample rate 8 If necessar...

Page 1044: ...rential signal path TDR TDT analysis with option R S RTO6 K130 The module is installed at the rear panel of the instrument To ensure correct installa tion and calibration send the instrument to a Rohd...

Page 1045: ...3 m Always use double shielded cables to prevent electromagentic interference EMI from impairing measurement results Always use cables to connect the DUT or test fixture to the pulse source outputs N...

Page 1046: ...ons of the sys tem do not affect the pulse clock and deterministic conditions are avoided If the waveform aquisition is set to Average the free running clock mode can improve the measurement result In...

Page 1047: ...th 0 5 m length 3 m Calibration standards During calibration you measure the connecting cables of the measurement setup against standards Calibration standards assumed to be ideal Short with RF qualit...

Page 1048: ...correction values To calibrate the cables The calibration procedure is described for single ended TDR and TDT analysis If you need only TDR or only TDT the procedure is the same but with fewer calibra...

Page 1049: ...used short d Select Calibrate 7 Calibrate with open cable a Remove the short b Select Calibrate 8 Calibrate with a match a Connect a match to the cable that is connected to the Out connector b Select...

Page 1050: ...ics that you want to analyze 6 Enter the Bandwidth of the DUT 7 Select whether you want to see the time or the distance on the x axis Domain 8 If the distance is selected enter the permittivity of the...

Page 1051: ...bra tion standards and measure the correction parameters Measure with default values Starts the measurement with default correction values instead of calibrating the setup Default values are rough val...

Page 1052: ...nput channels that are connected to the Ref connector and the Out con nector of the pulse source Note The position of the DUT is shown for information only Do not connect the DUT Remote command TDRT P...

Page 1053: ...er the short is the Rohde Schwarz short that is delivered with the pulse source R S RTO6 B7 or another one If you do not use the Rohde Schwarz short enter the Electrical short length of the used short...

Page 1054: ...er Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Magnitude response plot Shows the graph of magnitude over frequency for the short calibration TDR and through calibration TDT Figure 16 4 Result of TDR and TDT calibration sm...

Page 1055: ...igher frequencies Save calibration Saves the current correction values to a file Using the saved file you can repeat the measurements at any time Remote command TDRT CALibration SAVE NAME on page 2468...

Page 1056: ...rescaled and you can see the impact of the frequency response calibration on the time domain waveform The setting is not available when measuring with default values Remote command TDRT CALibration U...

Page 1057: ...Front panel Setup Knobs Turn the vertical Position knob to change the position Remote command TDRT SIGNal m OFFSet on page 2470 TDRT SIGNal m POSition on page 2470 16 2 6 Measurement results To get e...

Page 1058: ...m Use cables with low loss Use a short that has a low impedance for high frequen cies Calibration Calibration with open failed Use cables with low loss Calibration Calibration with match failed Use ca...

Page 1059: ...is a special operating mode of R S RTO6 In this mode the usual ana lyzing tools cursor zoom measurements FFT and so on of the oscilloscope are deactivated The instrument displays the magnitude of the...

Page 1060: ...ands CHANnel m IQ WARNing STATe on page 2476 CHANnel m IQ WARNing MESSage on page 2476 As usual the signal icons of the enabled channels show the current settings In I Q mode the I Q settings are show...

Page 1061: ...t data in I Q mode 10 Gsample s Remote command IQ INSRate on page 2473 Input type Input mode Input type sets the format of the input signal Input mode selects the frequency band of a complex input sig...

Page 1062: ...is down converted filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the output I Q signal Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature com...

Page 1063: ...nel m STATe on page 1337 Carrier frequency Sets the carrier frequency of the modulated RF signal or of the complex signal in IF range The minimum carrier frequency is 10 mHz the maximum frequency corr...

Page 1064: ...ing and complex conjugation Input signal normal position lower sideband Inverse Upper Upper sideband in inverse position fc Input signal inverse position upper sideband fc x t e j2 fct Down conversion...

Page 1065: ...amples_ You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the Autonaming dialog see Chap ter 4 8 1 Autonaming on page 104 Save Saves the I Q data in the selected file Save As Opens the file selection d...

Page 1066: ...l instrument mode you can display and analyze the signal in the time domain In IQ mode you can acquire and save I Q data for external analysis on a computer The R S RTO6 display shows the magnitude of...

Page 1067: ...Start of sequence pattern with 48 bit or 96 bit length Remote command TRIGger m NFC EVENt on page 2478 Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition You can also drag the trigger lev...

Page 1068: ...functionalities provided with option R S RTO6 K12 All data for total jitter random jitter periodic jitter data dependant jitter and deter ministic jitter Allows separation into horizontal and vertical...

Page 1069: ...settings 1071 Jitter statistics and histogram 1077 Track of jitter measurement results 1078 Jitter spectrum 1079 18 1 1 Jitter measurements The measurement category Jitter gathers all measurements wh...

Page 1070: ...ement is based on the pulse width measurement You can select the pulse polarity to be measured TPulse k TPulse k 1 TPulse k for k 1 K 1 Cycle cycle duty cycle Difference between the duty cycle of two...

Page 1071: ...imilar except for the delay Skew delay tk tSource2 tSource1 for k 1 K See also Chapter 18 1 2 4 Delay measurement settings on page 1076 Skew phase Phase difference between the edges of two waveforms S...

Page 1072: ...change the selection tap Add Remove For details on the available measurements see Chapter 18 1 1 Jitter measurements on page 1069 Remote command MEASurement m MAIN on page 1483 MEASurement m ADDition...

Page 1073: ...ld measurements and for time interval error measurements option R S RTO6 K12 It selects the reference level of the data signal on which the time is measured The intersection of slope and reference lev...

Page 1074: ...intended to analyze serial data The clock can be a captured clock signal or it can be recovered from the data signal using one of the clock recovery algorithms Time interval error Unit interval Data r...

Page 1075: ...ffset 0 Other values introduce a timing offset in the results Remote command MEASurement m JITTer CDRMode on page 2482 Slope Sets the edges that are used for measurements For time interval error measu...

Page 1076: ...available for data rate measurements Remote command MEASurement m JITTer DRUNit on page 2483 18 1 2 4 Delay measurement settings Skew delay and skew phase measurements are intended to measure the tim...

Page 1077: ...a Menu Trigger Setup Source channel of the input signal Trigger type CDR b Tap Find level to determine the trigger level 3 Configure the measurement a On the Measure menu select Setup b Select the Jit...

Page 1078: ...enable the Histogram 2 If the histogram is not displayed as expected disable Continuous auto scale and adjust the Meas scale 18 1 4 Track of jitter measurement results A track graph displays the resu...

Page 1079: ...r spectrum The modulation frequency is displayed on the horizontal axis and the amplitude of modulation on the vertical axis Using FFT periodic components can be detected 18 2 Advanced jitter and nois...

Page 1080: ...t jitter DDJ Deterministic jitter is bounded and specified as peak to peak value Periodic jitter Periodic jitter PJ is caused by a periodic disturbance Though this signal is not neces sarily sinusoida...

Page 1081: ...jitter To perform an advanced jitter analysis 1 Open the Analysis Advanced Jitter menu 2 In the Signal tab set up the analyzed signal and reference signal 3 In the Advanced Settings tab configure the...

Page 1082: ...for the advanced jitter analysis is set automatically The serial standards are available only if the instrument is able to support its maximum nominal bit rate Serial standard Nom bit rate Bandwidth...

Page 1083: ...1 1 5 Gbps 1667 899 82 kHz 2nd 0 7 SATA Gen 2 1 500 3 Gbps 500 6 MHz 2nd 0 7 SATA Gen 2 1 1667 3 Gbps 1667 1 8 MHz 2nd 0 7 SATA Gen 2 3 Gbps 1667 1 8 MHz 2nd 0 7 SATA Gen 3 1 500 6 Gbps 500 12 MHz 2nd...

Page 1084: ...DJ and PJ In the Result dialog it enables Bathtub for total jitter BER TJ BER Step response for the analyzed source signal Histogram for RJ TJ DJ DDJ and PJ Enables the advance jitter measurement ana...

Page 1085: ...age 2490 Start Stop Gating Sets the start stop time of the gate area Remote command ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE RANGe ABSolute STARt on page 2489 ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE RANGe ABSolute STOP on page 2490 R...

Page 1086: ...ck Opens a dialog to define the setting of the explicit clock Clock frequency Explicit clock Sets the clock freuqnecy of the explicit clock signal If this value is unknown you can use Estimate clock f...

Page 1087: ...Sets a clock offset If this value is unknown you can use Estimate clock offset Remote command ADVJitter m SIGNal CLOFfset on page 2488 Estimate clock offset Explicit clock Calculates an estimate value...

Page 1088: ...option provides different ways to display your measurement results In the Result tab you can select which measurement results you want to dis play Figure 18 5 and Figure 18 6 show an example of the di...

Page 1089: ...ysis results display 1 Analyzed signal spectrum 2 Advanced jitter results 3 Jitter bathtub 4 Noise bathtub 5 Jitter spectrum 6 Noise spectrum 7 Jitter track 8 Noise track 9 Jitter histogram 10 Noise h...

Page 1090: ...3 Periodic noise spectrum 18 2 5 1 General settings In the General Settings section of the Results dialog you can enable the advanced jitter analysis and select which results you want to display Enabl...

Page 1091: ...gram displays the time behavior of the sys tem when the inputs change from zero to one or from one to zero within a short time period You can set the Length and the Step position for the step response...

Page 1092: ...signal is distributed over the frequency Remote command ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n HISTogram on page 2495 ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n TRACk on page 2496 ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n SPECtr...

Page 1093: ...you can add measurements for better understanding of the collected data You can then enable a histogram or track on them see Component specific results Add remove components Opens a dialog to select t...

Page 1094: ...Equals the inverse value of the symbol rate X X X Event Count EC Number of analyzed data transitions X Remote command ADVJitter m DCOMposition COMPonents n ENABle on page 2495 Select all Clear Selects...

Page 1095: ...ialog to select the jitter components Jitter Components In the Jitter tab you can select which jitter components you want to measure For the enabled measurements you can display the results in differe...

Page 1096: ...and transmission line which forces influ ence from past symbols onto future symbols DCD is a mismatch between rising and falling signal transi tions due to reference level mismatch or other imbal ance...

Page 1097: ...rising and fall ing edges The measurement result is the largest value across all transition types x Data depend ent and peri odic jitter 2 DDJ PJ Consist of the data dependent and periodic jitter DDJ...

Page 1098: ...e algo rithm computes the standard deviation and the peak peak value of the TIE caused by RJ within the ana lyzed waveform x x 1 Available if Other bounded uncorrelated Enabled 2 Available if Periodic...

Page 1099: ...can add the noise components you want to measure You can then enable a histogram track or spectrum on them see Component specific results Add remove components Opens a dialog to select the noise compo...

Page 1100: ...Jitter analysis and clock data recovery R S RTO6 1100 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Advanced jitter and noise option R S RTO6 K133 K134...

Page 1101: ...ime point and its corresponding reference level x x x x x Deterministic noise DN The reproducible portion of the overall level error of the input signal It consists of the data depend ent noise the pe...

Page 1102: ...tic source but cannot be reproduced from the input signal Often it is caused by crosstalk from other data signals x x x Other bounded uncorrelated Dual Dirac noise 1 O BUN Other bounded uncorrelated D...

Page 1103: ...ing or both This setting is mostly relevant for histograms tracks and the measurement results Remote command ADVJitter m RESult LEVels on page 2500 18 2 5 5 Bathtub settings Access Analysis menu Advan...

Page 1104: ...ered for the jitter bathtub PJ is available if Periodic Enabled O BUJ is available if Other bounded uncorrelated Enabled Remote command ADVJitter m RESult PJ on page 2501 ADVJitter m RESult OBUJ on pa...

Page 1105: ...which noise components are considered for the noise bathtub PN is available if Periodic Enabled O BUN is available if Other bounded uncorrelated Enabled Remote command ADVJitter m RESult PN on page 25...

Page 1106: ...ge 2502 ADVJitter m RESult PVERtical on page 2503 18 2 5 7 Diagram settings In the diagram settings dialog you can set a separate scale for the basic jitter and noise parameters Settings for histogram...

Page 1107: ...ter m RESult VERTical BMTYpe on page 2504 Meas scale Settings for histogram and track Sets a measurement scale The unit depends on the measurement type Remote command ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n S...

Page 1108: ...s are represented in s and UI and voltages in V and Remote command ADVJitter m DCOMposition SPJTable on page 2506 PJ periodic component labels Settings for spectrum Displays the periodic jitter noise...

Page 1109: ...verwritten Remote command ADVJitter m DCOMposition RESPlength on page 2508 ADVJitter m DCOMposition RLEStimate on page 2508 ADVJitter m DCOMposition MRESplength on page 2508 Step position Sets the ste...

Page 1110: ...kely caused by fluctuations within the clock gener ation system of the DUT The interference is tightly coupled to the generated clock and follows modulations in data rate e g spread spectrum clocking...

Page 1111: ...ences Report You can save a report of the advanced jitter analysis that displays the Adv Jitter Results table and the Periodic components table See also Chapter 12 4 Reports on page 480 Exporting the...

Page 1112: ...R on page 1112 Using hardware CDR Option R S RTO6 K13 Chapter 18 3 2 Hardware CDR option R S RTO6 K13 on page 1115 18 3 1 Software CDR You can define two independent software CDR instances to recover...

Page 1113: ...bandwidth settings are set auto matically no estimation is required Remote command CDR SOFTware m SERStandard on page 2510 Data edges Selects the edges of the data stream that are used for the clock...

Page 1114: ...unit interval The sampling time is a number between 0 and 1 Value 0 sets the clock edge to the beginning of the bit period value 0 5 sets the clock edge to the middle of the bit period Remote command...

Page 1115: ...the waveform at the left border of the display First data edge The first clock edge matches the first edge of the data signal Remote command CDR SOFTware m SYNC on page 2512 Selected results Availabl...

Page 1116: ...e ments see Chapter 18 3 2 2 CDR trigger on page 1118 For the serial pattern trigger see Chapter 18 3 2 3 Serial pattern trigger using CDR on page 1119 For TIE unit interval and data rate measurements...

Page 1117: ...n page 2516 Data level Sets the threshold to determine the position of rising and falling edges in the data input signal The threshold level is also the trigger level for the specified input channel R...

Page 1118: ...n follow during synchronization The PLL bandwidth is usually defined by the transmission standard Rel band width Sets the relative bandwidth that is the ratio of the nominal bit rate to the PLL bandwi...

Page 1119: ...TRIGger m LEVel n VALue on page 1391 18 3 2 3 Serial pattern trigger using CDR If option R S RTO6 K13 is installed you can use the recovered clock signal for the serial pattern trigger instead of a r...

Page 1120: ...ted waveform is time correlated to the data waveform 1 Prerequisite Configure the CDR method 2 Press the Math key 3 On the Setup tab select the Equation subtab 4 Double tap the entry field to open the...

Page 1121: ...ts are available Power quality Inrush current Current harmonic Modulation analysis Dynamic on resistance Slew rate Safe operating area S O A Turn on off Switching loss Power efficiency Output ripple T...

Page 1122: ...he effects the power supply exudes to the input line Control Loop measurements for characterizing the switching properties of a device Power Path measurements for analyzing the behavior of the devices...

Page 1123: ...h the auto deskew of your current and voltage probes Required equipment R S RT ZF20 power deskew fixture Rohde Schwarz voltage probe Rohde Schwarz current probe 1 Select Analysis Power 2 Under General...

Page 1124: ...rrect probe type 8 Tap the Settings tab 9 Set the Overwrite present skew setup on page 1126 and Activate user defined preset on page 1127 options These settings define whether the instrument uses the...

Page 1125: ...Dwidth on page 1345 Predefined probe Vertical unit Attenuation Current probes R S RT ZCxx the high voltage active probe R S RT ZD01 and the transmission line probe R S RT ZZ80 are not recognized autom...

Page 1126: ...deskew procedure as a separate value and does not use it This value can be used later for power measure ments The general skew offset under Current channel skew remains unchanged If enabled the result...

Page 1127: ...values are not influenced by a manual Preset See also Chapter 4 6 Preset setup on page 98 Remote command POWer DESKew UDPReset on page 2521 Auto Deskew Starts an auto deskew Make sure that the probes...

Page 1128: ...UT Remote command POWer REPort DUT on page 2523 User Enter a user Remote command POWer REPort USER on page 2523 Site Enter a site Remote command POWer REPort SITE on page 2523 Temperature Enter the te...

Page 1129: ...nts Report Table Shows a list of the available measurements After you select a Directory you can manage previous report results from this direc tory To add a measurement report press Insert or Append...

Page 1130: ...ge 2525 Remove selected Selection Removes the selected result report Remote command POWer REPort TEST RSE on page 2525 Directory Selects the directory from which previous report results are inserted i...

Page 1131: ...page 2524 POWer REPort FILE SAVE on page 2524 Layout In this tab you can set up a layout for your report Paper size Selects the paper size A4 Selects A4 US Letter Selects US Letter Remote command POWe...

Page 1132: ...s Remote command POWer REPort INVert on page 2525 Logo File Selects a path to a logo picture file Remote command POWer REPort LOGO on page 2523 Content In this tab you can select the contents of your...

Page 1133: ...22 Vertical Setup Adds the vertical setup settings Remote command POWer REPort CONTent VSETup on page 2522 Trigger Setup Adds the trigger setup settings Remote command POWer REPort CONTent TSETup on p...

Page 1134: ...ion on the experimental setup of the selected power measurement A short description explains what probes are needed and how to connect them The description is supported by a block diagram of the exper...

Page 1135: ...Settings tab In the Settings tab you configure the measurement and display settings The settings depend on the selected power measurement For detailed information see the Settings chapter of the relev...

Page 1136: ...Manual 1801 6687 02 05 The following resources may be used Measurements Mathematic waveforms Cursors XY diagrams The instrument enables the required resources when the power measurement is star ted 19...

Page 1137: ...energy that is transferred in one direction over a complete cycle of the AC waveform In AC circuits however inductive and capacitive elements can store energy temporarily This portion of the power flo...

Page 1138: ...current MG 8 to measure the power M2 Math 2 to calculate the power The used resources are listed in the Details tab See also Chapter 19 2 3 Details tab on page 1135 Voltage and current results The vo...

Page 1139: ...averaged over N cycles Energy of the system that can be used to do work Reactive power Q VAR Volt Ampere reactive Q S sin Power flow that is temporally stored in a system because of the inductive and...

Page 1140: ...y RESult VOLTage PEAK on page 2528 POWer QUALity RESult VOLTage RMS on page 2528 POWer QUALity REPort ADD on page 2528 19 3 1 2 Configuring power quality For details of the configuration settings see...

Page 1141: ...s of the current the voltage and the power Also the result box with numeric measurement results is shown For details see Chapter 19 3 1 1 Power quality results on page 1138 19 3 1 3 Power quality sett...

Page 1142: ...asurement report for example a measurement description Execute Starts the Power Quality measurement Remote command POWer QUALity EXECute on page 2527 19 3 2 Inrush current The Inrush Current analysis...

Page 1143: ...emote commands are used for handling the measurement results POWer INRush GATE m VALue on page 2530 POWer INRush REPort ADD on page 2531 19 3 2 2 Configuring inrush current For details of the configur...

Page 1144: ...time periods You can set up to five different gates 11 Tap Execute 12 Start the DUT On the screen you can see the result box with the inrush current of each gate For details see Chapter 19 3 2 1 Inrus...

Page 1145: ...ent starts after the signal of the DUT reaches this current value Remote command POWer INRush TRIGger on page 2530 Gate Configuration In this table you can configure different gates time periods You c...

Page 1146: ...ics appear in an electric power system due to non linear electric loads The harmonics can be ejected back into the AC line and disturb other equipment on the grid To avoid this disturbance there are o...

Page 1147: ...he current harmonic Maximum Shown by a darkened green bar The maximum measured value Standard limit Shown by a white bar The maxim allowed value according to the selected standard Y max Y max Sets the...

Page 1148: ...8 Set the Standard in use 9 Set the Frequency according to your signal 10 Select an Optimize Scaling option 11 Tap Execute On the screen you can see the measurement of the current the voltage and the...

Page 1149: ...3 2 Class A Balanced 3 phase equipment household appliances excluding equipment identified as class D tools excluding portable tools dimmers for incandescent lamps audio equipment EN 61000 3 2 Class B...

Page 1150: ...Do not display voltage result Remote command POWer HARMonics EVAL on page 2532 POWer HARMonics VOLT on page 2533 Optimize scaling Selects the scaling for the display of the results Autoscale the sign...

Page 1151: ...obe Current probe 19 4 1 1 Modulation analysis results The results of Modulation Analysis measurements are provided in two ways The diagram shows the graphical presentation of the voltage or the curre...

Page 1152: ...ev Standard deviation Event count Number of measured pulses Wave count Number of waveforms acquisitions the measurement is based on Modulation Analysis is a statistical evaluation that is reset only i...

Page 1153: ...ing Control Loop select Modulation Analysis 3 Connect the differential voltage probe and the current probe to the oscilloscope 4 Deskew the probes as described in Chapter 19 1 1 1 Auto deskew on page...

Page 1154: ...Modulation analysis settings In the Channels tab you set the current source and the voltage source see also Chapter 19 2 1 Channels tab on page 1134 In the Settings tab you configure the modulation a...

Page 1155: ...settings The present display settings are not changed Remote command POWer MODulation AUTO on page 2534 Report comment In this field you can write a comment that is displayed in the measurement repor...

Page 1156: ...he current Cu 1 Cursor 1 to measure gate t0 t1 Cu 2 Cursor 2 to measure gate t2 t3 The used resources are listed in the Details tab See also Chapter 19 2 3 Details tab on page 1135 The dynamic on resi...

Page 1157: ...deskew on page 1123 5 Connect the probes to the DUT as shown in the Channels tab 6 Select the correct channels for the Current Source and the Voltage Source 7 Select the Settings tab 8 If Average is...

Page 1158: ...ource see also Chapter 19 2 1 Channels tab on page 1134 In the Settings tab you configure the power measurement parameters and display settings Average Enables the Average method for building the resu...

Page 1159: ...erage calculation for all wave forms Remote command ACQuire ARESet IMMediate on page 1335 Optimize scaling Selects the scaling for the display of the results Autoscale the signals Automatically select...

Page 1160: ...he time derivative of the current or voltage waveform Cu 1 Cursor 1 to determine the measurement area The used resources are listed in the Details tab See also Chapter 19 2 3 Details tab on page 1135...

Page 1161: ...5 Connect the probes to the DUT as shown in the Channels tab 6 Select the correct channels for the Current Source and the Voltage Source 7 Select the Settings tab 8 Select the Source 9 If Average is s...

Page 1162: ...is shown For details see Chapter 19 4 3 1 Slew rate results on page 1160 19 4 3 3 Slew rate settings In the Channels tab you set the current source and the voltage source see also Chapter 19 2 1 Chann...

Page 1163: ...imited Time Restarts the envelope and average calculation after the time defined in Time Waveforms Restarts the envelope and average calculation after a number of acquired waveforms defined in Count R...

Page 1164: ...control the power flow through the switched mode power supply SMPS circuit including switching devices and inductors 19 5 1 Safe operating area S O A The safe operating area is defined by the voltage...

Page 1165: ...result box displays the numeric measurement results Also you can see the mask definition and change the scale in the SOA Control dialog If the state of Enable mask test is On an extra result box appea...

Page 1166: ...d when the state is set to Finished Sample hits Number of samples that hit the mask Acquisition hits Number of acquisitions that contained at least one sample hit Fail rate Ratio of acquisition hits t...

Page 1167: ...Execute On the screen you can see the measurement waveforms of the Additionally the result box with numeric measurement results is shown For details seeChap ter 19 5 1 1 Safe operating area results o...

Page 1168: ...et voltage current points to define a mask for the safe point operating area If Enable mask test On you can check whether the signal remains within the specified limits To add a point press Insert or...

Page 1169: ...n On Off analysis measures the time that a power supply needs to reach a certain percentage of the steady state output level when initially turned on or turned off Common measuring scenarios include T...

Page 1170: ...ayed with the set Time Trigger level on value is reached and the time the given percentage of the Steady state level is reached see See also Figure 19 2 and Figure 19 3 The following remote commands a...

Page 1171: ...Power analysis option R S RTO6 K31 R S RTO6 1171 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 Power path...

Page 1172: ...ng to your requirements 8 Tap Execute 9 Turn on off the DUT On the screen you can see the measurement Also the result box displays the turn on or the turn off time For details see Chapter 19 5 2 1 Tur...

Page 1173: ...e Remote command POWer ONOFf INPut on page 2542 Measurement Type Selects the Turn on or the Turn off measurement Remote command POWer ONOFf TYPE on page 2543 Turn on Enables the configuration of the t...

Page 1174: ...moment the AC or DC input voltage reaches the set value Remote command POWer ONOFf ATOFf on page 2542 POWer ONOFf DTOFf on page 2542 Time Turn off Sets the time the start of the measurement of the tur...

Page 1175: ...iled description see Table 19 2 To measure and display the switching loss the instrument uses the following measure ments and cursors P3 P8 Meas 3 Meas 8 to measure the voltage M4 Math 4 to calculate...

Page 1176: ...SWITching GATE COND STOP on page 2545 POWer SWITching GATE NCON STARt on page 2545 POWer SWITching GATE TOFF STARt on page 2545 POWer SWITching GATE TOFF STOP on page 2545 POWer SWITching GATE TON ST...

Page 1177: ...ower Path select Switching Loss 3 Connect the differential voltage probe and the current probe to the oscilloscope 4 Deskew the probes as described in Chapter 19 1 1 1 Auto deskew on page 1123 5 Conne...

Page 1178: ...the Channels tab you set the current source and the voltage source see also Chapter 19 2 1 Channels tab on page 1134 In the Settings tab you configure the switching loss parameters and display settin...

Page 1179: ...isplay of the results Autoscale the signals Automatically selects the most appropriate scale for the display of the results Keep present settings The present display settings are not changed Remote co...

Page 1180: ...lowing measure ments and waveforms MG 7 to measure the input power waveform MG 8 to measure the output power waveform M2 Math 2 to calculate the input power M3 Math 3 to calculate the output power The...

Page 1181: ...lysis Power 2 Under Power Path select Power Efficiency 3 Connect the differential voltage probes and the current probes to the oscilloscope 4 Deskew the probes as described in Chapter 19 1 1 1 Auto de...

Page 1182: ...4 3 Power efficiency settings In the Channels tab you set the current source and the voltage source see also Chapter 19 2 1 Channels tab on page 1134 In the Settings tab you configure the power effic...

Page 1183: ...d POWer EFFiciency EXECute on page 2547 19 6 Output Access App Cockpit Analysis Power Output The Output measurements are used for characterizing the behavior and quality of the SMPS output voltage 19...

Page 1184: ...optional the current waveform The result box displays the numeric measurement results for the voltage and for the current ripple For details see Table 19 5 and Table 19 2 To measure and display the o...

Page 1185: ...measurements are possi ble 100 Period PosPulse PosCyc T T R Neg duty cycle RNegCyc Negative duty cycle Width of a negative pulse in relation to the period in The measurement requires at least one com...

Page 1186: ...2551 POWer RIPPle RESult NDCYcle PPEak on page 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult NDCYcle RMS on page 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult NDCYcle STDDev on page 2552 POWer RIPPle RESult NDCYcle WFMCount on page 2552 POWe...

Page 1187: ...54 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev RMS on page 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev STDDev on page 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev WFMCount on page 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev ACTual on page 2554 POWer RIPP...

Page 1188: ...e On the screen you can see the measurement waveforms of the current and the voltage Also the result box with numeric measurement results is shown For details see Chapter 19 6 1 1 Output ripple result...

Page 1189: ...e is calculated as the inverse of the SMPS switching frequency Optimize scaling Selects the scaling for the display of the results Autoscale the signals Automatically selects the most appropriate scal...

Page 1190: ...sponse results The results of Power Quality measurements are provided in two ways The diagram shows the graphical presentation of the voltage waveforms the current waveform The result box displays the...

Page 1191: ...first peak of the overshoot Delay to trigger The time needed for the response to reach half of the signal high value after the trigger event The following remote commands are used for handling the me...

Page 1192: ...y according to your device 11 Select an Optimize Scaling option 12 Tap Execute 13 If needed adjust the cursors manually On the screen you can see the measurement of the current and the voltage Also th...

Page 1193: ...uency on page 2555 Derived scale Shows the scale of the displayed results This value is calculated as the inverse of the SMPS switching frequency Edge trigger Sets the properties of the trigger Source...

Page 1194: ...ue Remote command POWer TRANsient SIGHigh on page 2556 Low Sets the expected signal low voltage value Remote command POWer TRANsient SIGLow on page 2556 Optimize scaling Selects the scaling for the di...

Page 1195: ...ms that show the graphical presentation of the voltage waveform the spectrum The result box displays the positions of the measured peaks The peaks are found by an automatic peak search Note If no resu...

Page 1196: ...t ADD on page 2558 19 6 3 2 Configuring output spectrum For details of the configuration settings see Chapter 19 6 3 3 Output spectrum set tings on page 1197 1 Select Analysis Power 2 Under Output sel...

Page 1197: ...lts on page 1195 19 6 3 3 Output spectrum settings In the Channels tab you set the voltage source see also Chapter 19 2 1 Channels tab on page 1134 In the Settings tab you configure the spectrum measu...

Page 1198: ...priate scale for the display of the results Keep present settings The present display settings are not changed Remote command POWer SPECtrum AUToscale on page 2557 Report comment In this field you can...

Page 1199: ...s2p files The measurements require hardware option R S RTO6 B7 For proven probe also the R S RT ZF30 probe test fixture is needed From the S parameters of the measurement components the deembedding op...

Page 1200: ...2 Deembedding settings on page 1200 c If necessary tap Open and load the S parameters from file As long as the configuration is incomplete or conflicting the message Invalid configuration is shown d...

Page 1201: ...igher than the highest fre quency in a used S parameter file The setting is also coupled with the digital filter bandwidth if the cut off frequency of the digital filter is at least 1 GHz Remote comma...

Page 1202: ...ion or loads a saved deembedding con figuration The file format is XML To save the deembedding configuration enter a filename and tap Save Alternatively tap Save as to open the file selection dialog b...

Page 1203: ...d Other are selectable Remote command DEEMbedding m COMPonent n TYPE on page 2563 Name Enter a name for the component that helps you identifying it Remote command DEEMbedding m COMPonent n NAME on pag...

Page 1204: ...ed you can remove the loading of the probe If the probe loading is removed you see the signal that would be at the measurement point if the probe s input impedance is ideal infinite impedance Without...

Page 1205: ...eembedding The Probe Deembedding dialog box is described in Chapter 5 6 5 2 Deembedding for modular probes on page 159 For details on probe parameters see Select probe tip module Pin spacing on page 1...

Page 1206: ...ponents because 4 ports need additional settings Gen erally these components are configured by loading S parameter files and analyzing its characteristics To configure a component in a single ended 2...

Page 1207: ...ou need 1 s2p Touchstone file If the components are different disable Identical Paths on page 1208 You need 2 s2p Touchstone files one for each component b Select the filetype s2p c Tap Open d Select...

Page 1208: ...re is no crosstalk in between each cable or adapter can be described by a s2p file If both components are different each is described by its own s2p file If they are identical for example when a match...

Page 1209: ...ment setup On the Deembedding Response tab you see the resulting transfer function char acteristics of the deembedded measurement setup These response curves include also the characteristics of the DU...

Page 1210: ...ency response normalized at DC to 0 dB The deembedding filter must attenuate the amplitude response by this value The value helps also to avoid an overload of the ADC Remote command DEEMbedding m MGAi...

Page 1211: ...ype Select the DUT to be characterized probe or cable Normalize setup Startes the wizard for the complete normalization and measurement procedure Measure probe cable Starts the measurement of the prob...

Page 1212: ...quality double shielded RF cables Two suitable cables are delivered with the pulse source option R S RTO6 B7 Figure 20 1 Normalization settings 2 Start measurements with Normalize The basic setup is c...

Page 1213: ...can display the Normalization Result the normalized magnitude response Save normalization setup Saves the results of the normalization step to an XML file 20 4 1 3 Measurement Open App Cockpit Analysi...

Page 1214: ...haracteristics are the same as on the Deembedding Response tab For more information see Chapter 20 3 2 Responses of the measurement setup on page 1209 Apply result Includes the proven probe or proven...

Page 1215: ...Deembedding option R S RTO6 K121 R S RTO6 1215 User Manual 1801 6687 02 05 See also Chapter 20 1 Configuring the measurement setup for deembedding on page 1199 Proven probe proven cable...

Page 1216: ...re ment report Detailed image based instructions make it easy to connect the oscillo scope and the probes to the test fixture set and the device under test The R S ScopeSuite can be installed on a tes...

Page 1217: ...be with at least 2 GHz bandwidth R S RTO B6 R S RTP B6 Tabor WX2182B Tabor WX2182C arbitrary waveform generator for automatic receiver sensitivity tests For manual receiver sensitivity tests any AWG c...

Page 1218: ...T Ethernet compliance test option required option installed on the oscilloscope R S RT ZF2 Ethernet test fixture set For energy efficient Ethernet tests in addition R S RT ZF5 Ethernet test fixture s...

Page 1219: ...F3 frequency converter for transmitter distortion tests 1000BASE T1 compliance tests R S RTO R S RTP oscilloscope with at least 2 GHz bandwidth Differential probe with 2 GHz bandwidth R S RTO R S RTP...

Page 1220: ...d 2 probes with at least 4 GHz bandwidth R S RTO6 K26 D PHY compliance test option required option installed on the oscilloscope R S RTO6 K27 D PHY compliance test option required option installed on...

Page 1221: ...K81 R S RTP K81 K83 PCIe Compliance Test User Manual 21 5 1 Test equipment PCIe 1 1 PCIe 2 0 Test Equipment For PCIe compliance tests the following test equipment is needed R S RTO6 oscilloscope with...

Page 1222: ...he R S RTO6 4 modular probes R S ZM90 with 9 GHz bandwidth See also Chapter 21 6 1 1 Soldering guide for modular probes on page 1222 4 modular probe tips R S RT ZMA10 The free of charge R S ScopeSuite...

Page 1223: ...R S RTO6 has a Windows 10 operating system The operating system has been configured according to the instrument s features and needs To ensure that the instrument software functions properly certain r...

Page 1224: ...initial password is 894129 It is recommended that you change the password for both users after initial logon You can change the password in the Windows configuration Start menu Settings Accounts Sign...

Page 1225: ...e the following Rohde Schwarz white paper 1EF96 Malware Protection Windows 10 22 1 3 Virus protection Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection Use strong firewall settings and...

Page 1226: ...has been finished the dialog is closed automatically and the main dialog is displayed again 7 In the main dialog select Exit and Reboot The backup and restore application is closed and the R S RTO6 i...

Page 1227: ...ackup and press ENTER 3 Select the backup that you want to delete 4 Select Delete Selected 5 Confirm with Yes 6 In the main dialog select Exit and Reboot or continue with To save a system backup on pa...

Page 1228: ...ssigned you the appropriate rights and adapted the Windows firewall configuration you can use the interface for example To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device e g to run a r...

Page 1229: ...ddress information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information...

Page 1230: ...name computer name instead of the IP address The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address Device names are useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address can be assigned each time...

Page 1231: ...the current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name 1 Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network 2 Open the Menu Settin...

Page 1232: ...ing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network Rohde Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument Rohde Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows fir...

Page 1233: ...instrument is connected to the LAN a red symbol indicates an error mostly the LAN cable is not connected The Network tab of the System dialog box provides network information See Chap ter 4 1 2 Networ...

Page 1234: ...des buttons to download or clear the logfile Web Control emulates the front panel and shows the instrument display You see a live image of the instrument and you can operate the instrument remotely Yo...

Page 1235: ...IP address subnet mask and default gateway are used to configure the LAN The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing automatic IP to obtain the instrument IP ad...

Page 1236: ...tiate a ping between the compliant instrument and a second connected device 1 Enable ICMP Ping on the Advanced Config page enabled by default 2 On the Ping Client page enter the IP address of the seco...

Page 1237: ...left corner of the emulated display you see two arrows The up down arrow hides or shows the front panel The left right arrow hides or shows the menu 22 3 2 3 Device screenshot If you click Device Scre...

Page 1238: ...pplications files and network resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the instrument is possible Risk of unauthorized access If you enable the Windows Remote Desktop application on the in...

Page 1239: ...Remote Desktop Connection 2 Enter the instrument s name or IP address in the dialog box See also Chapter 22 2 2 Assigning the IP address on page 1229 3 Enter the user ID and password for the instrumen...

Page 1240: ...n which you can use to reduce minimize or close the window d On the General tab you can save the connection settings for later use click Save As Terminating Remote Desktop Control A Remote Desktop con...

Page 1241: ...e instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols The interface details are given in the specifications For remote control via a network th...

Page 1242: ...urce string is TCPIP RSRT1 DNS host name is RTO6 123456 the valid resource string is TCPIP RTO6 123456 See also Find IP address Menu Settings System tab see IP Address on page 69 Chapter 22 2 2 Assign...

Page 1243: ...s a terminator in GPIB communication Remote command GPIB TERMinator on page 1295 22 5 2 2 Remote settings Access Menu Settings System Remote The following settings are required for remote control of t...

Page 1244: ...for all bit pattern queries Remote command FORMat BPATtern on page 1294 SCPI logging If enabled all received remote commands are written into a text file Enter the path and filename with extension lo...

Page 1245: ...ff the display do one of the following Tap the View button again Use the SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF command 22 5 3 3 Returning to manual operation The instrument switches back to manual operation when...

Page 1246: ...s registers STATus OPERation register In the CONDition part this register contains information on which actions the instru ment is executing In the EVENt part it contains information on which actions...

Page 1247: ...he trigger event is initiated by the user for example using an external generator If the instrument triggers on signals or if it is in auto trigger mode the bit status is undefined 4 MEASuring The bit...

Page 1248: ...This bit is set if a questionable channel overload occurs see STATus QUEStionable COVer load register on page 1249 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs see STATus QUESti...

Page 1249: ...1251 11 LAMP Low AMPlitude This bit is set if the magnitude of the signal is too low to get reliable measurement results See STATus QUEStionable LAMP register on page 1252 12 MASK This bit is set if a...

Page 1250: ...erflow of the ADC The bit is set if the assigned channel signal is clipped on the upper or lower edge of the screen In this case the signal does not fit in the range of the ADC and overflow occurs Tab...

Page 1251: ...3 4 accordingly The bits are set if the probe deembedding of the assigned channel causes an error STATus QUEStionable LIMit STATus QUEStionable MARGin registers These registers contain information abo...

Page 1252: ...AS1 1 MEAS2 2 MEAS3 3 MEAS4 4 MEAS5 5 MEAS6 6 MEAS7 7 MEAS8 STATus QUEStionable MASK register This register contains information about the violation of masks This bit is set if the assigned mask is vi...

Page 1253: ...erload on Z2I4 22 5 4 3 Reset values of the status reporting system The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands...

Page 1254: ...ear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 yes yes Fill PTRansition parts with 1 Clear NTRansition parts yes yes Clear error queue yes...

Page 1255: ...in Cleaning the product on page 15 Do not use any liquids for cleaning Cleaning agents solvents acids and bases can damage the front panel labeling plastic parts and display 23 2 Contacting customer...

Page 1256: ...e email to the customer support address for your region as listed in the internet On the instrument you can find log files the device footprint and report files and other information in the AppData fo...

Page 1257: ...tted to making careful ecologically sound use of natural resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products Help us by dis posing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental...

Page 1258: ...eters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken fro...

Page 1259: ...If overlapping commands must be executed in a defined order e g to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the comman...

Page 1260: ...tions on the screen and a zoom dia gram It also minimizes a wavform and adds it to another diagram Command description in Chapter 24 7 2 4 Smartgrid on page 1301 In the following example OPC prevents...

Page 1261: ...return value ABS LAYout ZOOM HORZ MODE Diagram1 MyZoom1 ABS Set horizontal zoom mode to relative LAYout ZOOM HORZ MODE Diagram1 MyZoom1 REL Set horizontal zoom span in percent LAYout ZOOM HORZ REL SP...

Page 1262: ...o 15 50 and 85 of the high signal level for waveform C2W1 suffix 5 REFLevel5 LDETection MANual REFLevel5 LMODe REL REFLevel5 RELative MODE USER REFLevel5 RELative LOWer 15 REFLevel5 RELative MIDDle 50...

Page 1263: ...ng example OPC prevents overlapping execution of asynchronous com mands Creating and reading histograms 1263 Exporting histogram data to file 1264 Transferring histogram data 1264 Creating and reading...

Page 1264: ...iption in Chapter 24 16 5 Waveform histogram export to file on page 1656 EXP HIST SEL Histogram1 EXP HIST INC ABS OPC FORM ASC EXP HIST DATA 0 0 0 0 0 2037 5754804 4683496 3100169 2874565 24 3 2 4 Lon...

Page 1265: ...ting a user mask 1265 24 3 3 1 Creating a user mask Creates new user mask MyMask with one inner segment and turns on the mask test Command description in Chapter 24 14 Mask testing on page 1582 In the...

Page 1266: ...eters SEAR TRIG WIDT WIDT MySearch 5e 4 Configure search parameters SEAR TRIG WIDT DELT MySearch 5e 6 Configure search parameters SEAR RES LIM MySearch 1 Set number of result lines in table to 1 OPC S...

Page 1267: ...reconstructing multiple raw acquisitions of the history file 1271 Exporting a single waveform to XML file Saves a single analog waveform completely to an XML file Data logging is off The usage of asyn...

Page 1268: ...a BIN file Data logging is off In the following example OPC prevents overlapping execution of asynchronous com mands STOP OPC EXPort WAVeform FASTexport ON CHANnel1 WAVeform1 STATe 1 MEASurement2 CAT...

Page 1269: ...fm_analog csv MMEM DATA C Data DataExportWfm_analog wfm csv Exporting interleaved x y data of a zoom to CSV file Saves the x and y values that is displayed in a zoom diagram to a CSV file Data log gin...

Page 1270: ...DataExportWfm_analog xml MMEM DATA C Data DataExportWfm_analog wfm xml Exporting a single acquisition of the history to BIN file Saves the oldest acquisition of the history to a BIN file Data logging...

Page 1271: ...MMEM DATA C Data DataExportWfm_analog xml MMEM DATA C Data DataExportWfm_analog wfm xml Exporting and reconstructing multiple raw acquisitions of the history file This example captures and exports 100...

Page 1272: ...eudo Code tell your language how to interpret the binary data e g int8 for MATLAB MMEM DATA C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz RTx Temp DataExpWfm bin Put header file into output buffer header rea...

Page 1273: ...ing1 PRESet Ch1 DEEMbedding2 PRESet Ch2 DEEMbedding3 PRESet Ch3 DEEMbedding4 PRESet Ch4 Add cables to each channel cable is added next to DUT at index 2 DUT index 1 DEEMbedding1 ADD 2 cabl Ch1 DEEMbed...

Page 1274: ...US1 LABel RFFE Test 1 BUS1 RFFE CLOCk SOUR C2W1 BUS1 RFFE DATA SOUR C1W1 BUS1 RFFE COUPling ON BUS1 RFFE CLOCk THReshold HYSTeresis 0 2 BUS1 RFFE CLOCk THReshold HIGH 0 72 BUS1 RFFE CLOCk THReshold LO...

Page 1275: ...TYPE RFFESearchCh1 ERRL Extended Register Read Long sequence 24 3 7 2 SENT option R S RTO6 K520 Configuring SENT bus Set protocol parameters STOP OPC BUS TYPE SENT BUS LABel Bus 1 SENT BUS SENT DATA...

Page 1276: ...N SEARch RESult SENT FCOunt Search1 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe1 STAT Search1 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe1 STARt Search1 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe1 STOP Search1 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe1 DATA Search1 SEARch...

Page 1277: ...apter 24 23 1 General on page 2520 and Chap ter 24 23 2 Deskew on page 2520 If the instrument refuses to accept POWer commands activate the power mode using POWer ENABle In the following example OPC p...

Page 1278: ...KEW TIMe POWer DESKew TIMe OPC Effect of RST and loading user defined preset Note that RST resets the deskew values You can reload the deskew values as follows RST OPC STOP OPC POWer ENABle Select vol...

Page 1279: ...Cute OPC Query results POWer TRANsient RESult SETTling POWer TRANsient RESult PEAKtime POWer TRANsient RESult DELay POWer TRANsient RESult RTIMe POWer TRANsient RESult OVERshoot Add to report Power TR...

Page 1280: ...l 2 waveform 3 8 C3W1 channel 3 waveform 1 9 C3W2 channel 3 waveform 2 10 C3W3 channel 3 waveform 3 11 C4W1 channel 4 waveform 1 12 C4W2 channel 4 waveform 2 13 C4W3 channel 4 waveform 3 14 to 17 Math...

Page 1281: ...2 R S RT ZVC04 Z2V1 Z2V2 Z2V3 Z2V4 R S RT ZVC02 Z2V1 Z2V2 Suffixes 98 to 99 are not available 100 to 103 Current input channels of multi channel probe R S RT ZVC probe 2 R S RT ZVC04 Z2I1 Z2I2 Z2I3 Z...

Page 1282: ...75 177 179 181 SRTRack2 SDTRack2 TJTRack2 DDJTrack2 PJOTrack2 RJOTrack2 Tracks of 1st advanced jitter measurement option R S RTO6 K133 K134 178 not used 182 to 186 TJSPectrum2 DDJSpectrum2 PJOSPectrum...

Page 1283: ...226 PJDHist2 BUJHist2 RJHist2 Histograms of 2nd noise measurement option R S RTO6 K134 227 PJDTrack2 Tracks of 2nd data dependent and periodic jitter noise measurement option R S RTO6 K134 228 PJDSpe...

Page 1284: ...al buses option R S RTO6 B1 TRK1 TRK2 TRK3 TRK4 TRK5 TRK6 TRK7 TRK8 Track waveforms CDRSW1 CDRSw1 CDRSW2 CDRSw2 CDRHW CDRHw Generated clock signals SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 Spectrograms option R S RTO6 K37 SG5...

Page 1285: ...itter analysis option R S RTO6 K133 K134 TNSPectrum1 TNSPectrum2 DDNSpectrum1 DDNSpectrum2 PNSPectrum1 PNSPectrum2 RNOSpectrum1 RNOSpectrum2 Spectrograms of the advanced jitter analysis com ponents op...

Page 1286: ...on address identifier or data pattern To set the pattern value you can use either a numeric parameter as defined in the SCPI standard or a string parameter Bit pattern in numeric parameter In a numer...

Page 1287: ...e right of the defined pattern Example You want to trigger on an 11 bit CAN address and enter the bit pattern 11100011 8 bits only The instrument uses the pattern 11100011XXX for triggering Query for...

Page 1288: ...and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE...

Page 1289: ...This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query writes a 1 into the output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed which is useful for command synchronization OPT Option ide...

Page 1290: ...n be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1...

Page 1291: ...rvice request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Tri...

Page 1292: ...m LANGuage 1295 FORMat DATA Format Length Selects the data type that is used for transmission of data from analog channels math and reference waveforms and some measurement results from the instrument...

Page 1293: ...es returns the raw sample data of the ADC as integers If format of the wave form data differs from the defined export format the instrument converts the data to the required length The result string h...

Page 1294: ...e See also Chapter 22 5 3 2 Using the display during remote control on page 1245 Parameters Enable ON 1 Display is shown and updated during remote control OFF 0 Display shows static image during remot...

Page 1295: ...xt that is displayed during remote control operation To enable the text display use SYSTem DISPlay MESSage STATe on page 1295 Parameters DisplayMessage String that contains the text Usage Asynchronous...

Page 1296: ...ze the signal data Usage Event SYSTem DATE Year Month Day Sets the date of the internal calendar Parameters Year Year to be entered as a four digit number including the century and millennium informat...

Page 1297: ...of the computer Parameters ComputerName Name string Usage Asynchronous command 24 7 2 Appearance 24 7 2 1 Colors appearance DISPlay COLor SIGNal m COLor 1297 DISPlay COLor SIGNal m ASSign 1297 DISPlay...

Page 1298: ...s Suffix m 1 218 Waveform number see Chapter 24 4 1 Waveform suffix on page 1279 Parameters State ON OFF 24 7 2 2 Color tables DISPlay COLor PALette ADD 1298 DISPlay COLor PALette REMove 1298 DISPlay...

Page 1299: ...parameters PaletteName color table PointIndex row number in the color table Usage Setting only DISPlay COLor PALette POINt REMove PaletteName PointIndex Removes the entry with the specified index from...

Page 1300: ...COUNt PaletteName Queries the number of entries in the color table Query parameters PaletteName color table Usage Query only 24 7 2 3 Grid appearance DISPlay DIAGram GRID 1300 DISPlay DIAGram LABels...

Page 1301: ...ixed If enabled the horizontal grid lines remain in their position when the position of the curve is changed Only the values at the grid lines are adapted This reflects the behavior of traditional osc...

Page 1302: ...tring with the name of the existing diagram ParentType HORizontal VERTical TAB Position of the new diagram in relation to the existing one HORizontal Besides the existing diagram VERTical Above or bel...

Page 1303: ...NTRack1 DNTRack1 DDNTrack1 PNTRack1 RNOTrack1 TNSPectrum1 DDNSpectrum1 PNSPectrum1 RNOSpectrum1 NBAThtub2 NBMeas2 TNHist2 DNHist2 DDNHist2 PNHist2 RNOHist2 TNTRack2 DNTRack2 DDNTrack2 PNTRack2 RNOTrac...

Page 1304: ...pecified diagram The waveforms are displayed as minimized waveforms in their signal icons on the signal bar Setting parameters DiagramName String with the name of the diagram Usage Setting only Asynch...

Page 1305: ...ctrum2 RJOSpectrum2 NBAThtub1 NBMeas1 TNHist1 DNHist1 DDNHist1 PNHist1 RNOHist1 TNTRack1 DNTRack1 DDNTrack1 PNTRack1 RNOTrack1 TNSPectrum1 DDNSpectrum1 PNSPectrum1 RNOSpectrum1 NBAThtub2 NBMeas2 TNHis...

Page 1306: ...306 DISPlay GATE TRANsparency 1306 LAYout ZOOM ONEDiagram 1307 DISPlay DIAGram TITLe DiagTitleSt If enabled the tab titles of all diagrams are displayed Diagram1 Diagram2 If disabled the tab titles ar...

Page 1307: ...lay SIGNal LABel IDSList DISPlay SIGNal LABel POSMode 1307 DISPlay SIGNal LABel FONTsize 1308 DISPlay SIGNal LABel ADD 1308 DISPlay SIGNal LABel REMove 1309 DISPlay SIGNal LABel IDSList 1310 DISPlay S...

Page 1308: ...Nal LABel VERTical RELative POSition to set the position Parameters for setting and query Source All waveforms that can be displayed see DISPlay SIGNal LABel ADD Usage Asynchronous command DISPlay SIG...

Page 1309: ...y PositionMode ABS REL ABS Position in time and voltage values or in other units depending on the waveform character Absolute positions move with the waveform display when the scales the vertical posi...

Page 1310: ...bels that are defined in the user interface get an automatic label DiagramText No Parameters Source See DISPlay SIGNal LABel ADD Usage Asynchronous command DISPlay SIGNal LABel SHOW Source State DISPl...

Page 1311: ...2 DJTRack2 DDJTrack2 PJTRack2 RJOTrack2 TJSPectrum2 DDJSpectrum2 PJSPectrum2 RJOSpectrum2 SEYE2 NBAThtub1 NBMeas1 TNHist1 DNHist1 DDNHist1 PNHist1 RNOHist1 TNTRack1 DNTRack1 DDNTrack1 PNTRack1 RNOTrac...

Page 1312: ...lID Source DISPlay SIGNal LABel VERTical ABSolute POSition LabelID Source Position DISPlay SIGNal LABel VERTical ABSolute POSition LabelID Source Modifies or queries the absolute horizontal and vertic...

Page 1313: ...LabelID String with the label identifier Source All waveforms that can be displayed see DISPlay SIGNal LABel ADD Example DISPlay SIGNal LABel POSMode C2W1 REL DISPlay SIGNal LABel HORizontal RELative...

Page 1314: ...nts VLRHombus The cursors are displayed only as vertical lines The intersec tions of the cursors with the waveforms are displayed by rhom bus shaped points RHOMbus The intersections of the cursors wit...

Page 1315: ...synchronous command DISPlay RESultboxes MEPosition Position Defines the position of the measurement results on the display Parameters Position PREV FLOA DOCK PREV Preview result icon on the signal bar...

Page 1316: ...LABorder ON Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters State ON OFF Parameters for setting and query MeasType PLISt Only for peaklist measurements For o...

Page 1317: ...ng with the new mask test name Parameters for setting and query MaskTestName String with the existing mask test name MTESt HIGHlight INFinite State If ON the mask hits are highlighted for an unlimited...

Page 1318: ...Increment 1 RST 2578098858 Usage Asynchronous command MTESt COLor MATCh ClrMatchedPixel Sets the color of samples that violated the mask Parameters ClrMatchedPixel Decimal value corresponding to the A...

Page 1319: ...sponding to the ARGB hex value that is shown in the Color dialog box ARGB is a 32 bit unsigned inte ger with alpha red green blue word order Alpha defines the transparency To get the value covert the...

Page 1320: ...rea remains on the screen for the duration defined here Parameters Time Range 0 05 to 50 Increment 0 05 RST 0 05 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command DISPlay PERSistence RESet Resets the display...

Page 1321: ...ual data points are displayed RST VECTors Usage Asynchronous command 24 7 3 3 Clear results DISPlay CLR Deletes all measurement results including long term measurement and statistics all waveforms and...

Page 1322: ...h USRDefined RST NAME If OFF Preset sets the instrument to the factory defaults Parameters Name ON OFF RST OFF 24 7 5 Save recall See the following chapters Chapter 24 16 10 Autonaming on page 1666 Ch...

Page 1323: ...6 3 Hardware SYSTem DFPRint Path The device footprint contains the configuration of the instrument installed modules installed software and software licenses This information is written in the device...

Page 1324: ...r of your instrument This number is required to order a new option and in case of service Return values SerialNumber Number string Usage Query only Asynchronous command DIAGnostic SERVice CHANnelcount...

Page 1325: ...me base 1326 Acquisition 1332 Fast segmentation 1336 Vertical 1337 Waveform data 1342 Probes 1343 R S RT ZVC probe 1366 Differential signals 1379 Digital filter 1382 Skew 1384 AUX OUT 1385 High defini...

Page 1326: ...1329 ACQuire SRReal 1330 ACQuire RESolution 1330 ACQuire POINts VALue 1330 TIMebase ROLL ENABle 1331 TIMebase ROLL STATe 1331 TIMebase ROLL MTIMe 1331 TIMebase SCALe TimeScale Sets the horizontal sca...

Page 1327: ...zontal POSition RescalCenterTime Defines the time distance between the reference point and the trigger point the zero point of the diagram The reference point marks the rescaling center of the time sc...

Page 1328: ...d using the autoset in remote control To adjust the oscilloscope remotely especially for automated testing applications use the remote commands that adjust the horizontal vertical and trigger settings...

Page 1329: ...tant resolution is selected with ACQuire POINts AUTO If you increase the time scale the resolution remains constant and the record length increases until the limit is reached Further increase of the t...

Page 1330: ...length If interpolation is active the sample rate is limited to the ADC sample rate Parameters RealSampleRate Range 10 Gsample s Increment 1 RST 10 Gsample s Default unit Sa s Usage Asynchronous comma...

Page 1331: ...nder specific con ditions See also Roll mode on page 121 RST AUTO Usage Asynchronous command TIMebase ROLL STATe Returns the status of the roll mode Return values State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Query only...

Page 1332: ...lso Interpolation on page 128 Parameters IntpolMd LINear SINX SMHD LINear Linear interpolation between two adjacent sample points SINX Interpolation by means of a sin x x curve SMHD Sample Hold causes...

Page 1333: ...State Activates or deactivates a waveform STATe can be omitted Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel n 1 3 Selects the waveform If WAVeform n is omitted waveform 1 is adressed Parameters State ON OFF...

Page 1334: ...also Arithmetic on page 130 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel n 1 3 Selects the waveform If WAVeform n is omitted waveform 1 is adressed Parameters Arithmetics OFF ENVelope AVERage OFF The data...

Page 1335: ...lation after the time defined with ACQuire ARESet TIME WFMS Restarts the envelope and average calculation after a number of acquired waveforms defined with ACQuire ARESet COUNt on page 1335 RST NONE U...

Page 1336: ...tions The number of acquisitions in a fast segmentation acquisition series depends on the record length Parameters MaxAcquisitions ON OFF ON Acquires the maximum possible number of acquisitions in a s...

Page 1337: ...HANnel m BANDwidth 1340 CHANnel m CPLing 1340 CHANnel m IMPedance 1340 CHANnel m OVERload 1341 CHANnel m FILDesign 1341 CHANnel m STATe State Switches the channel signal on or off Suffix m 1 4 Selects...

Page 1338: ...ects the input channel Parameters Scale Scale value given in Volts per division Range Depends on attenuation factors coupling and instrument model see below Increment Depends on vertical and probe set...

Page 1339: ...re See also Offset on page 139 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters Offset Negative values move the waveform up positive values move it down Range Depends on attenuation factors input cou...

Page 1340: ...B20 Limit to 200 MHz or 20 MHz RST FULL Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m CPLing Channel State CHANnel m CPLing Channel Sets the vertical settings of the coupled channel to the values of the active...

Page 1341: ...assign an overload to a specific acquisition during continuous acquisition This assignment is only possible for a single acquisition Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters Overload ON OFF...

Page 1342: ...ort is enabled the number of returned samples is Record length Number of exported waveforms See also EXPort WAVeform MULTichannel Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel n 1 3 Selects the waveform If W...

Page 1343: ...ettings Example Retrieve the complete channel 1 waveform only Y values FORM ASC EXP WAV INCX OFF CHAN1 WAV1 DATA 0 125000 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 Example Retrieve the first 10 val...

Page 1344: ...1346 CHANnel m EATTenuation 1346 PROBe m SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified input channel is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on use CHANnel m STATe Suffi...

Page 1345: ...only Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation AUTO Queries the attenuation of the probe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Return values PrbAttMdAuto Range 1E 3 to 1000 RST 1 Default unit V...

Page 1346: ...l divider Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters ExtAttScl LIN LOG RST LIN Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m EATTenuation ExtAtt Sets the attenuation of an external voltage divider that...

Page 1347: ...omean SITFile NOACtion FINDtriglevel REPort PROBemode PRSetup RCONtinuous Run continuous The acquisition is running as long as the probe button is pressed RSINgle Run single Starts a defined number of...

Page 1348: ...differential active probe See also Differential active probes on page 118 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters DisplayDiff DIFFerential SINGleended DIFFerential Measures differential and...

Page 1349: ...ent result of differential active R S probes the common mode voltage which is the mean voltage between the signal sockets and the ground socket Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Return values Res...

Page 1350: ...ault unit V Usage Query only Asynchronous command Firmware software FW 2 25 PROBe m PMETer RESults POSitive Returns the ProbeMeter measurement result of differential active R S probes the volt age tha...

Page 1351: ...age 1351 is set to MANual Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters AttenuationUnit V A W Voltage probe V current probe A power probe W RST V Usage Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup ATTenuati...

Page 1352: ...ROBe m SETup ADVanced FILTer 1354 PROBe m SETup ADVanced AUDioverload 1354 PROBe m SETup CMOFfset CMOffset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available for differential probes Suffix m 1...

Page 1353: ...ADVanced PMToffset Sets the measured ProbeMeter value as offset Make sure that the ProbeMeter is active before you use this command Only available for power rail probes R S RT ZPR Suffix m 1 4 Select...

Page 1354: ...arameters Sound ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command 24 8 7 5 Modular probes The commands of this chapter are relevant for R S RT ZM modular probes The com mands are available in firmware version...

Page 1355: ...ended input voltage VN the voltage between the negative input terminal and ground RST DMODe Usage Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup DMOFfset DMOffset Sets the differential offset to compensate a DC v...

Page 1356: ...red automatically for correction Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Usage Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup POFFset POffset Sets the positive offset to compensate a DC volta...

Page 1357: ...mplifier to the VT terminal of the SMA module using the red DC lead see R S RT ZM User Manual Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Mode AUTO MANual AUTO The instrument uses the measured common mode voltage to cont...

Page 1358: ...dding TIPModule SELect 1358 PROBe m DEEMbedding TIPModule CSPFile 1359 PROBe m DEEMbedding TIPModule ZMA n SUBModule 1359 PROBe m DEEMbedding BANDwidth 1359 PROBe m DEEMbedding MODE 1360 PROBe m DEEMb...

Page 1359: ...igid cables or none Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel to which the probe is connected n 30 R S RT ZMA30 or 40 R S RT ZMA40 Parameters Value D16 D25 D45 D75 NONE SRCS For R S RT ZMA30 D16 1 6 mm D25 2 5...

Page 1360: ...or measurements if the measuring equipment is the load of the line RST PROBing Usage Asynchronous command PROBe m DEEMbedding REMProbeload RemoveProbeLoad Removes the loading of the probe if DEEMbeddi...

Page 1361: ...SETup ATTenuation DEFProbe PredefinedProbe Selects a predefined probe These are probes that are not recognized automatically but the parameters of the probe are known to the instrument Suffix m 1 4 Se...

Page 1362: ...e PROBe m SETup DEGauss 1362 PROBe m SETup OFFSet STPRobe 1362 PROBe m SETup OFFSet ZADJust 1363 PROBe m SETup DEGauss Demagnetizes the core if it has been magnetized by switching the power on and off...

Page 1363: ...hronous command Firmware software FW 2 50 24 8 7 9 Probe attributes PROBe m ID SWVersion 1363 PROBe m ID PRDate 1363 PROBe m ID PARTnumber 1364 PROBe m ID SRNumber 1364 PROBe m SETup CAPacitance 1364...

Page 1364: ...r Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Return values SerialNo Serial number in a string Usage Query only Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup CAPacitance Queries...

Page 1365: ...Type NONE Z2T RST NONE Usage Query only Asynchronous command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation TDEFprobe TekPredefProbe Selects the Tektronix probe that is connected to the R S RT Z2T adapter Suffix m 1 4 Par...

Page 1366: ...cution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used after the command or a command set For more information see www rohde schwarz com rc via scpi chapter Command Sequence and Synchro niz...

Page 1367: ...1E 6 Increment 5000 RST 1E 6 Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command ZVC TYPE DecimationMode Sets the decimation mode for the R S RT ZVC probe Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a st...

Page 1368: ...ffset current for the current channel Suffix m 1 2 n 1 4 Parameters VerticalOffset Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit V Usage Asynchronous command ZVC RESCoupled CoupleToAnalog Sets the re...

Page 1369: ...ation range that is automatically adjusted by the probe during overload is kept In internal shunt mode during an overload at a current channel the probe switches automatically to the next higher range...

Page 1370: ...he display of the signal Suffix m 1 2 n 1 4 Parameters VerticalScale Range 1E 15 to 10E 24 Increment 10E 6 RST 3 Default unit V div Usage Asynchronous command ZVC Z m I n SHUNt EVALue ExtShuntVal Defi...

Page 1371: ...are defined as described in the table below Parameter Internal shunt Maximum current A100r01 10 A 10 m A40R01 4 5 A 10 m A45M10r 45 mA 10 A4M510r 4 5 mA 10 A45u10k 45 A 10 K A4U510k 4 5 A 10 K Suffix...

Page 1372: ...skewOffset Sets the skew offset value for the current probe channel This is a delay value that is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument auto matically Suffix m 1...

Page 1373: ...Query only Asynchronous command ZVC Z m V n IMPedance MeasImp Sets the voltage impedance of the probe channel for power calculations and measure ments Suffix m 1 2 n 1 4 Parameters MeasImp Range 1 to...

Page 1374: ...values Overload ON OFF RST OFF Usage Query only Asynchronous command ZVC Z m V n POSition VertPosi Sets the vertical position of the indicated voltage channel as a graphical value Suffix m 1 2 n 1 4...

Page 1375: ...om the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument auto matically Suffix m 1 2 n 1 4 Parameters DeskewOffset Range 6E 6 to 6E 6 Increment 200E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Asynchrono...

Page 1376: ...m 1 2 Return values SerialNo Usage Query only Asynchronous command ZVC Z m ID SWVersion Queries the version of the probe firmware Suffix m 1 2 Return values Softwareversion Usage Query only Asynchron...

Page 1377: ...1 4 Return values ZeroCompState ON OFF ON Zero compensation is used Off Zero Compensation is not used RST OFF Usage Query only Asynchronous command 24 8 8 2 Resolution and data ACQuire POINts ZVALue 1...

Page 1378: ...2 Stop time in s 0 0001 3 Number of values in one waveform record length 1000 4 Number of values per sample interval For most waveforms the result is 1 for peak detect and enve lope waveforms it is 2...

Page 1379: ...measurement results they must be serviced sequentially To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used after the command or a command set For more infor...

Page 1380: ...log input channel of the positive and negative signal Suffix m 1 2 Differential signal Parameters Signal C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 RST C1W1 Usage Asynchronous command DIFFerential m AOUTput Output DIFFerent...

Page 1381: ...IFFerential SCALe Scale Set the vertical scale of differential and common mode waveforms respectively Vertical settings of P and N output are the vertical settings of the input channels Suffix m 1 2 D...

Page 1382: ...Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit V Usage Asynchronous command DIFFerential m COMMon POSition Position DIFFerential m DIFFerential POSition Position Set the vertical position of different...

Page 1383: ...tOffLP Range 100E 3 to instrument bandwidth RST 1E 6 Default unit Hz Available filter values are 100E 3 200E 3 300E 3 500E 3 1 0E 6 2 0E 6 3 0E 6 5 0E 6 10E 6 20E 6 30E 6 50E 6 100E 6 500E 6 1 0E 9 1...

Page 1384: ...1385 CHANnel m SKEW EXTended 1385 CHANnel m SKEW MANual ManualCompens If enabled the skew offset value CHANnel m SKEW TIME is used for compensa tion This improves horizontal and trigger accuracy Suff...

Page 1385: ...tting affects all active channels Parameters ProbeSkew ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m SKEW EXTended ExtendSkew Enables a higher skew value range that can be set with CHANnel m SKE...

Page 1386: ...1_20DB GHZ1 MHZ10 10 MHz square wave MHZ31_25 GHZ1 MHZ250MB 31 25 MHz 1 GHz 250 MHz sine waves generated by the main board MHZ250MB MHZ250mb GHZ1_20DB Clinched sine wave with indicated frequency gener...

Page 1387: ...ment bandwidth Increment 1000 RST 1E 6 Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command See Bandwidth on page 134 for bandwidth limits HDEFinition RESolution Returns the resulting digital resolution in high...

Page 1388: ...onnected to the exter nal reference input on the rear panel Parameters ExternalRef RST 10E 6 Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command 24 9 Trigger Some of the commands in the following chapter are a...

Page 1389: ...SOURce SELect 1389 TRIGger m TYPE 1390 TRIGger m LEVel n VALue 1391 TRIGger m FINDlevel 1392 DISPlay TRIGger LINes 1392 TRIGger m SOURce SELect SourceDetailed Selects the source of the trigger signal...

Page 1390: ...4 Z2V1 Z2V2 Z2V3 Z2V4 Z2I1 Z2I2 Z2I3 Z2I4 Input channels of R S RT ZVCmulti channel power probe Only available in the A trigger with trigger type EDGE DIFF1 DIFF2 COMMON1 COMMON2 Differential signals...

Page 1391: ...Communication testing requires option R S RTO6 K11 For NFC trigger settings see Chap ter 24 21 3 NFC trigger on page 2478 CDR Trigger on the edges of a recovered clock signal requires option R S RTO6...

Page 1392: ...B event and B trigger source chan nel 3 to 200 mV Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m FINDlevel Sets the trigger level automatically The command is only relevant if the trigger source is an analog ch...

Page 1393: ...rst pulse slope Suffix m 1 3 1 A trigger 2 B trigger 3 R trigger Parameters Polarity POSitive NEGative EITHer See Chapter 24 4 4 Polarity parameter on page 1285 RST POSitive Usage Asynchronous command...

Page 1394: ...Asynchronous command 24 9 4 Width trigger TRIGger m WIDTh POLarity 1394 TRIGger m WIDTh RANGe 1394 TRIGger m WIDTh WIDTh 1395 TRIGger m WIDTh DELTa 1395 TRIGger m WIDTh POLarity Polarity Suffix m 1 3...

Page 1395: ...TRIGger m WIDTh RANGe the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits Delta see TRIGger m WIDTh DELTa on page 1395 For the ranges Shorter and Longer the width defines the maximu...

Page 1396: ...arameter on page 1285 RST POSitive Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m LEVel n RUNT LOWer Level TRIGger m LEVel n RUNT UPPer Level Set the lower and upper voltage thresholds Suffix m 1 3 1 A trigger...

Page 1397: ...Triggers if the runt length is outside a given time range The range is defined by Runt width and Delta RST ANY Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m RUNT WIDTh Width Defines the upper or lower voltage...

Page 1398: ...EVel n WINDow LOWer Level TRIGger m LEVel n WINDow UPPer Level Set the lower and upper voltage limits for the window Suffix m 1 3 1 A trigger 2 B trigger 3 R trigger n 1 31 Indicates the trigger sourc...

Page 1399: ...lation to the time specified using TRIGger m WINDow WIDTh and TRIGger m WINDow DELTa Time conditioning is available for TRIGger m WINDow RANGe WITHin and OUTSide Suffix m 1 3 1 A trigger 2 B trigger 3...

Page 1400: ...rs Width Range 100E 12 to 10000 Increment 100E 9 RST 5E 9 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m WINDow DELTa WidthDelta Defines a range around the Width value specified using TRIGger m W...

Page 1401: ...B trigger 3 R trigger Parameters Time Range 100E 12 to 10000 Increment 100E 9 RST 100E 9 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command 24 9 8 Interval trigger TRIGger m INTerval SLOPe 1401 TRIGger m INTe...

Page 1402: ...s outside a given range The range is defined by the interval width delta SHORter Triggers on pulses shorter than the given interval width LONGer Triggers on pulses longer than the given interval width...

Page 1403: ...e for the trigger event Suffix m 1 3 1 A trigger 2 B trigger 3 R trigger Parameters Slope POSitive NEGative EITHer See Chapter 24 4 3 Slope parameter on page 1285 RST POSitive Usage Asynchronous comma...

Page 1404: ...e INSRange OUTRange LTHan GTHan INSRange Triggers on pulses inside a given range The range is defined by the slew rate delta OUTRange Triggers on pulses outside a given range The range is defined by t...

Page 1405: ...ommand 24 9 10 Setup Hold The Setup Hold trigger is only available for the A event Suffix 1 TRIGger m SETHold CSOurce EDGE 1405 TRIGger m SETHold CSOurce LEVel 1406 TRIGger m SETHold CSOurce VALue 140...

Page 1406: ...1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Parameters ClockSource CHAN1 CHANnel1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHANnel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 CHAN1 CHANnel1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHAN nel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 Input chann...

Page 1407: ...is adjusted by the instrument Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Parameters SetupTime Range 99 999E 9 to 100E 9 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous comm...

Page 1408: ...3 and 4 TRIGger m PATTern MODE 1408 TRIGger m PATTern TIMeout MODE 1409 TRIGger m PATTern TIMeout TIME 1409 TRIGger m PATTern WIDTh RANGe 1409 TRIGger m PATTern WIDTh WIDTh 1410 TRIGger m PATTern WIDT...

Page 1409: ...be omitted Parameters Time Range 100E 12 to 10000 Increment 100E 9 RST 100E 9 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m PATTern WIDTh RANGe WidthRangeMode Defines how the range of a pulse w...

Page 1410: ...nges Shorter and Longer the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width respectively Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Parameters Width Range 100E 12 to 10000 Increm...

Page 1411: ...l1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHAN nel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 Input channel of the clock signal RST CHAN1 Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m SPATtern CSOurce EDGE ClockEdge Together with the clock level see TRIG...

Page 1412: ...arameter accepts the bit value X don t care Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m SPATtern REFSource ReferenceSource Selects if an explicit clock or a CDR signal is used as a reference signal Suffix m...

Page 1413: ...mode TRIGger m TV CUSTom STYPe TRIGger m TV CUSTom LDURation TRIGger m TV CUSTom SDURation PAL PALM NTSC SECam SDTV standards PALM PAL M PxxxxLyyHZ HDTV standards using progressive scanning P xxxx ind...

Page 1414: ...ity Polarity Sets the polarity of the signal Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity for example a positive signal has a negative sync pulse Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available...

Page 1415: ...sF P1080L24HZSF 1080p 25 P1080L25HZ 1080p 30 P1080L30HZ 1080p 50 P1080L50HZ 1080p 60 P1080L60HZ 1 1125 TRIGger m TV LFIeld LineField The commands is only relevant for NTSC signals and sets the field i...

Page 1416: ...n two successive sync pulses Only relevant if TRIGger m TV STANdard is set to CUSTom Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Parameters LinePeriod Range 1E 6 to 500E 6 Increment...

Page 1417: ...event can have its own trigger qualification Qualification is not available for B and R events event suffix m 2 3 and some trigger types A suffix defines the trigger type to which the qualification b...

Page 1418: ...ABCD LOGic 1420 TRIGger m QUALify n STATe AddTrigLogi Enables the use of the qualification definition for the selected trigger event Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted n 1...

Page 1419: ...sion is ignored RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m QUALify n A LOGic Operator TRIGger m QUALify n B LOGic Operator TRIGger m QUALify n C LOGic Operator TRIGger m QUALify n D LOGic Operator D...

Page 1420: ...conjunctive combination NAND logical NOT AND OR logical OR disjunctive combination NOR logical NOT OR RST AND Usage Asynchronous command 24 9 16 Holdoff TRIGger m HOLDoff MODE 1420 TRIGger m HOLDoff...

Page 1421: ...e limited by TRIGger m HOLDoff MIN on page 1422 and TRIGger m HOLDoff MAX on page 1423 For each acquisition cycle the instrument selects a new random holdoff time from the specified range AUTO The hol...

Page 1422: ...7 Increment 1 RST 1 Example TRIGger HOLDoff MODE EVENts TRIGger HOLDoff EVENts 5 Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m HOLDoff MIN RandomMinTime Defines the lower limit for the random time holdoff The...

Page 1423: ...ldoff mode is set to AUTO Auto time Auto time scaling Horizontal scale The auto time scaling factor is defined with TRIGger m HOLDoff SCALing See also TRIGger m HOLDoff MODE Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trig...

Page 1424: ...LEVel n NOISe RELative 1426 TRIGger m LEVel n NOISe STATe HysteresisMode Selects how the hysteresis is set Suffix m 1 3 Irrelevant omit the suffix n 1 31 Indicates the trigger source 1 4 channel 1 to...

Page 1425: ...ined in relative values div RST ABS Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m LEVel n NOISe ABSolute HystAbs Defines a range in absolute values around the trigger level If the signal oscillates inside this...

Page 1426: ...nt 0 01 RST 0 Default unit div Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m LEVel n NOISe RELative HystRel Defines a range in percent around the trigger level If the signal oscillates inside this range and cr...

Page 1427: ...on page 229 Suffix m 1 3 Irrelevant omit the suffix Parameters Sequence ABR AZ ABRZ AORB AORBZ ABR Triggers if all conditions of A and B events as well as additional delay and reset timeout or R even...

Page 1428: ...Sets the time the instrument waits after an A event until it recognizes B events Suffix m 1 3 Irrelevant omit the suffix Parameters Delay Range 0 to 50 Increment 1E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Asyn...

Page 1429: ...ted with the A event Suffix m 1 3 Irrelevant omit the suffix Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m SEQuence RESet TIMeout TIME ResetTimeout The time the instrument waits...

Page 1430: ...if a trigger occurs FREerun The instrument triggers after a very short time interval faster than in AUTO mode Real triggers are ignored RST AUTO Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m FORCe If the acqu...

Page 1431: ...er point The setting is not available if a mask test or measurement is running and the on viola tion event is set to trigger out pulse Suffix m 1 3 Irrelevant omit the suffix Parameters Delay Range 80...

Page 1432: ...d TRIGger m EVENt WFMSave SaveWfm Saves the waveform data to file at each trigger if the command is set to TRIGger For data export settings see Chapter 24 16 4 Waveform data export to file on page 164...

Page 1433: ...gger TRIGger m ZONE EXPRession DEFine LogiExpr Defines the zone trigger Suffix m 1 3 The suffix is irrelevant Parameters LogiExpr String with the logical expression Example Prerequisite mask tests MT1...

Page 1434: ...e trigger signal DCLimit Direct connection with 1 M termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through DC capacitor removes DC and very low fre quency components...

Page 1435: ...w the Cut off frequency are rejected higher frequencies pass the fil ter Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Parameters AnalogCutOffHP KHZ5 KHZ50 MHZ50 Cut off frequency KHZ...

Page 1436: ...le Can be omitted Parameters Slope POSitive NEGative See Chapter 24 4 3 Slope parameter on page 1285 RST POSitive Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m EXTern OVERload Overload The query returns the ov...

Page 1437: ...uentially To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used after the command or a command set For more information see www rohde schwarz com rc via scpi c...

Page 1438: ...Tical OFF The new zoom diagram is displayed below the original one InsertBefore OFF Position of the zoom diagram depending on ParentType XStart Defines the x value at the beginning of the zoom area XS...

Page 1439: ...the diagram on which the zoom is based ZoomName String with the name of the zoom diagram Usage Asynchronous command LAYout ZOOM HORZ MODE DiagramName ZoomName Mode LAYout ZOOM HORZ MODE DiagramName Z...

Page 1440: ...s not supported for this command Parameters Span Range 0 to 100E 24 Increment 0 01 RST 0 01 Parameters for setting and query DiagramName Name of the diagram on which the zoom area is based ZoomName Na...

Page 1441: ...LAYout ZOOM HORZ RELative POSition DiagramName ZoomName Defines the x value of the centerpoint of the zoom area Parameters RelPosi Relative position of the centerpoint x value Range 0 to 100 Increment...

Page 1442: ...the zoom diagram Usage Asynchronous command LAYout ZOOM HORZ RELative STOP DiagramName ZoomName RelativeStop LAYout ZOOM HORZ RELative STOP DiagramName ZoomName Defines the upper limit of the zoom are...

Page 1443: ...a unit is not supported for this command Parameters Position Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 0 01 RST 0 01 Parameters for setting and query DiagramName Name of the diagram on which the zoom area is...

Page 1444: ...LAYout ZOOM VERTical ABSolute STOP DiagramName ZoomName Defines the upper limit of the zoom area on the y axis For numerical values the input of a unit is not supported for this command Parameters Sto...

Page 1445: ...nchronous command LAYout ZOOM VERTical RELative STARt DiagramName ZoomName RelativeStart LAYout ZOOM VERTical RELative STARt DiagramName ZoomName Defines the lower limit of the zoom area on the y axis...

Page 1446: ...mName Name of the zoom diagram Example See Chapter 24 3 1 2 Creating zoom diagrams on page 1261 Usage Setting only Asynchronous command 24 10 2 Reference waveforms Reference 1446 Scaling 1448 Waveform...

Page 1447: ...TATe State If enabled the reference waveform is displayed in the diagram Suffix m 1 4 Reference waveform Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command REFCurve m NAME Name Defines the nam...

Page 1448: ...1 4 Reference waveform Usage Event REFCurve m DELete Deletes the reference waveform file selected by REFCurve m NAME on page 1447 Suffix m 1 4 Reference waveform Usage Event REFCurve m CLEar The sele...

Page 1449: ...nt Asynchronous command REFCurve m VMODe VerticalMode Selects the coupling of vertical settings Suffix m 1 4 Reference waveform Parameters VerticalMode COUPled INDependent COUPled Vertical position an...

Page 1450: ...l settings of the reference waveform vertical scale posi tion and offset if vertical scaling is set to independent see REFCurve m VMODe on page 1449 Suffix m 1 4 Usage Event Asynchronous command REFCu...

Page 1451: ...asured value Suffix m 1 4 Reference waveform Parameters Offset Negative values shift the waveform up positive values shift it down Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 Default unit V Usage As...

Page 1452: ...REFCurve m RESCale HORizontal FACTor ScaleFactor A factor greater than 1 stretches the waveform horizontally a factor lower than 1 com presses the curve Suffix m 1 4 Reference waveform Parameters Sca...

Page 1453: ...rt Commands for saving waveform data to file are described in Chapter 24 16 4 Wave form data export to file on page 1649 Commands for reference waveforms are listed below REFCurve m DATA STYPe 1453 RE...

Page 1454: ...smission from the instrument to the controlling computer The data can be used in MATLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA You can retrieve only Y values or X and Y values Use EXPort...

Page 1455: ...eforms that are in the file you must assign each waveform to another reference waveform Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform Parameters MltChImptWfmSel NONE NONE WF1 WAVeform1 WF2 WAVeform2 WF3...

Page 1456: ...459 CALCulate MATH m DATA STYPe 1459 CALCulate MATH m DATA HEADer 1460 CALCulate MATH m DATA VALues 1460 CALCulate MATH m EXPRession DEFine RemComplExpr Defines the math expression to be calculated fo...

Page 1457: ...N MAX BOTH RST BOTH Usage Asynchronous command Firmware software FW 2 25 CALCulate MATH m ARIThmetics Arithmetics Selects the method to build the resulting math waveform from consecutive acquisitions...

Page 1458: ...e To define the number of acquisitions use ACQuire COUNt MINHold Determines the minimum result for each input value from the math data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisi tions before T...

Page 1459: ...8 Math waveform Parameters VerticalScale Range 1E 12 to 100E 12 Increment 10E 6 RST 0 5 Default unit V div Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m VERTical MAXimum VerticalMax Defines the maximum...

Page 1460: ...he result is 1 for peak detect and enve lope waveforms it is 2 If the number is 2 the num ber of returned values is twice the number of sam ples record length 1 Suffix m 1 8 Selects the math waveform...

Page 1461: ...1465 CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory STATe State Enables or disables the history display Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel n 1 3 Selects the waveform If WAVeform n is omitted waveform 1 is adressed...

Page 1462: ...e last from the history Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory STARt StrtAcqIdx Sets the index of the oldest history acquisition for the history viewing Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input...

Page 1463: ...omitted waveform 1 is adressed Parameters TimePerAcq Range 40E 6 to 10 Increment 1 RST 0 05 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory PLAY Starts and stops the replay of...

Page 1464: ...ing String with date of the current acquisition absolute time Usage Query only Asynchronous command CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory TSABsolute Returns the abolsute daytime of the current acquisition that...

Page 1465: ...story view with respect to the acquisition with index 0 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel n 1 3 Selects the waveform If WAVeform n is omitted waveform 1 is adressed Return values TimeRelIntRef Ra...

Page 1466: ...arameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command WAVeform m XYCurve SWAP Replaces the source of the x axis with the source of the y axis and vice versa Suffix m 1 4 XY diagram Usage Event Asy...

Page 1467: ...assigned to the y axis Usage Setting only Asynchronous command WAVeform m XYCurve XSOurce XSource Defines the signal source that supplies the x values of the XY diagram Suffix m 1 4 XY diagram Paramet...

Page 1468: ...executing before the next com mand starts executing If overlapping commands must be executed in a defined order e g to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially To prevent an...

Page 1469: ...he cursor set Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command CURSor m AOFF This command switches all cursors off Suffix m The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event Asynchronous command...

Page 1470: ...5 MSOB1 MSOB2 MSOB3 MSOB4 TRK1 TRK2 TRK3 TRK4 TRK5 TRK6 TRK7 TRK8 SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 SG7 SG8 SG1TL1 SG1TL2 SG2TL1 SG2TL2 SG3TL1 SG3TL2 SG4TL1 SG4TL2 SG5TL1 SG5TL2 SG6TL1 SG6TL2 SG7TL1 SG7TL2 SG8T...

Page 1471: ...ack2 DDJTrack2 PJTRack2 RJTORack2 TJSPectrum2 DDJSpectrum2 PJSPectrum2 RJOSPectrum2 SEYE1 SEYE2 SDHist1 TJHist1 DJHist1 DDJHist1 PJHist1 RJOHist1 SRHist2 SDHist2 TJHist2 DJHist2 DDJHist2 PJHist2 RJOHi...

Page 1472: ...rve ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command CURSor m X1Position XPosition1 Defines the position of the left vertical cursor line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the cursor set Parameters XPosition1 Range 0 to...

Page 1473: ...tion1 Defines the position of the lower horizontal cursor line If CURSor m TRACking STATe is enabled the query returns the measurement result the lower vertical value of the waveform Suffix m 1 4 Sele...

Page 1474: ...s remain a fixed distance OFF Each cursor line is positioned independently RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command CURSor m X1ENvelope EnvelopeCurve1 If the waveform arithmetics are set to envelope curve s...

Page 1475: ...minimum waveform envelope MAX The horizontal cursor is set to the crossing point of the vertical cursor with the maximum waveform envelope RST MAX Usage Asynchronous command CURSor m LABel LABel Show...

Page 1476: ...AllDiags Shows the enabled cursor measurements in all active diagrams of the same domain time spectrum Suffix m 1 The suffix is irrelevant All cursor measurements are affected Parameters ShowInAllDiag...

Page 1477: ...the two horizontal cursor lines Suffix m 1 4 Selects the cursor set Return values Delta Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Usage Query only Asynchronous command CURSor m YDELta SLOPe DeltaSlope Returns t...

Page 1478: ...r Sets the vertical cursor line c1 to the center frequency Suffix m The suffix is irrelevant Usage Event Asynchronous command CURSor m MAXimum PEAK Sets both cursors to the absolute peak value Suffix...

Page 1479: ...ix m Manual operation MG subtab 1 to 8 correspond to MG1 to MG8 9 10 do not use Not available Some of the commands in the following chapter are asynchronous An overlapping or asynchronous command does...

Page 1480: ...itional 1484 MEASurement m AON 1485 MEASurement m AOFF 1485 MEASurement m ENABle State Switches the indicated measurement on or off Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m o...

Page 1481: ...form parameter on page 1284 SignalSource2 C1W1 C1W2 C1W3 C2W1 C2W2 C2W3 C3W1 C3W2 C3W3 C4W1 C4W2 C4W3 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 TRK1 TRK...

Page 1482: ...d is an alternative to MEASurement m SOURce Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters Source2 Second source of the measurement see MEASurement m SOURce...

Page 1483: ...group with MEASurement m ADDitional Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters MeasType Amplitude time measurements HIGH LOW AMPLitude MAXimum MINimum...

Page 1484: ...t Protocol measurements NONE AUDio F2F F2A FLDValue GAP MBITrate SBI Trate BIDLe FCNT FEC FER CFER Requires option R S RTO6 K500 See Chapter 24 12 11 Protocol on page 1539 Optical measurements OAP OMA...

Page 1485: ...all additional measurements in all categories of the indicated measurement Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Usage Event Asynchronous command 24 12 2 Res...

Page 1486: ...ATistics ENABle 1 MEASurement ARES Amplitude 2 312252964427e 001 2 608695652174e 001 2 292490118577e 001 2 391822576775e 001 2 392462568683e 001 5 533663458383e 003 12447 12447 Max 1 343873517787e 001...

Page 1487: ...Dev MeasType Return the statistic results of the specified measurement If no parameter is specified the result of the main measurement is returned The main measurement is defined using MEASurement m M...

Page 1488: ...urements option R S RTO6 K12 on page 2479 Eye diagram measurements ERPercent ERDB EHEight EWIDth ETOP EBASe QFAC tor RMSNoise SNRatio DCDistortion ERTime EFTime EBRate EAMPlitude PPJitter STDJitter RM...

Page 1489: ...oup MEASurement m on page 1479 Query parameters MeasType See MEASurement m RESult STDDev on page 1487 Usage Query only MEASurement m RESult COUNt Returns the number of result groups that are returned...

Page 1490: ...al 12 RTIMe Rise time Rise time of the left most rising edge of the waveform 13 FTIMe Fall time Falling time of the left most falling edge of the waveform 14 PPULse Pos pulse Width of a positive pulse...

Page 1491: ...in following queries MEASurement m ARES MEASurement n RESult commands 33 HOLD Hold time SHT Setup Hold time Setting parameter to enable Setup Hold time measure ments Use this parameter only as settin...

Page 1492: ...urement m AMPTime PTCount 1496 MEASurement m AMPTime ESLope 1496 MEASurement m AMPTime CSLope 1496 MEASurement m AMPTime CLCK n LSELect 1497 MEASurement m AMPTime DATA n LSELect 1497 MEASurement m AMP...

Page 1493: ...e Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters AreaLevel Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 0 RST 0 Default unit V Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m AMPTime PFSLope...

Page 1494: ...ment m ADDitional PULCnt ON Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters PulsesSlope POSitive NEGative EITHer Count either positive or negative pulses or...

Page 1495: ...ASurement m AMPTime DELay n LSELect DlyLevSel Selects the reference level on which the time is measured for each source Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479...

Page 1496: ...the edge direction to be counted rising edges falling edges or both The setting is only relevant for edge count measurement MEASurement m MAIN EDGecount or MEASurement m ADDitional EDGecount ON Suffi...

Page 1497: ...Sel UPPer MIDDle LOWer RST MIDDle Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m AMPTime DATA n LSELect DatLevSel Selects the reference level of the data on which the setup and hold time are measured Suffix...

Page 1498: ...Asynchronous command MEASurement m AMPTime LCHeck n VALid ValidRange Enables or disables limit checking for amplitude vs time measurements in the speci fied measurement channel Suffix m 1 10 See Selec...

Page 1499: ...lower and upper margins for the limit check respectively Margins are not as strict as limits and must be within the valid value range The valid range is defined using the MEASurement m AMPTime LCHeck...

Page 1500: ...PTime 1506 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic PARameter n GROup 1507 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic PARameter n SPECtrum 1507 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic PARameter n TYPE 1508 MEASurement m AM...

Page 1501: ...IT_S BIT WORD PPM DB PER_SEC S_DIV HZ_DIV V_DIV A_DIV OHM_DIV NONE_DIV DIV BER S S_S BAUD TDEG VS USER UINV W_DIV V_V A_V W_V BYTS V_A V_W VA VAR UI LN RST NONE Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement...

Page 1502: ...us command MEASurement m AMPTime ARIThmetic OPERator ArithOperator Selects the operation type to be performed on the selected operands for the amplitude time arithmetic measurement Suffix m 1 10 See S...

Page 1503: ...6 RST HIGH Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m AMPTime ARIThmetic PARameter n GROup ArithOp2MeasGroup Sets the measurement group for the second operand of the amplitude time arithmetic measuremen...

Page 1504: ...479 n 2 Parameters ArithOp2Type MEASurement CONStant MEASurement Performs an arithmetic operation between two measurement results CONStant Performs an operation between a measurement result and a user...

Page 1505: ...QRT_HZ PCT DBPT DBPT_HZ H PH_GHZ F FF_GHZ OHM SIEMENS S DBPS DBNS DBUS DBMS DBS HZ DBHZ DBKHZ DBMHZ DBGHZ M IN DEG RAD PCT SYMB VA_LIN VA_LOG NONE IRE MILES SYMB_S MSYMB_S MBIT_S BIT_S BIT WORD PPM DB...

Page 1506: ...ntSt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic OPERator ArithOperator Selects the operation type to be performed on the selected operands for the spectrum arithmetic...

Page 1507: ...IGH Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic PARameter n GROup ArithOp2MeasGroup Sets the measurement group for the second operand of the spectrum arithmetic mea surement Suffix m...

Page 1508: ...surement results CONStant Performs an operation between a measurement result and a user defined fixed constant RST MEASurement Usage Asynchronous command 24 12 5 Eye diagram measurements The following...

Page 1509: ...17 EFTime Eye fall time Duration for signal to fall from 90 to 10 of the high signal level 18 EBRate Eye bit rate Frequency between two crossings 19 EAMPlitude Eye amplitude Eye top Eye base 20 not u...

Page 1510: ...Upper limit above the upper limit value LLIMit Lower limit below the lower limit value OLIMit Outside limit above the upper limit or below the lower limit val ues RST ILIMit Usage Asynchronous comman...

Page 1511: ...mands are listed For a detailed description see Chapter 8 2 7 1 Overview of spectrum measure ments on page 335 Table 24 8 Spectrum measurements MeasType parameter value remote control Measurement manu...

Page 1512: ...rithmetic for spec trum measure ments Basic arithmetic calculations with measurement val ues and scalars 15 MEASurement m SPECtrum CPOWer BANDwidth 1512 MEASurement m SPECtrum OBANdwidth 1513 MEASurem...

Page 1513: ...e Asynchronous command MEASurement m SPECtrum CPOWer CFRequency ChPowCtrFreq Defines the center frequency from which the channel power is calculated over the specified bandwidth Suffix m 1 10 See Sele...

Page 1514: ...Version 2 70 MEASurement m SPECtrum ATHReshold Value Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected This setting is onl...

Page 1515: ...n 12 13 12 Peak list measurements 13 Harmonic search measurements Parameters ResultMode ABS REL ABS The harmonics peaks are shown in absolute value dBm REL The level of the carrier is shown in absolut...

Page 1516: ...9 Parameters State ON OFF Parameters for setting and query MeasType PLISt Only for peaklist measurements For other measurements this command returns an error Example Display labels MEAS RES SHL PLIS O...

Page 1517: ...s ValidRange ILIMit ULIMit LLIMit OLIMit ILIMit Inside within limit between the upper and lower limit values ULIMit Upper limit above the upper limit value LLIMit Lower limit below the lower limit val...

Page 1518: ...able 24 8 Parameters UpperMargin Range 100 to 100 Increment 10E 6 RST 0 Usage Asynchronous command 24 12 7 Optical measurements The following table lists the MeasType parameter values with a short des...

Page 1519: ...n of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters Start Range 1 to 99 Increment 0 1 RST 40 Default unit Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m OPTical OMAMplitude RELative STOP Stop S...

Page 1520: ...RST 0 Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m OPTical LCHeck n LOWer MARGin LowerMargin MEASurement m OPTical LCHeck n UPPer MARGin UpperMargin Define the lower upper margin for limit checking of th...

Page 1521: ...LAYout HISTogram MODE 1523 LAYout HISTogram HORZ MODE 1524 LAYout HISTogram HORZ ABSolute STARt 1524 LAYout HISTogram HORZ ABSolute STOP 1524 LAYout HISTogram HORZ RELative STARt 1525 LAYout HISTogram...

Page 1522: ...st2 RJOHist2 SEYE2 TNHist1 DNHist1 DDNHist1 PNHist1 RNOHist1 TNHist2 DNHist2 DDNHist2 PNHist2 RNOHist2 PJDHist1 BUJHist1 RJHist1 PJDHist2 BUJHist2 RJHist2 PNDHist1 BUNHist1 RNHist1 PNDHist2 BUNHist2 R...

Page 1523: ...EYE1 EYE2 EYE3 EYE4 SRHist1 SDHist1 TJHist1 DJHist1 DDJHist1 PJOHist1 RJOHist1 SEYE1 SRHist2 SDHist2 TJHist2 DJHist2 DDJHist2 PJOHist2 RJOHist2 SEYE2 TNHist1 DNHist1 DDNHist1 PNHist1 RNOHist1 TNHist2...

Page 1524: ...ogram HORZ ABSolute STARt HistogramName Start LAYout HISTogram HORZ ABSolute STARt HistogramName Defines the horizontal start value of the histogram For numerical values the input of a unit is not sup...

Page 1525: ...Togram HORZ RELative STOP HistogramName RelativeStop LAYout HISTogram HORZ RELative STOP HistogramName Defines the horizontal stop value of the histogram Parameters RelativeStop Range 0 to 100 Increme...

Page 1526: ...e vertical stop value of the histogram For numerical values the input of a unit is not supported for this command Parameters Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 0 01 RST 0 01 Parameters for settin...

Page 1527: ...ments on histograms Note that the R S RTO6 performs histogram measurements on the measurement that is defined with MEASurement m MAIN Other measurements are not considered See also Creating and readin...

Page 1528: ...sample numbers 13 M1STddev Mean Range between mean value standard deviation and mean value standard deviation 14 M2STddev Mean 2 Range between mean value 3 standard devia tion and mean value 2 standa...

Page 1529: ...HistgPrbDomMark PEAK UPPK LWPK MAXimum MINimum MEDian MEAN PEAK The y value with the maximum sample value in the histogram UPPK The y value at the maximum sample value in the upper half of the histog...

Page 1530: ...ement see Table 24 10 Parameters ValidRange ILIMit ULIMit LLIMit OLIMit ILIMit Inside within limit between the upper and lower limit values ULIMit Upper limit above the upper limit value LLIMit Lower...

Page 1531: ...the MEASurement m HISTogram LCHeck n VALid command Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 n 1 18 Number of the histogram measurement see Table 24 10 Parameters...

Page 1532: ...ameters DisplayResult ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m DISPlay STYLe DisplayStyle Selects the style in which the measurement waveform is displayed Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of...

Page 1533: ...TIMe 1536 MEASurement m STATistics RESet 1536 MEASurement m VERTical CONT 1537 MEASurement m VERTical AUTO 1537 MEASurement m VERTical OFFSet 1537 MEASurement m VERTical SCALe 1538 MEASurement m LTMea...

Page 1534: ...ed measurement is enabled MEASurement m MULTiple is ON Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters MaxMeasPerAcq Range 2 to 1000000 Increment 1 RST 1000...

Page 1535: ...ment m STATistics MODE ResetMode Defines when the statistics for long term measurements are reset Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters ResetMode T...

Page 1536: ...rement m STATistics MODE is set to MEAS Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters RstMeasCnt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 10 RST 1000 Usage Asynchronous...

Page 1537: ...tAutoScl ON OFF RST ON Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m VERTical AUTO Performs an automatic scaling once so that the scaling is adapted to the current mea surement results Available only for l...

Page 1538: ...eas STATe ShowDiagram Enables long term measurement for a defined number of measurement points see MEASurement m LTMeas COUNt on page 1538 or a specified time seeMEASurement m LTMeas TIME on page 1539...

Page 1539: ...lowing table lists the MeasType parameter values with a short description Table 24 11 Protocol measurements MeasType param eter value remote control Measurement man ual operation Description Result AU...

Page 1540: ...t m PROTocol FLDValue VAL 1542 MEASurement m PROTocol MBITrate FLD 1543 MEASurement m PROTocol MBITrate FRM 1543 MEASurement m PROTocol MBITrate VAL 1543 MEASurement m PROTocol SBITrate FLD 1543 MEASu...

Page 1541: ...nt Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters FrameName MEASurement m PROTocol F2FRame VALFrom FrmFrmFromVal Sets the field value of the start frame for...

Page 1542: ...nt Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters FrameName MEASurement m PROTocol FLDValue TRCK FieldName Sets the field to be tracked value of the frame f...

Page 1543: ...m on page 1479 Parameters FrameName MEASurement m PROTocol MBITrate VAL MainBtRateIdVal Sets the field value of the frame for the main bit rate protocol measurement Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the...

Page 1544: ...eters SecondaryBtRateIdVal Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m PROTocol T2FRame DIRection TrigFrmDirct Sets the direction of the field for trigger to frame protocol measurement Suffix m 1 10 Para...

Page 1545: ...1545 MEASurement m TRACk DATA STYPe 1546 MEASurement m TRACk DATA VALues 1546 MEASurement m TRACk STATe State Enables the track functionality and displays the track The track functionality requires at...

Page 1546: ...t group MEASurement m on page 1479 Usage Query only 24 12 13 Gating MEASurement m GATE STATe 1546 MEASurement m GATE MODE 1547 MEASurement m GATE ABSolute STARt 1547 MEASurement m GATE ABSolute STOP 1...

Page 1547: ...olute STOP Stop Define the absolute start and end values for the gate Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment...

Page 1548: ...t m GATE CCOupling CursorCoupling Enables the cursor coupling for automatic measurements Select the cursor set to be used with MEASurement m GATE CURSor Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement...

Page 1549: ...u enable the gate coupling the gate settings of the selected measurement are copied to all other measurements If zoom or cursor coupling is active in a measure ment the zoom size and cursor positions...

Page 1550: ...sound for the specified event Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters Beep NOACtion SUCCess VIOLation See Chapter 24 4 5 Event parameter on page 1286...

Page 1551: ...f the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters Report NOACtion SUCCess VIOLation See Chapter 24 4 5 Event parameter on page 1286 RST NOACtion Usage Asynchronous command MEASurement m ON...

Page 1552: ...561 Results 1563 24 12 15 1 General reference level settings REFLevel m LDETection 1552 REFLevel m LMODe 1553 REFLevel m RELative MODE 1553 REFLevel m USRLevel 1554 REFLevel m LDETection Mode Defines...

Page 1553: ...evels to absolute values for C1W1 C1W1 corresponds to suffix number 2 Example See Manual reference level definition using relative values on page 1262 Usage Asynchronous command REFLevel m RELative MO...

Page 1554: ...rm of the measurement see Chapter 24 4 1 Waveform suffix on page 1279 Parameters Mode USIGnal UREF USIGnal The high and low signal levels are defined by the user UREF The reference levels are defined...

Page 1555: ...MLP Upper mean probability lower absolute peak high signal level is the level with mean probability in the upper half of the histogram low signal level is the lower absolute peak UALM Upper absolute p...

Page 1556: ...s set to ON REFLevel m LDETection on page 1552 is set to AUTO Suffix m Valid suffix numbers 2 to 21 61 to 68 108 to 118 151 to 157 173 to 179 Source waveform of the measurement see Chapter 24 4 1 Wave...

Page 1557: ...the measurement see Chapter 24 4 1 Waveform suffix on page 1279 Parameters Value Example REFLevel2 ABSolute Low 0 0015 Sets the low signal level forC1W1 to 1 5 mV C1W1 corresponds to suffix number 2 U...

Page 1558: ...ically if you change the high or low signal levels Vice versa if you change the middle level the high and low signal levels are adjusted For user reference level selection the level is the middle leve...

Page 1559: ...l Suffix m Valid suffix numbers 2 to 21 61 to 68 108 to 118 151 to 157 173 to 179 Source waveform of the measurement see Chapter 24 4 1 Waveform suffix on page 1279 Parameters Value Example REFLevel2...

Page 1560: ...l level Example REFLevel8 RELative MIDDle 50 Sets the middle reference level for C3W1 to 50 C3W1 corre sponds to suffix number 8 Example See Manual reference level definition using relative values on...

Page 1561: ...OTube 1562 REFLevel m ABSolute TITube 1562 REFLevel m ABSolute BITube 1562 REFLevel m ABSolute BOTube 1563 REFLevel m RELative OTUBe Value Defines a percentage of the signal level by which the absolut...

Page 1562: ...1 Waveform suffix on page 1279 Parameters Value Usage Asynchronous command REFLevel m ABSolute TITube Value Defines an area beneath the high signal level which is still considered to be high level Suf...

Page 1563: ...EASurement m REFLevel RESult SIGLow 1563 MEASurement m REFLevel RESult SIGHigh 1563 MEASurement m REFLevel RESult BINNer 1564 MEASurement m REFLevel RESult BOUTer 1564 MEASurement m REFLevel RESult TI...

Page 1564: ...age 1479 Return values BottomInner Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Usage Query only Asynchronous command MEASurement m REFLevel RESult BOUTer Returns the area beneath the low signal level which is stil...

Page 1565: ...the next com mand starts executing If overlapping commands must be executed in a defined order e g to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially To prevent an overlapping exec...

Page 1566: ...74 CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE ZCOupling 1574 CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE STATe 1575 CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude LEVel 1575 CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude RANGe 1575 CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCAL...

Page 1567: ...Increment 1 RST 2E 9 Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency CenterFreq Defines the position of the displayed frequency range which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2...

Page 1568: ...requency span Range 1 to 10E 9 Increment 1 RST Bandwidth of the instrument model bandwidth extension options are not considered Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT TYPE Typ...

Page 1569: ...anRBWRatio ratio span resolution bandwidth Range 1 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 100 Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue ResolutionBW This command defines the resoluti...

Page 1570: ...peri odic signals and narrow band noise HANN The Hann window is bell shaped and has a slightly worse fre quency resolution but smaller sidelobe level than the Hamming window The applications are the s...

Page 1571: ...ly be analyzed partially This command queries the percentage of the trace that was analyzed i e which part of the trace was included in the frame calculation Suffix m 1 8 math waveform Return values F...

Page 1572: ...t 1 RST 50 Default unit Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE COUPling GateRBWCoupling Defines the behaviour of the record length or RBW value in dependancy to the other FFT parameters...

Page 1573: ...100E 3 RST 0 5 Default unit s Usage Query only Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE ABSolute STARt Start Defines the starting value for the gate Suffix m 1 8 math waveform Parameters Start R...

Page 1574: ...0 Default unit Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT GATE RELative STOP RelativeStop Defines the end value for the gate in percent Suffix m 1 8 math waveform Parameters RelativeStop Range 0...

Page 1575: ...ge 1E 15 to 1E 15 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit div Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude RANGe Range Defines the vertical value range in spectrum mode Suffix m 1 8 math wavefo...

Page 1576: ...S DBUS DBMS DBS DBHZ DBKHZ DBKHz DBMHZ DBMHz DBGHZ DBGHz FFT on tracks of time or frequency measurements DBA DBMA DBUA FFT on current waveforms RST DBM Usage Asynchronous command Table 24 12 Logarithm...

Page 1577: ...lue see CALCulate MATH m FFT PHASe THReshold on page 1577 Suffix m 1 8 math waveform Parameters Suppression ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command CALCulate MATH m FFT PHASe THReshold SupprThres De...

Page 1578: ...ll coupled spectrums Suffix m 1 8 FFT waveforms to be coupled m m2 must be active and distinct Parameters MathIndex ON OFF RST OFF Example Prerequisite FFt waveforms M1 and M2 are active CALC MATH1 FF...

Page 1579: ...he result is 1 for peak detect and enve lope waveforms it is 2 If the number is 2 the num ber of returned values is twice the number of sam ples record length 1 Suffix m 1 8 Selects the math waveform...

Page 1580: ...CI AMPL INCI Incidence The display color is set depending on the fre quency of occurrence of a value AMPL Amplitude In the spectrogram and the frequency analysis dis play the color is used to indicate...

Page 1581: ...defined by the index of the data acquisition in the history How many acquisitions are available depends on the history settings Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Asynchronous command CALCu...

Page 1582: ...scpi chapter Command Sequence and Synchro nization Chapter 24 3 Programming examples on page 1259 Mask test definition 1582 Mask definition user mask 1586 Mask definition waveform mask 1592 Event act...

Page 1583: ...started The testing is stopped when acquisition is stopped also due to the MTESt ONViolation STOP command or if MASK STATe is set to OFF The coommand needs OPC command synchronisation Parameters Stat...

Page 1584: ...and MTESt CONDition MaskTestName PassFailMode MTESt CONDition MaskTestName Sets the first criteria for a failed test the kind of hits to be considered for test evalua tion A test has failed if the num...

Page 1585: ...Chapter 24 14 2 Mask definition user mask on page 1586 WFML The mask is created from the envelope of an existing waveform See Chapter 24 14 3 Mask definition waveform mask on page 1592 EYEMask Mask fo...

Page 1586: ...TestName Deletes the specified mask test Setting parameters MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test Usage Setting only Asynchronous command 24 14 2 Mask definition user mask The chapter con...

Page 1587: ...eters for setting and query MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test MaskSegmIdx Number of the segment Counting starts from 0 Usage Asynchronous command MTESt SEGMent ADD MaskTestName Create...

Page 1588: ...dicated mask test Setting parameters MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test Usage Setting only Asynchronous command MTESt SEGMent REGion MaskTestName MaskSegmIdx Region MTESt SEGMent REGio...

Page 1589: ...mask segment point Setting parameters MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test MaskSegmIdx Number of the segment Counting starts from 0 MaskSegmPtIdx Number of the point Counting starts fro...

Page 1590: ...ter 24 3 3 1 Creating a user mask on page 1265 Usage Asynchronous command MTESt SEGMent POINt Y MaskTestName MaskSegmIdx MaskSegmPtIdx Y MTESt SEGMent POINt Y MaskTestName MaskSegmIdx MaskSegmPtIdx De...

Page 1591: ...1 compress it Negative values are possible and change the algebraic sign Only takes effect after the MTESt SEGMent RESCale RECalculate command Parameters ExpansFactY Range 100 to 100 Increment 1 RST...

Page 1592: ...aveform mask The chapter contains commands required for the definition of waveform masks MTESt CTYPe is set to WFML MTESt REFWfm 1592 MTESt WFMLupdate 1593 MTESt WFMRescale XWIDth 1593 MTESt WFMRescal...

Page 1593: ...ive x values of the mask limits in relation to the source waveform of the mask Parameters HorizontalWidth Range 0 to 1000 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit div Parameters for setting and query MaskTes...

Page 1594: ...g to stretch the mask in y direction The scaling axis is the hori zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit Parameters VerticalStretch Scale factor in Range 10 to 1000 Increment 1 R...

Page 1595: ...NOACtion Parameters for setting and query MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test Usage Asynchronous command MTESt ONViolation PRINt MaskTestName Print MTESt ONViolation PRINt MaskTestName...

Page 1596: ...IGgerout MaskTestName Creates a trigger out pulse on mask violation or successful completion of the test cycle Parameters TriggerOutPulse NOACtion SUCCess VIOLation RST NOACtion Parameters for setting...

Page 1597: ...ESt RESult COUNt REMaining on page 1598 Query parameters MaskTestName Return values State RUNNing FINished RST RUNNing Usage Query only Asynchronous command MTESt RESult RESult MaskTestName Returns th...

Page 1598: ...sition has been stopped manually Query parameters MaskTestName Return values AcqsRemaining Range 0 to 100E 24 RST 0 Usage Query only Asynchronous command MTESt RESult COUNt FWAVeforms MaskTestName Ret...

Page 1599: ...the definition type Eye MTESt CEMask 1599 MTESt EYEMask TYPE 1600 MTESt EYEMask HEIGht m VALue 1600 MTESt EYEMask WIDTh m VALue 1600 MTESt EYEMask MSKRight 1601 MTESt EYEMask MSKLeft 1601 MTESt EYEMa...

Page 1600: ...efines the main heigth af all eye mask shapes and the minor height for octagon mask shapes Suffix m 1 2 1 main width 2 minor width Parameters value Default unit s Setting parameters MaskTestName Strin...

Page 1601: ...rpattLength MTESt EYEMask HPERiod MaskTestName Defines the time distance between the shape centers if MTESt EYEMask MSKLeft and or MTESt EYEMask MSKRight are ON Parameters InterpattLength Range 0 to 1...

Page 1602: ...d MTESt EYEMask TBSYmmetric MaskTestName TopBtomSymetrie MTESt EYEMask TBSYmmetric MaskTestName Sets bottom and top offsets to the same value so that the outer regions are symmetric to the eye shape P...

Page 1603: ...on of the eye shape on the display Parameters PatOffsetY Range 100 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit V Parameters for setting and query MaskTestName String with the name of the mask test Usage...

Page 1604: ...ions 1628 Search on spectrum 1630 Search gate settings 1631 Search results 1634 24 15 1 General search settings SEARch ADD 1604 SEARch CLEar 1604 SEARch REMove 1605 SEARch SOURce 1605 SEARch ONLine 16...

Page 1605: ...1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 SBUS1 SBUS2 SBUS3 SBUS4 Source of the search see Chapter 24 4 2 Waveform parame ter on page 1284 RST C1W1 Param...

Page 1606: ...DGE ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger GLITch ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger INTerval ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger PATTern ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger RUNT ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger SETHold ACOPy 1607 SEARch TRIGger SLE...

Page 1607: ...chName SignalSource Value SEARch TRIGger LEVel VALue Key SignalSource Sets the voltage of the trigger level that is used to determine other parameters Parameters Value Voltage value Parameters for set...

Page 1608: ...er event configuration from trigger B for the selected channel source to the search condition settings Setting parameters SearchName String with name of the search Usage Setting only Asynchronous comm...

Page 1609: ...TRIGger GLITch RANGe SearchName Selects which glitches are identified shorter or longer than the specified width see SEARch TRIGger GLITch WIDTh on page 1609 Parameters RangeMode SHORter LONGer RST S...

Page 1610: ...hName String parameter name of the search definition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger INTerval DELTa SearchName WidthDelta SEARch TRIGger INTerval DELTa SearchName Defines a range around the...

Page 1611: ...e Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger INTerval WIDTh SearchName Width SEARch TRIGger INTerval WIDTh SearchName Defines the time between two pulses Parameters Width Range 100E 12 to 864 Increment 100E...

Page 1612: ...ion Usage Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe SearchName Mode SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe SearchName Selects how the time limit of the runt pulse is defined based on the runt width and delta...

Page 1613: ...chName Search definition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer SearchName SignalSource Value SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer Key SignalSource SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT UPPer Searc...

Page 1614: ...ch TRIGger SLEWrate RANGe SearchName RangeMode SEARch TRIGger SLEWrate RANGe SearchName Selects how the time limit for the slew rate is defined The time measurement starts when the signal crosses the...

Page 1615: ...efines the maximum and mini mum slew rate limits respectively The range is defined using SEARch TRIGger SLEWrate RANGe Parameters Time Range 100E 12 to 864 Increment 100E 9 RST 100E 12 Default unit s...

Page 1616: ...Gger TIMeout RANGe 1616 SEARch TRIGger TIMeout TIME 1616 SEARch TRIGger TIMeout RANGe SearchName TimeoutMode SEARch TRIGger TIMeout RANGe SearchName Selects the relation of the signal level to the tri...

Page 1617: ...given width value see also SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh on page 1618 Parameters WidthDelta Range 0 to 432 Increment 500E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Parameters for setting and query SearchName Search defin...

Page 1618: ...ONGer Triggers on pulses longer than the given Width RST WITHin Parameters for setting and query SearchName Search definition Example See Chapter 24 3 4 1 Searching for a pulse of specified width on p...

Page 1619: ...ition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger WINDow RANGe SearchName RangeMode SEARch TRIGger WINDow RANGe SearchName Selects how the signal run is compared with the window Parameters RangeMode ENT...

Page 1620: ...e signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits for a time shorter than Width Delta or longer than Width Delta SHORter Triggers if the signal crosses vertical limits before the specified W...

Page 1621: ...R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 TRK1 TRK2 TRK3 TRK4 TRK5 TRK6 TRK7 TRK8 Z1V1 Z1V2 Z1V3 Z1V4 Z1I1 Z1I2 Z1I3 Z1I4 Z2V1 Z2V2 Z2V3 Z2V4 Z2I1 Z2I2 Z2I3 Z2I4 Source of the searc...

Page 1622: ...Ource SearchName Selects the waveform used for the clock signal Parameters ClockSource C1W1 C1W2 C1W3 C2W1 C2W2 C2W3 C3W1 C3W2 C3W3 C4W1 C4W2 C4W3 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 Source of the clo...

Page 1623: ...me If you change the negative setup time the hold time is adjusted by the intrument Parameters SetupTime Range 99 999E 9 to 0 1 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Parameters for setting and query Sea...

Page 1624: ...ttern search The trigger source chan nel is selected by default A ENABle CH1 B ENABle CH2 C ENABle CH3 D ENABle CH4 Digital channels are not available Parameters State ON OFF Parameters for setting an...

Page 1625: ...1 and CH2 CD CH3 and CH4 ABCD result of AB and CD Parameters Operator AND NAND OR NOR AND logical AND conjunctive combination NAND logical NOT AND OR logical OR disjunctive combination NOR logical NOT...

Page 1626: ...SearchName String with the name of the search Usage Asynchronous command SEARch TRIGger PATTern TIMeout TIME SearchName Time SEARch TRIGger PATTern TIMeout TIME SearchName Defines how long the result...

Page 1627: ...nges SHORter and LONGer the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width respectively To set the range mode use SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe To set the delta value use SEARch TRIGger PATTer...

Page 1628: ...me Source SEARch TRIGger STATe CSOurce SearchName Sets the source of the clock signal Parameters Source C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D1...

Page 1629: ...NABle Searchname Enables the channel to be considered in the state search You can enable all channel signals except for the trigger source A ENABle CH1 B ENABle CH2 C ENABle CH3 D ENABle CH4 Digital c...

Page 1630: ...rator SEARch TRIGger STATe ABCD LOGic Searchname Defines the logical combination of the indicated channels after evaluating the previous logical operations AB CH1 and CH2 CD CH3 and CH4 ABCD result of...

Page 1631: ...chronous command Firmware software Version 2 70 24 15 15 Search gate settings SEARch GATE STATe 1631 SEARch GATE MODE 1632 SEARch GATE SHOW 1632 SEARch GATE ABSolute STARt 1632 SEARch GATE ABSolute ST...

Page 1632: ...is indicated in the source diagram Parameters DisplayState ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName Search definition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch GATE ABSolute STARt SearchNam...

Page 1633: ...ommand SEARch GATE RELative STOP SearchName RelativeStop SEARch GATE RELative STOP SearchName Defines the end value for the gate Parameters RelativeStop Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 100 Default un...

Page 1634: ...m2 as gate area Zoom2 is based on Diagram1 Then the gate is activated and displayed Usage Asynchronous command 24 15 16 Search results SEARch RESDiagram HORZ ABSolute POSition 1634 SEARch RESDiagram H...

Page 1635: ...Search definition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch RESDiagram HORZ MODE SearchName Mode SEARch RESDiagram HORZ MODE SearchName Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x ax...

Page 1636: ...selected search result The zoom area is indicated in the diagram that displays the source waveform of the search Parameters ShwSearchWind ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName Sea...

Page 1637: ...rch definition Usage Asynchronous command SEARch RESDiagram VERT RELative POSition SearchName RelPosi SEARch RESDiagram VERT RELative POSition SearchName Defines the y value of the centerpoint of the...

Page 1638: ...ified width on page 1266 Usage Asynchronous command SEARch RESult SHOW SearchName ShowResultTable SEARch RESult SHOW SearchName Displays or hides the search result table Parameters ShowResultTable ON...

Page 1639: ...arch results separated by commas For each result six values are returned 1 Acquisition index currently always 0 2 X position of the search result 3 Y position of the search result currently not releva...

Page 1640: ...file 1659 Screenshots 1660 Reports 1664 Autonaming 1666 CSV export 1668 External application 1668 24 16 1 Instrument settings The Mass MEMory subsystem provides commands to access the storage media an...

Page 1641: ...of the instrument as configured in the operating sys tem Return values Drive List of strings for example C F H Usage Query only MMEMory MSIS msus Changes the default storage device to the indicated d...

Page 1642: ...Query parameters PathName String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be set and queried with MMEMory CDIRectory...

Page 1643: ...ained in the specified directory The result corresponds to the number of files returned by the MMEMory CATalog LENgth command Query parameters PathName String parameter to specify the directory If the...

Page 1644: ...AT LENG 11 Usage Query only MMEMory COPY FileSource FileDestination Copies an existing file to a new file Setting parameters FileSource String parameter contains name and path of the file to be cop ie...

Page 1645: ...directory of the file to be removed Wildcards and are allowed If no path is defined the current directory is used specified with MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM DEL CFG Deletes all cfg files from the...

Page 1646: ...values FileEntry String containing file_name file_attributes Example MMEM ATTR C USER DATA LOG R A Deletes the read only and archive attributes from all LOG files in the directoryC USER DATA LOG Examp...

Page 1647: ...specifying the complete path and filename of the source file Example SAV 4 MMEM STORe STATe 4 C Settings Settings_1051 dfl Saves current instrument settings to the internal memory num ber 4 Then stor...

Page 1648: ...onous command SAVeset ONEFile NAME Name Sets the path and the file name of the One File The file format is ZIP Parameters Name String parameter Usage Asynchronous command SAVeset ONEFile SAVE Usage Ev...

Page 1649: ...ogic channels Chapter 24 18 5 MSO data on page 2440 I Q data Chapter 24 21 2 I Q data output on page 2477 24 16 4 Waveform data export to file The resulting files of waveforms exports are described in...

Page 1650: ...ist1 TNTRack1 DNTRack1 DDNTrack1 PNTRack1 RNOTrack1 TNSPectrum1 DDNSpectrum1 PNSPectrum1 RNOSpectrum1 NBAThtub2 NBMeas2 TNHist2 DNHist2 DDNHist2 PNHist2 RNOHist2 TNTRack2 DNTRack2 DDNTrack2 PNTRack2 R...

Page 1651: ...m NAME FileName Sets the file name file format and path to save the waveform to See also Chapter 12 2 1 Waveform export files on page 453 Parameters FileName String with path and file name with extens...

Page 1652: ...gated measurement is defined for the source waveform MANual Saves the data between user defined start and stop values to be set with EXPort WAVeform STARt and EXPort WAVeform STOP RST WFM Example See...

Page 1653: ...us command EXPort WAVeform CURSorset Cursorset Sets the cursor set to be used for limited data export if EXPort WAVeform SCOPe is set to CURSor Parameters Cursorset CURSOR1 CURSor1 CURSOR2 CURSor2 CUR...

Page 1654: ...HISTory STOP Then play the history with CHANnel m WAVeform n HISTory PLAY The commands EXPort WAVeform SAVE CHANnel m WAVeform n DATA VALues and CHANnel m WAVeform n DATA HEADer are not available if d...

Page 1655: ...ALues Parameters IncHorValues ON OFF RST OFF Example See Exporting interleaved x y data of a single waveform to CSV file on page 1269 Exporting interleaved x y data of a zoom to CSV file on page 1269...

Page 1656: ...while the data export speeds up Setting parameters Enable ON OFF Example See Chapter 24 3 5 2 Exporting waveform data to file on page 1267 Usage Setting only Asynchronous command 24 16 5 Waveform hist...

Page 1657: ...d EXPort HISTogram SAVE Saves the histogram to the file specified with EXPort HISTogram NAME Example See Exporting histogram data to file on page 1264 Usage Event Asynchronous command EXPort HISTogram...

Page 1658: ...Parameters Path Usage Asynchronous command EXPort EYE SAVE Saves the selected eye to the file that is specified with EXPort EYE NAME Usage Event EXPort EYE SELect SelectableEye Selects the eye that y...

Page 1659: ...ort MEASurement TYPE ExportType You can export the result data of the long term measurement or the measurement his togram or the track data To export the measurement histogram it must be enabled using...

Page 1660: ...a are the same as the data writ ten to files To set the export data format use FORMat DATA Return values Data List of values according to the format settings Long term data If statistics are disabled...

Page 1661: ...tput medium file printer or clipboard Suffix 1 2 Selects the output configuration Parameters Medium MMEM SYST COMM CLIP String parameter MMEM Directs the display image to a file The MMEMory NAME com m...

Page 1662: ...rseColor Inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed on a white background Screenshots are inverted per default when you save using remote commands Turn inversion off if you want t...

Page 1663: ...screen colors with white background and black grid DEF4 Current screen colors without any changes black background RST DEF1 Usage Asynchronous command HCOPy SSD ShowSetupDialog Enables or disables the...

Page 1664: ...te OPC Example See Chapter 24 3 5 1 Saving a screenshot to file on page 1266 Usage Event Asynchronous command HCOPy IMMediate m NEXT Starts the output of the next display image depending on the HCOPy...

Page 1665: ...e paper size A4 or US Letter Parameters PaperSize A4 USL RST A4 Usage Asynchronous command REPort LOGType Logo By default the Rohde Schwarz logo is shown in the header of the report pages You can swit...

Page 1666: ...the file name and path to save the report to Parameters ReportFile String with path and file name The file extension defines the file format PDF HTML or DOC Usage Asynchronous command REPort FILE SAV...

Page 1667: ...eString Defines a text that can be included in the autonaming pattern Parameters NameString String parameter Usage Asynchronous command MMEMory AUTonaming DEFaultpath Path Sets the path where data and...

Page 1668: ...meters CsvDelimiter SEMICOLON COMMA SPACE TAB COLON RST COMMA Usage Asynchronous command 24 16 12 External application The commands configure an external application that can be started at various eve...

Page 1669: ...s option R S RTO6 K510 1737 Custom manchester NRZ option R S RTO6 K510 1752 CAN option R S RTO6 K520 1795 LIN option R S RTO6 K520 1837 Flexray option R S RTO6 K520 1865 SENT option R S RTO6 K520 1899...

Page 1670: ...fines the bus or protocol type for analysis The type of available buses depends on the installed options Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters Type I2C SPI UART CAN CANFd LIN MILS1553 MILStd1...

Page 1671: ...g the signal threshold levels and bitrate Suffix m 1 4 Usage Event Asynchronous command BUS m RESult ShowResultTable Opens a table with decoded data of the serial signal The function affects all proto...

Page 1672: ...SCii USIG unsigned RST HEX BUS m NEWList FileName Loads a label list file Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Setting parameters FileName String parameter with path and file name Example BUS1 NEWList...

Page 1673: ...ox in front of the diagrams DOCK Docked fixed tab below the diagrams RST DOCK Usage Asynchronous command BUS m EXPResult DETail XptResDetails Includes the detailed results for all frames for the expor...

Page 1674: ...sources only suffix 1 is allowed Parameters SourceDetailed CHAN1 CHANnel1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHANnel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 EXTernanalog SBUS D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 LOGIC MS...

Page 1675: ...3 Event in a trigger sequence 1 A event only Parameters SerialBus SBUS1 SBUS2 SBUS3 SBUS4 Usage Asynchronous command Firmware software Version 2 70 BUS m TYPE Type Defines the bus or protocol type for...

Page 1676: ...ology 1677 BUS m I2C RWBit 1678 BUS m I2C SCL SOURce SCLSource Sets the waveform of the clock line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters SCLSource C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8...

Page 1677: ...set the threshold according to the signal technology with BUS m I2C TECHnology Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters SCLThreshold User defined clock threshold Range 12 to 12 Increment 0 1 RS...

Page 1678: ...which address lengths are available with TRIGger m I2C AMODe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters BusConfig SEParate INADdress SEParate 7 bit address and separate R W bit INADdress 8 bit ad...

Page 1679: ...er type for I C analysis Parameters Type STARt REPStart STOP NACK ADDRess ADOR ADAT STARt Start condition REPStart Repeated start the start condition occurs without previous stop condition NACK Missin...

Page 1680: ...the addressed slave does not accept the data Parameters DataWriteNack ON OFF RST ON Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m I2C DRNack DataReadNack Triggers on the end of the read process when the maste...

Page 1681: ...GTHan GETHan INRange OORange RST EQUal TRIGger m I2C ADDRess Address Triggers on the specified slave address or sets the the start value of an address range depending on the condition set with TRIGger...

Page 1682: ...ADOR n VALue Address Defines the address pattern of the indicated ADOR address in the address OR trigger condition Suffix n 1 4 Index of the address in an address OR condition OR slot Parameters Addr...

Page 1683: ...aximum value of the range with TRIGger m I2C DPOSition and TRIGger m I2C DPTO RST ANY TRIGger m I2C DPOSition DataPosition Sets the number of data bytes before the first byte of interest These bytes a...

Page 1684: ...rn see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care Usage Asynchronous command 24 17 3 3 Decode results To load and acivate a label list us...

Page 1685: ...values N D1 D2 DN N is the number of bytes in the frame and D1 DN are the values of the bytes Example BUS I2C FRAMe4 DATA 3 74 164 18 Usage Query only BUS m I2C FCOunt Returns the number of decoded fr...

Page 1686: ...sage Query only BUS m I2C FRAMe n ACOMplete Returns if the address is completely contained in the acquisition Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values AddressComplete ON O...

Page 1687: ...rned with BUS m I2C FRAMe n ADEVice Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values AddressValue To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The values below range increment and...

Page 1688: ...4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values AddressStart Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m I2C FRAMe n BITRate Returns the primary bit rate Suffix m...

Page 1689: ...me is valid UNEXpstop A stop bit was detected but clock and data are continued INSufficient The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition The acquired part of the frame is valid ADDifferent...

Page 1690: ...4 to 100E 24 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m I2C FRAMe n SYMBol Returns the symbolic label of the specified frame if the label list is enabled Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects...

Page 1691: ...ly BUS m I2C FRAMe n BYTE o ACKStart Returns the start time of the acknowledge bit of the specified byte Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the byte number Return values...

Page 1692: ...e serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the byte number Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m I2C FRAMe n BYTE o VALue Returns the data value of t...

Page 1693: ...TRIGger I2C ACCess 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m ENABle 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m ADRType 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m VALue 1698 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m RWBit 1698 SEARch TRIGger I2C DPOPer...

Page 1694: ...Searches for missing address acknowledge bits Parameters NoAcknowledge ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger I2C SADDress SearchName Address SEARch TRIGger I2C SAD...

Page 1695: ...data conditions Parameters AddressData ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger I2C ACONdition SearchName AddressOperator SEARch TRIGger I2C ACONdition SearchName Set...

Page 1696: ...command SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDRess SearchName Address SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDRess SearchName Specifies an address pattern or sets the the start value of an address range Parameters Address Numeric or s...

Page 1697: ...icated ADOR address in the address OR search condition Suffix m 1 4 Index of the address in an address OR condition OR slot Parameters UseAddress ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query Search...

Page 1698: ...eters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m RWBit SearchName RWBit SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m RWBit SearchName Defines the R W bit of the indicated ADOR address in the address OR s...

Page 1699: ...es before that byte are ignored Parameters DataPosition The index 0 is associated with the first data byte Range 0 to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger...

Page 1700: ...2C DMAX SearchName DataTo SEARch TRIGger I2C DMAX SearchName Sets the the end value of an address range if SEARch TRIGger I2C DCONdition is set to INRange or OORange Parameters DataTo Numeric or strin...

Page 1701: ...e search definition name For a description of the returned values see the corresponding commands in Chap ter 24 17 3 3 Decode results on page 1684 SEARch RESult I2C FCOunt 1702 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe...

Page 1702: ...0 to 100000 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m STATus SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values State INComplete OK UNEXpstop INSufficient ADDifferent RST...

Page 1703: ...parameters SearchName Return values AddressAckBit INComplete ACK NACK EITHer RST INComplete Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m ACCess SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return va...

Page 1704: ...100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m ADDRess SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values AddressValue Range 0 to 2047 Increment...

Page 1705: ...e Return values AddressStart Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m DATA SearchName Returns the data bytes of the indicated frame Su...

Page 1706: ...ult I2C FRAMe m BCOunt Suffix m Return values Count Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m BYTE n ACCess SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values ByteAckBit INComplete ACK N...

Page 1707: ...COMPlete SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values ByteComplete ON OFF RST OFF Usage Query only SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m BYTE n STARt SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters Sear...

Page 1708: ...BUS m SPI SSELect SOURce 1709 BUS m SPI SSELect POLarity 1710 BUS m SPI MISO SOURce 1710 BUS m SPI MISO POLarity 1710 BUS m SPI MOSI SOURce 1711 BUS m SPI MOSI POLarity 1711 BUS m SPI SCLK THReshold...

Page 1709: ...D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time for data clock and slave select lines See Chapter 24 4 2 Waveform parameter on page 1284 RST C2W1 Us...

Page 1710: ...line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters MISOSource NONE C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Digital and analog ch...

Page 1711: ...n page 1284 RST C1W1 Usage Asynchronous command BUS m SPI MOSI POLarity MOSIPolarity Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Para...

Page 1712: ...out ClockTimeout Defines a timeout on the clock line SCLK as limiter between two frames The timeout condition is used for SPI connections without an SS line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Paramet...

Page 1713: ...iggers on a specified data pattern in that is expected on the MOSI line Define the pattern with TRIGger m SPI MOSipattern MISO Triggers on a specified data pattern in that is expected on the MISO line...

Page 1714: ...ANY TRIGger m SPI DPOSition DataPosition Sets the number of bits or words to be ignored before the first bit or word od interest The effect is defined by TRIGger m SPI PALignment Parameters DataPosit...

Page 1715: ...ern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care Usage Asynchronous command 24 17 4 3 SPI decode results BUS m SPI FRAMe n DATA 1715 BUS m SPI FCOunt 1716 BUS m SPI F...

Page 1716: ...I FRAMe3 DATA 2 10 108 35 70 MOSI MISO 2 10 35 MOSI only 2 108 70 MISO only Usage Query only BUS m SPI FCOunt BUS m SPI FRAMe n COUNt Returns the number of decoded frames Suffix m 1 4 Selects the seri...

Page 1717: ...word The last word does not have the expected word length INSufficient The frame is not completely contained in the acqui sition The acquired part of the frame is valid RST OK Usage Query only BUS m S...

Page 1718: ...l bus n Selects the frame Return values WordCount Range 0 to 4096 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o STARt Returns the start time of the specified data word Suffix m 1 4 Selects the seria...

Page 1719: ...ix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values MISOValue To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The values below range increment and reset are decimal...

Page 1720: ...m SPI FRAMe n WORD o FMOSi Returns the formatted value of the specified word on the MOSI line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values Formatted...

Page 1721: ...r the start of the frame when the clock idle time exceeds the timeout This type is available if the slave select line is configured in the bus setup and BUS m SPI FRCondition is CLKTimeout MOSI MISO S...

Page 1722: ...Name Operator for the data position You can define an exact position a position range or let the position undefined ANY Parameters DataPosOperator ANY OFF EQUal GETHan INRange RANGe ANY OFF INRange RA...

Page 1723: ...ny position in the message RST WORD Parameters for setting and query SearchName Usage Asynchronous command Firmware software FW 3 30 24 17 4 5 SPI search results The search on decoded SPI data returns...

Page 1724: ...eters SearchName Return values Count Range 0 to 100000 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult SPI FRAMe m COUNt Returns the number of frames that have matched the search criteria In the sear...

Page 1725: ...hName Return values FrameState OK VOID INCFirst INCLast INSufficient RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult SPI FRAMe m STOP SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameStop Rang...

Page 1726: ...ent 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult SPI FRAMe m WORD n MOSI SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values WordMOSIValue Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query onl...

Page 1727: ...1727 Trigger 1733 Decode results 1735 24 17 5 1 Configuration BUS m UART RX SOURce 1727 BUS m UART TX SOURce 1728 BUS m UART RX THReshold 1728 BUS m UART TX THReshold 1728 BUS m UART TECHnology 1729 B...

Page 1728: ...NONE C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time for RX and TX lines See C...

Page 1729: ...Tx and Rx lines as defined for various signal technologies Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters Technology V15 V25 V165 V125 V09 VM13 V38 V20 V0 MANual V15 V25 V165 V125 V09 V38 V20 V0 1 5 V...

Page 1730: ...ty on page 523 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters Parity NONE ODD EVEN MARK SPC DC MARK The parity bit is always a logic 1 SPC SPaCe The parity bit is always a logic 0 DC Don t Care the pa...

Page 1731: ...s DataBits Number of data bits 9 data bits are only possible with parity none Range 5 to 9 Increment 1 RST 8 Usage Asynchronous command BUS m UART PACKets Packets Defines the method of packet separati...

Page 1732: ...mware software FW 2 25 BUS m UART EWORd EndOfFrame Sets the end pattern of the packets A new packet starts with the first start bit after the defined end pattern The command is relevant if BUS m UART...

Page 1733: ...tor 1733 TRIGger m UART DPOSition 1734 TRIGger m UART DPTO 1734 TRIGger m UART FCONdition 1734 TRIGger m UART DATA 1734 TRIGger m UART TYPE Type Selects the trigger type for UART analysis See also Typ...

Page 1734: ...ord of interest if TRIGger m UART DPOPerator defines a posi tion range Parameters DataPositionTo Range 0 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Asynchronous command TRIGger m UART FCONdition DataOperator Se...

Page 1735: ...ecified word on the Rx line or Tx line respectively Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the word Return values Value To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The stated values for range i...

Page 1736: ...d was transferred Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the word Return values WordSource TX RX RST TX Usage Query only BUS m UART WORD n STARt Returns the start time of the specified word Suf...

Page 1737: ...gnals option R S RTO6 K510 Configuration 1737 Trigger 1743 Decode results 1747 Track and trend 1750 24 17 6 1 Configuration BUS m I2S AVARiant 1737 BUS m I2S CLOCk SOURce 1738 BUS m I2S CLOCk POLarity...

Page 1738: ...M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Digital channels require installation of R S RTO6 B1 Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time For trig...

Page 1739: ...channels For an FSYNC line TDM the polarity defines the edge of the FSYNC pulse that iden tifies the beginning of a frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters WSPolarity NORMal INVert NORMal...

Page 1740: ...lds to the value of the clock threshold BUS m I2S CLOCk THReshold Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters Coupling ON OFF RST ON BUS m I2S CLOCk THReshold SCLKThreshold Sets the threshold value...

Page 1741: ...ent 1E 3 RST 1 6 Default unit V BUS m I2S CHANnel ORDer ChannelOrder Defines if the left or the right channel is the first channel in the frame The setting is not available for TDM audio signals Suffi...

Page 1742: ...cts the serial bus Parameters ChannelOffset Range 0 to 32 left justified TDM maximum delay is Channel length Word length Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit bit BUS m I2S CHANnel TDMCount ChannelsTDM Sets...

Page 1743: ...the A trigger is available for triggering on serial buses To trigger on a serial bus make sure that TRIGger m SOURce SELect is set to SBUS The sources of the serial bus are channel signals use BUS m S...

Page 1744: ...ype Additionally you set the time limit with TRIGger m I2S SOWords CONDition The frame condition trigger sets the trigger on an AND combina tion of data conditions on different channels The instrument...

Page 1745: ...Ch4 TDMC5 TDMCh5 TDMC6 TDMCh6 TDMC7 TDMCh7 TDMC8 TDMCh8 Query returns short form Note Available audio channels depend on the configuration of the audio bus The command BUS m I2S CHANnel TDMCount speci...

Page 1746: ...g is aligned to the rightmost LSB bit of the word TRIGger m I2S TCONdition n DMAX DataMaxPattern Sets the the end value of an data range if the operator TRIGger m I2S TCONdition n CONDtion is set to I...

Page 1747: ...24 17 6 3 Decode results BUS m I2S FCOunt 1747 BUS m I2S FRAMe n STATe 1747 BUS m I2S FRAMe n STARt 1748 BUS m I2S FRAMe n STOP 1748 BUS m I2S FRAMe n LEFT VALue 1748 BUS m I2S FRAMe n RIGHt VALue 174...

Page 1748: ...BUS m I2S FRAMe n STOP Return the start time and stop time of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values Start Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Usage...

Page 1749: ...l is not completely contained in the acquisition Usage Query only BUS m I2S FRAMe n TDM o STATe Returns the state of the indicated channel of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n S...

Page 1750: ...S m I2S TRACk TD4Ch 1750 BUS m I2S TRACk TD5Ch 1751 BUS m I2S TRACk TD6Ch 1751 BUS m I2S TRACk TD7Ch 1751 BUS m I2S TRACk TD8Ch 1751 MEASurement m TRACk STATe 1751 MEASurement m TRACk DATA HEADer 1751...

Page 1751: ...track functionality and displays the track The track functionality requires at least one option see Enable Track on page 361 Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page...

Page 1752: ...n all BUS m CMSB FRAMe n commands the suffix n selects a frame number and the suffix o selects a cell number BUS m CMSB CODing 1753 BUS m CMSB MANChester DATA 1754 BUS m CMSB MANChester POLarity 1754...

Page 1753: ...764 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o BITCount 1764 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o CONDition 1765 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o FORMat 1765 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o BITorder 1766 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o CRGB 1766 B...

Page 1754: ...he polarity of the custom serial bus data signal in Manchester coding stand ards Suffix m 1 4 Parameters PolarityData NORMal INVert NORMal Manchester or Manchester II polarity remains unchanged INVert...

Page 1755: ...eshold to 7 0 V and the lower threshold to 7 0 V MANual Allows to set individual threshold voltage levels RST V5 BUS m CMSB MANChester THReshold COUPling ThresholdCoupling Couples the upper and lower...

Page 1756: ...g the sampling edge RST SEDGe BUS m CMSB NRZ CLCK SourceNRZClock Selects the source channel for the clock signal in the NRZ Clocked coding standard For triggering on the serial bus when the NRZ clocke...

Page 1757: ...data signal only available for the cod ing standard NRZ Unclocked Suffix m 1 4 Parameters PolarityIdle IDLLow IDLHigh IDLLow Sets the base value of the data bus to be 0 After an idle period the data...

Page 1758: ...ta are captured on the clock s falling edge high to low transition and propagated on a rising edge If Clock Polarity IDLHigh data are captured on the clock s rising edge low to high transition and pro...

Page 1759: ...a signal in NRZ coding standards Suffix m 1 4 Parameters PolarityData ACTLow ACTHigh ACTLow Active low the value 1 is represented by a voltage below the threshold ACTHigh Active high the value 1 is re...

Page 1760: ...ST 2 Default unit V BUS m CMSB NRZ HYSTeresis DATA HystData Sets the hysteresis size on the data line channel Suffix m 1 4 Parameters HystData Range 25 to 25 Increment 0 1 RST 0 1 Default unit V BUS m...

Page 1761: ...case of NRZ Unclocked data threshold only V5 Sets the clock and data threshold to 5 0 V in case of NRZ Unclocked data threshold only V7 Sets the clock and data threshold to 7 0 V in case of NRZ Unclo...

Page 1762: ...e VALue Bitrate Sets the transmission speed setting for the custom serial bus data signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Bitrate Range 300 to 2E9 Increment 100E3 RST 10E6 Default unit bps BUS m CMSB GAPTime...

Page 1763: ...COunt Returns the number of frames Suffix m 1 4 Return values Count Usage Query only BUS m CMSB CLR Erases all cells and frames that have been created for a specific custom protocol Suffix m 1 4 Usage...

Page 1764: ...rame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Count Usage Query only BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o NAME CellName Enables the user to set a cell name within a frame Names do not have to be unique they are just for use...

Page 1765: ...ns and functionalities are the equal and array operators The numeric format of the condition needs to be set according to BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o FORMat on page 1765 Suffix m 1 4 n o Parameters Cond...

Page 1766: ...evaluation starts at the MSB RST MSBF BUS m CMSB FRAMe n CELL o CRGB Color Selects a cell s color representation in the honeycomb display Suffix m 1 4 n o Parameters Color ARGB value of the color to...

Page 1767: ...isplayed in column 1 of the decode table COL2 The result is displayed in column 2 of the decode table COL3 The result is displayed in column 3 of the decode table RST NONE BUS m CMSB LOAD FileName Ope...

Page 1768: ...FIENable 1770 TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced FRAMe n FLD o BIT 1771 TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced BIT 1771 TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced FRAMe n FLD o DMAX 1771 TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced DMAX 1771 TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced...

Page 1769: ...ecified starting after the minimum gap time BUS m CMSB GAPTime VALue on page 1762 and after the detected start of the data frame Suffix m 1 3 Parameters DataPattern TRIGger m CMSB ICONdition DataIdxOp...

Page 1770: ...ADVanced FRAMe n ENABle Enable TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced FRENable Frame Enabler Enables or disables the specific frame to be triggered on Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted S...

Page 1771: ...SB ADVanced BIT Frame Field Bit Sets the bit state of a field to be triggered on that only consists of one bit Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Setting parameters Frame F...

Page 1772: ...the data pattern Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted Setting parameters Frame Field Operator OFF ANY EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange ANY OFF The data...

Page 1773: ...d Setting parameters Frame Field Data Usage Setting only TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced FRAMe n FLD o IMIN IndexMin TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced IMIN Frame Field Data Specifies the index or sets the start value o...

Page 1774: ...his condition requires a range of endpoint values to be set using TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced IMAX and TRIGger m CMSB ADVanced IMIN Usage Setting only 24 17 7 3 Filter BUS m CMSB FILTer ENABle Enable Enab...

Page 1775: ...e Enabler Enables or disables the specific frame to be filtered Suffix m 1 4 Setting parameters Frame Enabler ON OFF Usage Setting only BUS m CMSB FILTer FIENable Frame Field Enabler Enables or disabl...

Page 1776: ...o DOPerator is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m 1 4 n o Parameters DataMax BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o DMIN DataMin Specifies the data pattern or sets the start value of a data pattern range Suf...

Page 1777: ...d value of an index range if BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o IOPerator is set to INRange or RANGe Suffix m 1 4 n o Parameters IndexMax Range 1 to 65534 Increment 1 RST 65534 BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n...

Page 1778: ...COunt 5 BUS1 CMSB RESult1 STATe OK BUS1 CMSB RESult1 STARt 0 0024964177 BUS1 CMSB RESult1 STOP 0 0024030384 BUS1 CMSB RESult1 TYPE ff BUS1 CMSB RESult1 CONE 0b11111111 BUS1 CMSB RESult1 CTWO 0xAA BUS1...

Page 1779: ...782 BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o STARt 1782 BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o STOP 1783 BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o STATe 1783 BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o VALue 1784 BUS m CMSB RCOunt Returns the count number of...

Page 1780: ...or INComplete The frame ended prematurely because it extends past the end of the record CRC Checksum error in cyclic redundancy check error in data PARity Parity bit error indicating a transmission er...

Page 1781: ...CMSB RESult n CONE Returns the 1st cell content as specified in the Result column of the Frame Format specification table Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Custom1 Usage Query only BUS m CMSB RESult n CTWO...

Page 1782: ...Suffix m 1 4 n Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o NAME Returns the name of the specified cell Cell names are not necessarily uni...

Page 1783: ...E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o STATe Returns the state of the cell Suffix m 1 4 n o Return values State OK LENGth UNKNown INComplete CRC PARity...

Page 1784: ...SB ERRor m ENABle 1785 SEARch TRIGger CMSB FIENable 1785 SEARch TRIGger CMSB FRENable 1785 SEARch TRIGger CMSB BIT 1785 SEARch TRIGger CMSB FRAMe m FLD n BIT 1785 SEARch TRIGger CMSB DMAX 1786 SEARch...

Page 1785: ...SearchName Frame Field Enabler Enables or disables the specific field within the defined frame to be searched for Setting parameters SearchName Frame Field Enabler ON OFF Usage Setting only SEARch TR...

Page 1786: ...IGger CMSB FRAMe m FLD n DOPerator is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m n Parameters DataMax Specifies the name of the generic trigger setting frame Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch...

Page 1787: ...require one endpoint value to be set using SEARch TRIGger CMSB FRAMe m FLD n DMIN INRange OORange In range out of range These conditions require a range of end point values to be set using SEARch TRIG...

Page 1788: ...FLD n IMIN SearchName IndexMin SEARch TRIGger CMSB FRAMe m FLD n IMIN SearchName SEARch TRIGger CMSB IMIN SearchName Frame Field Data Sets the bit index data position Setting parameters SearchName Fra...

Page 1789: ...o VALue 1792 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n CONE 1792 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n CTHRee 1792 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n CTWO 1793 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n STARt 1793 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n...

Page 1790: ...the name of the specified cell within the search result Cell names are not nec essarily unique Suffix m n o Query parameters SearchName Return values Name Usage Query only SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n...

Page 1791: ...upon the user s frame description was not found before the cell was ter minated This might occur because a new frame synchronized or a gap appeared between the bits UNKNown Unknown error INComplete Th...

Page 1792: ...t of the specified cell within the search result Suffix m n o Query parameters SearchName Return values Value Usage Query only SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n CONE SearchName Returns the 1st field conten...

Page 1793: ...STARt SearchName Returns the start time of the frame within the search result Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s...

Page 1794: ...a new frame synchronized or a gap appeared between the bits UNKNown Unknown error INComplete The frame ended prematurely because it extends past the end of the record CRC Checksum error in cyclic redu...

Page 1795: ...hold 1796 BUS m CAN TECHnology 1797 BUS m CAN BITRate 1797 BUS m CAN FDATa ENABle 1798 BUS m CAN FDATa DBITrate 1798 BUS m CAN FDATa SAMPlepoint 1798 BUS m CAN SAMPlepoint 1798 BUS m CAN FDATa T1Segme...

Page 1796: ...n used by CAN Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters SignalType CANH CANL RST CANL BUS m CAN FDATa PSTandard ProtStd Only available for CAN FD buses Selects whether the tested signal is an ISO...

Page 1797: ...e serial bus Parameters Technology V25 V3 V2 V0 MANual V25 2 5 Volt CMOS 5 0 V V3 3 0 Volt CAN_H HS CAN_L LS V2 2 0 Volt CAN_L HS CAN_H LS V0 Ground MANual Manual setting of user defined values with B...

Page 1798: ...uniform and fixed for a given CAN FD bus The setting is available in CAN FD option Suffix m 1 4 Parameters FlexDatBitrate Range 100 to 15E 6 Increment 1 RST 1E 6 Default unit bps BUS m CAN FDATa SAMP...

Page 1799: ...N FD signals BUS m CAN T1Segment defines the synchronization of the arbitration phase and BUS m CAN FDATa T1Segment defines the synchronization of the data phase Suffix m 1 4 Parameters FlexDatTimeSeg...

Page 1800: ...anta Range 1 to 4 available maximum depends on the num ber of segments and the sample point Increment 1 RST 1 24 17 8 2 Trigger The trigger suffix m is always 1 and can be omitted It selects the trigg...

Page 1801: ...ization bit FTYP Frame TYPe triggers on a specified frame type data remote error or overload and on the identifier format To set the frame type use TRIGger m CAN FTYPe Set the identifier format with T...

Page 1802: ...able values depend on the CAN standard and on the TRIGger m CAN TYPE setting Remote frames are not available in the CAN FD protocol If the trigger type is set to FTYP frame type you can set the values...

Page 1803: ...IN and TRIGger m CAN IMAX on page 1803 RST EQUal TRIGger m CAN IMIN IdPattern Specifies a message identifier pattern or sets the the start value of an identifier range Parameters IdPattern Numeric or...

Page 1804: ...range Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal t...

Page 1805: ...he instrument reads the complete data reverses the byte order of the data and compares it with the specified data word RST BENDian TRIGger m CAN DLCCondition DLCOperator Operator to set the data lengt...

Page 1806: ...on The position can be defined if the data field of the frame is longer than 8 bytes if TRIGger m CAN DLC 9 Parameters DataPosOperator ANY OFF EQUal GETHan INRange RANGe ANY OFF The data position is n...

Page 1807: ...ror Triggers if astuff error occurs when the 6th consecutive equal bit level in the men tioned fields is detected The trigger type has to be set before TRIGger m CAN TYPE to ERRC Parameters BitStuffEr...

Page 1808: ...FRAMe n STATus 1809 BUS m CAN FRAMe n NDBYtes 1810 BUS m CAN FRAMe n STARt 1810 BUS m CAN FRAMe n STOP 1810 BUS m CAN FRAMe n SYMBol 1811 BUS m CAN FRAMe n TYPE 1811 BUS m CAN FRAMe n DATA 1811 BUS m...

Page 1809: ...fix is irrelevant Return values Standard CAN CANFd RST CAN Usage Query only BUS m CAN FRAMe n STATus Returns the overall state of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the f...

Page 1810: ...ORM error CAN FD ISO only SCER Stuff count error and CRC error CAN FD ISO only SAER Stuff count error and ACK error CAN FD ISO only SCAE Stuff count error and CRC error and ACK error CAN FD ISO only S...

Page 1811: ...r of the frame in the current acquisition 1 n Return values Label String with symbolic label of the identifier Example BUS CAN FRAMe SYMBol Response Temperature Usage Query only BUS m CAN FRAMe n TYPE...

Page 1812: ...AMe n ACKState BUS m CAN FRAMe n CSSTate BUS m CAN FRAMe n DLCState BUS m CAN FRAMe n IDSTate Return the states of following parts of a message ACKState state of acknowledgement field CSSTate state of...

Page 1813: ...Return values PrimaryBitRate Range 0 to 100000000000 Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit bps Usage Query only BUS m CAN FRAMe n CSValue Returns the CRC sequence value of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Sel...

Page 1814: ...f data and remote frames Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values IdentifierType ANY B11 B29 B11 standard format 11 bit B29 extended format 29 bit RST B11 Usage Query only...

Page 1815: ...ation on a form error if the frame status query returned a FORM error See also BUS m CAN FRAMe n STATus on page 1809 Suffix m 1 4 n Return values FormErrorCause NONE CRCDerror ACKDerror FSBE RESerror...

Page 1816: ...0 Usage Query only BUS m CAN FRAMe n BYTE o STATe Returns the state of the specified byte Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the byte number Return values State OK ERRo...

Page 1817: ...h TRIGger CAN IMIN 1820 SEARch TRIGger CAN DCONdition 1820 SEARch TRIGger CAN DMIN 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DMAX 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DLCCondition 1821 SEARch TRIGger CAN DLC 1822 SEARch RESult CAN...

Page 1818: ...N SFIDentifier SearchName Enables the search for frame indentifier Parameters Identifier ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CAN SIDData SearchName IdentifierData...

Page 1819: ...e Selects the CAN frame type to be searched for For data and remote frames the identifier format has to be set with SEARch TRIGger CAN ITYPe on page 1819 Parameters FrameType ANY DATA REMote ERRor OVE...

Page 1820: ...or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CAN IMIN SearchName IdPattern SEARch TRIGger CAN IMIN SearchName Spe...

Page 1821: ...ing parameter accepts the bit value X don t care Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CAN DMAX SearchName DataPatternTo SEARch TRIGger CAN DMAX SearchName Sets the the end value...

Page 1822: ...D for DLCs 8 See also Data setup DLC NDB Transfer Condition Data min Data max on page 591 Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values NDBytes Range 1 to 64 Increment 1 RST 1 Usage Query only SE...

Page 1823: ...ery SearchName String with the search name SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa DPTO SearchName DataPositionTo SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa DPTO SearchName Defines the last possible start position of the data pattern...

Page 1824: ...SearchName SEARch TRIGger CAN FORMerror SearchName FormError SEARch TRIGger CAN FORMerror SearchName Searches for form errors A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more ille...

Page 1825: ...er CAN FDATa BRS SearchName Sets the bit rate switching bit for identifier and identifier data searches The setting is available in CAN FD option Parameters BRSBit ONE ZERO DC DC Don t care RST ONE Pa...

Page 1826: ...RESult CAN FRAMe m DLCState 1828 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m IDSTate 1828 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m CSValue 1828 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m DATA 1828 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m DLCValue 1828 SEARch RESul...

Page 1827: ...s SearchName Return values BitStuffErrorPos Range 0 to 5000 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m BYTE n STATe SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values St...

Page 1828: ...parameters SearchName Return values IdentifierState OK ERRor UNDF RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m CSValue SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values ChecksumValue...

Page 1829: ...on page 1830 Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FormErrorCause NONE CRCDerror ACKDerror FSBE RESerror See BUS m CAN FRAMe n FERCause on page 1815 RST NONE Usage Query only SEARch RESu...

Page 1830: ...uery only SEARch RESult CAN FDATa FRAMe m STANdard SearchName Returns the CAN protocol standard CAN or CAN FD Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Standard CAN CANFd RST CAN Usage Query...

Page 1831: ...ameters SearchName Return values FrameStop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m SYMBol SearchName Returns the symbolic label of th...

Page 1832: ...ymbolic trigger and symbolic search Thus you always trigger on and search for the same message if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time See also SEARch TRIGger CAN SYMBolic MSG...

Page 1833: ...inimum data value of the signal To set the condition use TRIGger m CAN DCONdition Parameters DataPattern Decimal representation of the data pattern Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1 RST 0 TRIGger m...

Page 1834: ...Rch TRIGger CAN SYMBolic DMAX 1836 SEARch TRIGger CAN SYMBolic SGEValue 1836 SEARch RESult CAN FRAMe m SDATa SearchName Returns the symbolic data of the selected result frame Suffix m Sets the index o...

Page 1835: ...CAN SYMBolic SSIGnals SearchName SymbolicSearch SEARch TRIGger CAN SYMBolic SSIGnals SearchName Enables the search for symbolic values if DBC label list file is loaded and applied Symbolic search dis...

Page 1836: ...s required to specify a range if condition INRange OORange is set with SEARch TRIGger CAN DCONdition on page 1820 Parameters DataPatternTo Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1 RST 1 Parameters for set...

Page 1837: ...URce DataSource Sets the waveform of the data line Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters DataSource C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D...

Page 1838: ...supply 9 0 V 18 V supply respectively MANual Manual setting of user defined values with BUS m LIN DATA THReshold RST V35 BUS m LIN BITRate Bitrate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Suffi...

Page 1839: ...nel signals use BUS m SOURce commands Decoding is enabled BUS m STATe is set to ON TRIGger m LIN TYPE 1839 TRIGger m LIN ICONdition 1840 TRIGger m LIN IMIN 1841 TRIGger m LIN IMAX 1841 TRIGger m LIN D...

Page 1840: ...IGger m LIN IMIN and TRIGger m LIN IMAX To set the data condition use TRIGger m LIN DCONdition TRIGger m LIN DMIN and TRIGger m LIN DMAX WKFR Wakeup frame ERRC Error condition Define the error types w...

Page 1841: ...ange Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal th...

Page 1842: ...the data length of the frame that means on the first bytes that are transmitted For Little Endian transfer direction the exact number of data bytes in the frame must be set Example The data word to be...

Page 1843: ...ttern of the indicated IDOR identifier in the identifier OR trigger condi tion Suffix n 1 4 Index of the identifier in an identifier OR condition Parameters IdPattern Numeric or string pattern see Cha...

Page 1844: ...m error with TRIGger m LIN CHKSerror on page 1844 Parameters ErrorPattern Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 Possible values depend on TRIGger m LIN CRCDat...

Page 1845: ...S m NEWList on page 1672 BUS m SYMBols on page 1672 BUS m LIN FCOunt 1845 BUS m LIN FRAMe n STATus 1846 BUS m LIN FRAMe n STARt 1846 BUS m LIN FRAMe n STOP 1846 BUS m LIN FRAMe n SDATa 1847 BUS m LIN...

Page 1846: ...error VERS the version of the LIN standard is not valid LENer unexpected length SPERror stop error PRERror parity error in identifier SYERror synchronization error WAKeup the frame is a wakeup frame C...

Page 1847: ...e symbolic data of the frame in export format Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values SymbolicData Usage Query only BUS m LIN FRAMe n SYMBol Returns the symbolic label of...

Page 1848: ...of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values Data Comma separated list of integer values N D1 D2 DN N is the number of bytes in the frame and D1 DN are...

Page 1849: ...e Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values IdentifierValue To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The values below range increment and reset are decimal values Range...

Page 1850: ...contained in the acqui sition The decoded part of the frame is valid RST OK Usage Query only BUS m LIN FRAMe n CSSTate Returns the checksum state of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial...

Page 1851: ...N FRAMe n BITRate Returns the primary bit rate Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values PrimaryBitRate Range 0 to 100000000000 Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit bps Usage Que...

Page 1852: ...9 4 LIN search settings In search setup commands you have to specify the SearchName parameter It is a string parameter that contains the search definition name The commands are similar to LIN trigger...

Page 1853: ...OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger LIN SFIDentifier SearchName Identifier SEARch TRIGger LIN SFIDentifier SearchName Enables the search for one specific identifier or an id...

Page 1854: ...ames Parameters WakeUpFrame ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger LIN ICONdition SearchName IdOperator SEARch TRIGger LIN ICONdition SearchName Sets the operator to...

Page 1855: ...tifier range if SEARch TRIGger LIN ICONdition is set to INRange or OORange Parameters IdPatternTo Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 Parameters for setting...

Page 1856: ...er Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with SEARch TRIGger LIN DMIN INRange OORange In range Out of range Set the minimum and maximum value of the range with...

Page 1857: ...SEARch TRIGger LIN DLECondition SearchName Operator to set the data length for search on LIN data For Big Endian transfer direction you can trigger on a number of bytes less than the data length of th...

Page 1858: ...arches for errors in the identifier parity bits These are the bits 6 and 7 of the identi fier Parameters IdParityError ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger LIN SYER...

Page 1859: ...Length SEARch TRIGger LIN CRCDatalen SearchName Sets the number of data bytes search for CRC errors Parameters CRCDataLength Range 0 to 8 Increment 1 RST 0 Parameters for setting and query SearchName...

Page 1860: ...ESult LIN FRAMe m IDSTate 1863 SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m IDValue 1863 SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m IDPValue 1863 SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m SYMBol 1864 SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m SYSTate 1864 SEARch RESult...

Page 1861: ...m Query parameters SearchName Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m DATA SearchName Suffix m Query parameters S...

Page 1862: ...frame checksum Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values ChecksumState OK STERror SPERror PRERror UVAL NOEXists INSufficient STERror StarT ERror incorrect start bit SPERror StoP ERror incorre...

Page 1863: ...correct stop bit PRERror PaRity ERror incorrect parity bit UVAL unexpected value NOEXists byte does not exist RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m IDValue SearchName Returns the value of...

Page 1864: ...lt LIN FRAMe m SYSTate SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values SyncState OK STERror SPERror PRERror UVAL NOEXists INSufficient RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult LIN FRAMe m V...

Page 1865: ...10 Flexray option R S RTO6 K520 Configuration 1865 Trigger 1870 Decode results 1878 Search settings 1884 Search results 1893 24 17 10 1 Configuration BUS m FLXRay SRCType 1865 BUS m FLXRay SOURce n 1...

Page 1866: ...ion controller and the bus driver It is possible to measure simultaneously on a data line and on the enable line Each line requires its own threshold RST SINGle BUS m FLXRay SOURce n Sources Sets the...

Page 1867: ...ltage level depending on the source type See BUS m FLXRay SRCType on page 1865 BUS m FLXRay THENable ThresholdEnable Sets the threshold for the enable line if the source type is LOGic Suffix m 1 4 Sel...

Page 1868: ...uffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters PresetDiff MV150 MV200 MV250 MV300 MANual MV150 MV200 MV250 MV300 150 mV 200 mV 250 mV 300 mV respectively MANual Manual setting of user defined values wi...

Page 1869: ...ers Bitrate M10 M5 M2_5 10 5 or 2 5 Mbit s The return value of 2 5 Mbit s is M25 RST M10 Example BUS FLXRay BITRate M2_5 BUS FLXRay BITRate M25 BUS m FLXRay CHTYpe Channel Selects the channel on which...

Page 1870: ...ble 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay NUFRame 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay SYFRame 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay STFRame 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay FCONdition 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay FMIN 1873 TRIGger m FLXRay FMAX 1873 TRIGger m FLXR...

Page 1871: ...PCONdition TRIGger m FLXRay PMIN and TRIGger m FLXRay PMAX Cycle count trigger on the number of the current FlexRay cycle To set the cycle count use TRIGger m FLXRay CENable TRIGger m FLXRay CMIN TRIG...

Page 1872: ...FLXRay SYFRame SyncFrame Triggers on the sync frame used for synchronization of the FlexRay system Only sync nodes can send this frame type Parameters SyncFrame ONE ZERO DC Bit value 1 0 or X don t ca...

Page 1873: ...ge if the condition TRIGger m FLXRay FCONdition is set to INRange or OORange Parameters IdPatternTo Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 FMAX must be greater...

Page 1874: ...ngthTo Range 0 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 TRIGger m FLXRay CENable CycleCount Sets the operator to define a cycle count or a cycle count range Parameters CycleCount OFF EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan G...

Page 1875: ...age 1874 must be set to INRange or OORange Parameters CycleCountStep Range 1 to 63 Increment 1 RST 1 TRIGger m FLXRay DPOPerator DataPosOperator Sets the operator for the data position You can defined...

Page 1876: ...dition EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data posi tion to be set with TRIGger m FLXRa...

Page 1877: ...the end of a communication cycle They are used to avoid collisions during the system start WAKeup The wakeup pattern is sent to activate the nodes of the system RST CASMts TRIGger m FLXRay BSSerror B...

Page 1878: ...m SYMBols on page 1672 To show the results on the screen use the following commands BUS m RESult on page 1671 BUS m FLXRay FCOunt 1878 BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n STATus 1879 BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n STARt 1879...

Page 1879: ...valid FSS Frame Start Sequence after TSS is missing BSS Byte Start Sequence is missing FES error in the Frame End Sequence INDicator Error in indicator bits HCRCerror Header CRC is not valid CRCerr P...

Page 1880: ...rn values Label String with symbolic name of the identifier Example BUS FLXRay FRAMe2 SYMBol Response Temperature Usage Query only BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n TYPE Returns the frame type of the selected fram...

Page 1881: ...e of the indicator bits at the beginning of the header segment The five bits are read as one word Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values Flags Range 0 to 31 RST 0 Usage...

Page 1882: ...ST 0 Usage Query only BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n CYCount Returns the number of the current FlexRay cycle Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values CycleCount Range 0 to 63 RST 0...

Page 1883: ...to 2047 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n FCSTate Returns the state of the cyclic redundancy check code of the frame data Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return valu...

Page 1884: ...RIGger FLXRay DPOPerator 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPOSition 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPTO 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FCONdition 1889 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FMAX 1889 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FMIN 1889...

Page 1885: ...search for a start of frame Parameters FrameStart ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger FLXRay SSYMbol SearchName CheckSymbol SEARch TRIGger FLXRay SSYMbol SearchNa...

Page 1886: ...range if the condition SEARch TRIGger FLXRay CENable is set to INRange or OORange Parameters CycleCountMax Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger F...

Page 1887: ...e one data pattern to be set with SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DMIN INRange OORange In range Out of range Set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DMIN and SEARch TRIGger FLX...

Page 1888: ...ETHan Equal Greater or equal than These conditions require one data position to be set with SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPOSition INRange RANGe In range Set the minimum and maximum value of the range with S...

Page 1889: ...frame ID to be set with SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FMIN INRange OORange In range Out of range Set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FMIN and SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FMAX R...

Page 1890: ...for the payload preamble indicator bit that indicates a Network Management Vector in the payload segment Parameters PayloadPreamble ONE ZERO DC Bit value 1 0 or X don t care RST DC Parameters for sett...

Page 1891: ...archName SEARch TRIGger FLXRay PMIN SearchName PayloadLength SEARch TRIGger FLXRay PMIN SearchName Specifies a payload length the number of words in the payload segment or sets the the start value of...

Page 1892: ...n Avoidance Symbol Media access Test Symbol These symbols are identical and can be sent in the optional symbol window at the end of a communication cycle They are used to avoid collisions during the s...

Page 1893: ...LXRay HCRCerror SearchName CRCHeaderError SEARch TRIGger FLXRay HCRCerror SearchName Searches for an error in the Cyclic Redundancy Check of the header data mainly frame ID and payload length Paramete...

Page 1894: ...EARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m FCSTate 1896 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m FCValue 1896 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m FLAGs 1896 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m PAYLength 1897 SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m STAT...

Page 1895: ...arity bit UVAL unexpected value RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m CSValue SearchName Returns the value of the header checksum Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Head...

Page 1896: ...Rror PRERror UVAL INSufficient STERror StarT ERror incorrect start bit SPERror StoP ERror incorrect stop bit PRERror PaRity ERror incorrect parity bit UVAL unexpected value RST OK Usage Query only SEA...

Page 1897: ...Query parameters SearchName Return values State OK FSS BSS FES INDicator HCRCerror CRCerr LENER LENer HCFCerror INSufficient OK the frame is valid FSS Frame Start Sequence after TSS is missing BSS Byt...

Page 1898: ...m Query parameters SearchName Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult FLXRay FRAMe m TYPE SearchName Suffix m Query parameters...

Page 1899: ...899 BUS m SENT TECHnology 1900 BUS m SENT CLKPeriod 1900 BUS m SENT CLKTolerance 1900 BUS m SENT DNIBbles 1901 BUS m SENT SFORmat 1901 BUS m SENT CRCVersion 1901 BUS m SENT CRCMethod 1901 BUS m SENT P...

Page 1900: ...Technology V25 MANual V25 The threshold value is 2 5 V according to CMOS technology MANual Sets the threshold to the value set with BUS m SENT DATA THReshold RST V25 BUS m SENT CLKPeriod ClockPeriod S...

Page 1901: ...m SENT SFORmat Format Selects the serial message format Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Format SHORt ENHanced NONE Short serial message Enhanced serial message none single transmission sequence RST NONE BUS m...

Page 1902: ...s PausePulse NPP PP PPFL NPP Transmits the SENT message without pause pulse PP Transmits the message with a fixed pulse length automatically calculated PPFL Transmits the pause pulse with a user defin...

Page 1903: ...SENT SICN 1906 TRIGger m SENT SIMN 1906 TRIGger m SENT SIMX 1906 TRIGger m SENT SDCN 1907 TRIGger m SENT SDMN 1907 TRIGger m SENT SDMX 1907 TRIGger m SENT FORMerror 1907 TRIGger m SENT PULSeerror 190...

Page 1904: ...ror types with TRIGger m SENT PULSeerror TRIGger m SENT PPERioderror or TRIGger m SENT CRCerror RST CALI TRIGger m SENT TTYPe TSFieldType Selects the trigger sequence type for TRIGger m SENT TYPE TSEQ...

Page 1905: ...Pattern Specifies a data pattern or sets the start value of a data pattern range Parameters TSDataPattern Numeric or string pattern Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parame ter on page 1286 The string parame...

Page 1906: ...THan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be...

Page 1907: ...e the range set the minimum and maximum values with TRIGger m SENT SDMN and TRIGger m SENT SDMX RST EQUal TRIGger m SENT SDMN SMDataPattern Specifies a data pattern or sets the start value of a data p...

Page 1908: ...E ERRC Parameters CalibPulseError ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger m SENT PPERioderror PulsePeriodErr Triggers on pulse period errors An error occurs when a nibble has any of the following number of ticks at lo...

Page 1909: ...7 11 3 Decode results To load and acivate a label list use BUS m NEWList on page 1672 BUS m SYMBols on page 1672 BUS m SENT FCOunt 1909 BUS m SENT FRAMe n STATus 1910 BUS m SENT FRAMe n STARt 1910 BUS...

Page 1910: ...lues FrameState OK SYNC PULSe CRC IRFL FORM INSufficient OK the frame is valid SYNC Synchronization error occurred PULse Pulse error occurred CRC Cyclic redundancy check failed IRFL Irregular frame le...

Page 1911: ...format use FORMat BPATtern The values below range increment and reset are decimal values Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m SENT FRAMe n DATA Returns the data of the specified fra...

Page 1912: ...turns the identifier value of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values IdentifierValue To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The values below rang...

Page 1913: ...number Return values Value To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern The values below range increment and reset are decimal values Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m SENT FRAMe...

Page 1914: ...s the frame Return values SymbolicData Comma separated list of values The first value is the number of bytes followed by the decoded data bytes To set the value format use FORMat BPATtern Usage Query...

Page 1915: ...only BUS m SENT FRAMe n SYNCduration Returns the time of the synchronization pulse Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values SyncDuration Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment...

Page 1916: ...setup commands you have to specify the SearchName parameter It is a string parameter that contains the search definition name The commands are similar to SENT trigger commands SEARch TRIGger SENT CALi...

Page 1917: ...hich is combination of status and data conditions To set the transmission sequence conditions use SEARch TRIGger SENT TTYPe and SEARch TRIGger SENT STATus To set the data condition use SEARch TRIGger...

Page 1918: ...Condition ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger SENT TTYPe SearchName TSFieldType SEARch TRIGger SENT TTYPe SearchName Selects the SENT transmission sequence to be...

Page 1919: ...Han INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with SEAR...

Page 1920: ...one of the serial message types use BUS m SENT SFORmat and enable with SEARch TRIGger SENT SMSG Parameters SMFieldType ID IDDT ID Searches for the identifier To set the identifier condition for the se...

Page 1921: ...Rch TRIGger SENT SIMX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger SENT SIMN SearchName SMIDPattern SEARch TRIGger SENT SIMN SearchName Specifies a message identifier pattern o...

Page 1922: ...d SEARch TRIGger SENT SDMX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger SENT SDMN SearchName SMDataPattern SEARch TRIGger SENT SDMN SearchName Specifies a data pattern or sets...

Page 1923: ...enable the search for an error event set SEARch TRIGger SENT ERRor to ON Parameters PulsePeriodErr ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger SENT IRFLength SearchName I...

Page 1924: ...commands you have to specify the SearchName parameter It is a string parameter that contains the search definition name For a description of the returned values see the corresponding commands in Chap...

Page 1925: ...urns the checksum value Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values ChecksumValue Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m DATA SearchName Returns the data of...

Page 1926: ...the identifier value of the selected frame Suffix m Selects the serial bus Query parameters SearchName Return values IdentifierValue Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult SEN...

Page 1927: ...PulseTicks Range 12 to 768 Increment 1 RST 12 Usage Query only SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m SCOM SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values StatusComm Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0...

Page 1928: ...y SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m STATus SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameState OK SYNC PULSe CRC IRFL FORM INSufficient RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m...

Page 1929: ...Query only SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m TYPE SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameType TRSQ SMSG EMSG RST TRSQ Usage Query only 24 17 12 CXPI option R S RTO6 K520 Configur...

Page 1930: ...4 Parameters BitrateEnable ON OFF RST OFF BUS m CXPI BITRate VALue Bitrate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second To set this value you have to enable the bitrate first with BUS m CXPI BITRat...

Page 1931: ...m 1 4 Parameters DisplayOrder TRANsmitted LOGical RST TRANsmitted BUS m CXPI HYSTeresis ThresHyst Sets a value for the hysteresis Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresHyst Range 12 to 12 Increment 0 01 RST 1...

Page 1932: ...us analog or digital channel sources are required Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SourceData C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 For t...

Page 1933: ...ces of the serial bus are channel signals use BUS m SOURce commands Decoding is enabled BUS m STATe is set to ON TRIGger m CXPI CT 1934 TRIGger m CXPI DATA DCONdition 1934 TRIGger m CXPI DATA DMAX 193...

Page 1934: ...Parameters DataOperator OFF ANY EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange OFF ANY Any data pattern is considered EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or...

Page 1935: ...an Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one pattern to be set with the corresponding TRIGger m CXPI DATA IMIN command INRange RANGe...

Page 1936: ...an Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding TRIGger m CXPI DEXTension MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maxi...

Page 1937: ...inimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m CXPI DLC MIN and TRIGger m CXPI DLC MAX RST EQUal TRIGger m CXPI DLC MAX DLCMax Sets the end value of a data type range if TRIGger m CXPI DLC CONDi...

Page 1938: ...yte field value Suffix m 1 3 Parameters ErrorDLC ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m CXPI ERRor IBS ErrorIBS Triggers on an inter byte space IBS error if TRIGger m CXPI TYPE is set to ERRor Suffix m 1 3 Parameter...

Page 1939: ...rrorUart ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m CXPI FID CONDition FrameIDOperator Set the condition for the frame ID You can define an exact value or a value range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters FrameIDOperator EQUal NEQu...

Page 1940: ...s the value of the network management NM field Suffix m 1 3 Parameters NM TRIGger m CXPI TYPE Type Selects the trigger type for the CXPI analysis Suffix m 1 3 Parameters Type STARt NORMal NPOLl SLEEP...

Page 1941: ...gger on selected error types Define the error types with TRIGger m CXPI ERRor CRC TRIGger m CXPI ERRor DLC TRIGger m CXPI ERRor IBS TRIGger m CXPI ERRor IFS TRIGger m CXPI ERRor LENGth TRIGger m CXPI...

Page 1942: ...ame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Data Usage Query only BUS m CXPI RESult FRAMe n DLCV Returns the data length code extension data length code field value Suffix m 1 4 n Return values DLC Range 0 to 42...

Page 1943: ...R_DLC ERR_UART RST OK Usage Query only BUS m CXPI RESult FRAMe n STOP Returns the stop time of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 De...

Page 1944: ...he specified field Suffix m 1 4 n o Return values Status OK INComplete ERR_IBS ERR_IFS ERR_LENGTH ERR_CRC ERR_PARITY ERR_DLC ERR_UART RST OK Usage Query only BUS m CXPI RESult FRAMe n WORD o TYPE Retu...

Page 1945: ...n CONDition 1948 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXTension MAX 1948 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXTension MIN 1948 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC CONDition 1949 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC MAX 1949 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC MIN 194...

Page 1946: ...ith the corresponding SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA DMIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA DMIN and SEARch TRIGger C...

Page 1947: ...INRange RANGe In range Set the minimum and maximum value using SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA IMIN and SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA IMAX RST INRange Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CX...

Page 1948: ...nsion MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXTension MIN and SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXTension MAX RST EQUal Paramete...

Page 1949: ...and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC MIN and SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CXPI DLC MAX SearchName DLCMax SEAR...

Page 1950: ...IBS SEARch TRIGger CXPI ERRor IBS SearchName Searches for an inter byte space error if SEARch TRIGger CXPI TYPE is set to ERRor Parameters ErrorIBS ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query Searc...

Page 1951: ...o ERRor Parameters ErrorUart ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CXPI FID CONDition SearchName FrameIDOperator SEARch TRIGger CXPI FID CONDition SearchName Set the...

Page 1952: ...or sets the start value of a pattern range Parameters FrameIDMin Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger CXPI NM SearchName NM SEARch TRIGger CXPI NM SearchName Sets the value of t...

Page 1953: ...d Optionally you can define the frame ID pattern ERRor Trigger on selected error types Define the error types with SEARch TRIGger CXPI ERRor CRC on page 1949 SEARch TRIGger CXPI ERRor CRC on page 1949...

Page 1954: ...FRAMe m WORD n STATus 1956 SEARch RESult CXPI FRAMe m WORD n TYPE 1956 SEARch RESult CXPI FRAMe m WORD n VALue 1956 SEARch RESult CXPI FCOunt SearchName Query parameters SearchName Return values Frame...

Page 1955: ...y SEARch RESult CXPI FRAMe m STATe SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values State OK INComplete ERR_IBS ERR_IFS ERR_LENGTH ERR_CRC ERR_PARITY ERR_DLC ERR_UART RST OK Usage Query o...

Page 1956: ...AMe m WORD n STATus SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values Status OK INComplete ERR_IBS ERR_IFS ERR_LENGTH ERR_CRC ERR_PARITY ERR_DLC ERR_UART RST OK Usage Query only SEARch R...

Page 1957: ...S m MILStd MAXResponse SELect 1958 BUS m MILStd MINGap SELect 1958 BUS m MILStd MINGap BITS 1958 BUS m MILStd POLarity 1959 BUS m MILStd PRESet 1959 BUS m MILStd THReshold HIGH 1959 BUS m MILStd THRes...

Page 1958: ...ILStd MAXResponse BITS on page 1957 Suffix m 1 4 Parameters MaxRespSelect ON OFF RST ON BUS m MILStd MINGap SELect MinGapSelect Enables the detection of the minimum idle time between the last bit of a...

Page 1959: ...the default threshold voltage Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Preset V05 V2 V5 V7 MANual RST V5 BUS m MILStd THReshold HIGH ThresholdHigh Sets the lower threshold level of the signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters T...

Page 1960: ...962 TRIGger m MILStd CMD CMAX 1963 TRIGger m MILStd CMD CMIN 1963 TRIGger m MILStd CMD SCONdition 1963 TRIGger m MILStd CMD SMAX 1963 TRIGger m MILStd CMD SMIN 1964 TRIGger m MILStd CMD TR 1964 TRIGge...

Page 1961: ...D word triggers on a command word or on a status word that can be specified STATword STATus word triggers on a status word that can be specified ERR ERRor triggers on any combination of protocol error...

Page 1962: ...care TRIGger m MILStd DATA RMAX RTAPatternMax TRIGger m MILStd CMD RMAX RTAPatternMax TRIGger m MILStd CDST RMAX RTAPatternMax Set the end value of a data range if TRIGger m MILStd CDST RCONdition is...

Page 1963: ...ern range Parameters WordCntPattMin Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care TRIGger m MILStd CMD SCONdit...

Page 1964: ...TRFlag Triggers on a transmission mode Parameters TRFlag ONE ZERO DC ONE Transmit direction ZERO Receive direction DC Either directions RST DC TRIGger m MILStd CDST ICONdition InfoOperator Sets the o...

Page 1965: ...a specific data pattern Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than...

Page 1966: ...ual than These conditions require one pattern to be set with TRIGger m MILStd DATA IMIN INRange RANGe In range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m MILStd DATA IMIN and TRIGge...

Page 1967: ...ST ON TRIGger m MILStd MAXResponse BITS MaxResponseTime Sets the value for the maximum response time to be triggered on if TRIGger m MILStd TYPE is set to ERRor Enable the error trigger on maximum res...

Page 1968: ...LStd MINGap BITS Parameters MinGapSelect ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m MILStd STATus BCReceived BroadcastCmd Triggers on the state of the broadcast command received bit of the status word if TRIGger m MILSt...

Page 1969: ...Quest ServiceRequest Triggers on the state of the the service request bit of the status word if TRIGger m MILStd TYPE is set to STATword Parameters ServiceRequest ONE ZERO DC RST DC TRIGger m MILStd S...

Page 1970: ...d WORD n STARt 1971 BUS m MILStd WORD n STATus 1972 BUS m MILStd WORD n STOP 1972 BUS m MILStd WORD n SYMBol 1972 BUS m MILStd WORD n TYPE 1973 BUS m MILStd WCOunt Returns the number of decoded words...

Page 1971: ...ment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m MILStd WORD n RTADdress Returns the RT address for the selected word Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the word Return values FrameRta Range 0 to 31 Inc...

Page 1972: ...anchester coding error occured PAR parity error occured GAP timing gap error occured RT remote terminal error occured INComplete the sequence is not completely contained in the acquisition UNKNown unk...

Page 1973: ...commands are very similar to the trigger commands Therefore search coommands are described in short for more details see the corresponding trig ger command in Chapter 24 17 13 2 Trigger on page 1960...

Page 1974: ...us BUSY 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus DBCaccept 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus INSTrument 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus MERRor 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus SREQuest 1979 SEARch TRIGger...

Page 1975: ...CMD RMIN SearchName RTAPatternMin SEARch TRIGger MILStd CMD RMIN SearchName SEARch TRIGger MILStd CDST RMIN SearchName RTAPatternMin SEARch TRIGger MILStd CDST RMIN SearchName Specify a remote termin...

Page 1976: ...t of a command or status word CMD CCON specific data word count or mode code pattern in a command word CMD SCON specific subaddress mode pattern in a command word DATA DCON data pattern in a data word...

Page 1977: ...9th to 19th bit of a command or status word CMD CMAX specific data word count or mode code pattern in a command word CMD SMAX specific subaddress mode pattern in a command word DATA DMAX data pattern...

Page 1978: ...or a transmission mode Parameters TRFlag ONE ZERO DC RST DC Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MILStd ERRor MANChester SearchName ManCodingError SEARch TRIGger MILStd ERRor MAN...

Page 1979: ...e MessageError SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus MERRor SearchName SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus SREQuest SearchName ServiceRequest SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus SREQuest SearchName SEARch TRIGger MILStd STA...

Page 1980: ...ARch RESult MILStd WORD m TYPE 1980 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m STATus 1980 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m STARt 1981 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m STOP 1981 SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m SYMBol 1981 SEARch...

Page 1981: ...rameters SearchName Return values FrameStart Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m STOP SearchName Suffix m Query parameters Sear...

Page 1982: ...nly SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m DATA SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Data Usage Query only SEARch RESult MILStd WORD m INFO SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchNam...

Page 1983: ...5 BUS m ARINc SOURce SourceData Sets the channel for the signal source Reference and math waveforms are only available if the trigger source is one of the input channels but not the serial bus Suffix...

Page 1984: ...e value for the maximum gap between two words See also BUS m ARINc MAXGap SELect Suffix m 1 4 Parameters MaxGapBits Range 0 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 100 Default unit bit BUS m ARINc MINGap SELect MinGa...

Page 1985: ...Parameters Polarity ALEG BLEG RST ALEG BUS m ARINc PRESet Preset Sets the default threshold voltage Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Preset V25 V5 MANual RST V5 BUS m ARINc THReshold HIGH ThresholdHigh Sets t...

Page 1986: ...on 1986 TRIGger m ARINc DATA MIN 1987 TRIGger m ARINc DATA MAX 1987 TRIGger m ARINc ERRor CODing 1987 TRIGger m ARINc ERRor PARity 1987 TRIGger m ARINc LABel CONDition 1988 TRIGger m ARINc LABel MIN 1...

Page 1987: ...Nc DATA MIN DataMin Defines the minimum bit pattern for the data Parameters DataMin Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit...

Page 1988: ...nd TRIGger m ARINc LABel MAX RST EQUal TRIGger m ARINc LABel MIN LabelMin Defines the minimum bit pattern for the label Parameters LabelMin Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern par...

Page 1989: ...XGap BITS MaxGapBits Sets the value for the maximum gap to be triggered on Parameters MaxGapBits Range 0 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 100 Default unit bit TRIGger m ARINc SDI SDI Sets the source destinatio...

Page 1990: ...decoded words Suffix m 1 4 Return values FrameCount Range 0 to 100000 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m ARINc WORD n DATA Returns the data of the specified word Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Fra...

Page 1991: ...by FORMat BPATtern Example BUS2 ARINc WORD3 PATTern H75 H11 H55 H82 FORMat BPATtern DEC BUS2 ARINc WORD3 PATTern 117 17 85 130 Usage Query only BUS m ARINc WORD n SDI Returns the source destination id...

Page 1992: ...e specified word Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the word Return values FrameState OK CODE GAP PAR INComplete UNKNown CODE coding error occured GAP timing gap error occured PAR parity er...

Page 1993: ...Dition 1994 SEARch TRIGger ARINc LABel MIN 1994 SEARch TRIGger ARINc DATA MIN 1994 SEARch TRIGger ARINc LABel MAX 1994 SEARch TRIGger ARINc DATA MAX 1994 SEARch TRIGger ARINc SDI 1995 SEARch TRIGger A...

Page 1994: ...range withTRIGger m ARINc LABel MIN and TRIGger m ARINc LABel MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger ARINc LABel MIN SearchName LabelMin SEARch TRIGger ARINc LABel M...

Page 1995: ...SearchName Sets the sign status matrix SSM bits Parameters SSM Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger ARINc ERRor CODing SearchName CodingError SEARch TRIGger ARINc ERRor CODing S...

Page 1996: ...contains the search definition name For a description of the returned values see the corresponding commands in Chap ter 24 17 14 3 Decode results on page 1989 SEARch RESult ARINc WORD m LABel 1996 SE...

Page 1997: ...ffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Data Range 0 to 0 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult ARINc WORD m SSM SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values SSM R...

Page 1998: ...h RESult ARINc WORD m STOP SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameStop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult ARINc...

Page 1999: ...rch settings 2010 Search results 2014 24 17 15 1 Configuration BUS m SWIRe BPOSition 1999 BUS m SWIRe DATA HYSTeresis 2000 BUS m SWIRe DATA SOURce 2000 BUS m SWIRe DATA THReshold 2000 BUS m SWIRe MGAP...

Page 2000: ...source of the data signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SourceData C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 RST C1W1 BUS m SWIRe DATA TH...

Page 2001: ...Parameters HystStrobe Range 0 to 0 8 Increment 0 01 RST 0 2 Default unit V BUS m SWIRe STRBe SOURce SourceStrobe Selects the source of the strobe signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SourceStrobe C1W1 C2W1...

Page 2002: ...BUS m SWIRe PRESet ThresholdPreset Prests the threshold and hysteresis value of the strobe and data signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresholdPreset V25 V165 V125 V09 V12 V0 MANual V25 2 5 V CMOS 5 0 V...

Page 2003: ...or a value range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater...

Page 2004: ...or PARity ErrorParity Enables triggering on a parity error even parity Suffix m 1 3 Parameters ErrorParity ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m SWIRe TIME CONDition TimeOperator Set the condition for the data valu...

Page 2005: ...ies a pattern for the data value for the time code or sets the the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters TimePatternMin TRIGger m SWIRe TYPE Type Sets the trigger type for the SpaceWi...

Page 2006: ...1 4 Setting parameters Key Return values Count BUS m SWIRe RESults FRAMe n DATA Returns the data value Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values Data 8 bit data value Exam...

Page 2007: ...plete OK The frame is valid PARity Parity error ESC Escape error AMB Ambiguous INComplete The frame is incomplete RST OK Usage Query only BUS m SWIRe RESults FRAMe n STOP Returns the end time of the s...

Page 2008: ...l TCOD Time code RST DATA Usage Query only BUS m SWIRe RESults FRAMe n FLD o FVAL Returns the formatted value of the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected frame numbe...

Page 2009: ...the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected frame number Suffix m 1 4 n Selects the frame number o Selects the field number Return values State OK PAR ESC AMB INComplet...

Page 2010: ...er o Selects the field number Return values FrameByteValue Usage Query only BUS m SWIRe RESults FRAMe n FLD o VAL Returns the value of the field with the selected field number within the frame with th...

Page 2011: ...ng and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger SWIRe DATA CONDition SearchName DataOperator SEARch TRIGger SWIRe DATA CONDition SearchName Set the condition for the data pattern data value You can define an e...

Page 2012: ...TRIGger SWIRe DATA MIN SearchName DataPatternMin SEARch TRIGger SWIRe DATA MIN SearchName Specifies a data bit pattern or sets the the start value of a pattern range Parameters DataPatternMin Paramet...

Page 2013: ...mand INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger SWIRe TIME MIN and SEARch TRIGger SWIRe TIME MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and quer...

Page 2014: ...lt SWIRe FCOunt 2014 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m DATA 2014 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m STARt 2015 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m STATe 2015 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m STOP 2015 SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe...

Page 2015: ...ult unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult SWIRe FRAMe m STATe SearchName Returns the overall state of the selected frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Sta...

Page 2016: ...frame for the selected frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Type DATA FCT EOP EEP ESC NULL TCOD DATA Data frame FCT Flow control token EOP End of packet E...

Page 2017: ...ariant 100BASE TX 100 Mbit s RST B10T BUS m ETHernet SOURce SourceData Selects the source channel for the data signal Usually the source is one of the analog channels Reference and math waveforms are...

Page 2018: ...pper Range 0 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 5 Default unit V BUS m ETHernet THReshold LOW ThresholdLower Sets the lower threshold value for the signal digitization If the signal value is below this thresh...

Page 2019: ...Parameters BitRateValue Range 10000 to 150000000 Increment 1000 RST 10000000 Default unit bps 24 17 16 2 Trigger The trigger suffix m is always 1 and can be omitted It selects the trigger event Only t...

Page 2020: ...e search for the preamble and set the trigger instant thereafter PATTern Selects to trigger for a bit pattern data to be specified in TRIGger m ETHernet PATTern on page 2020 ADVFrame Sets the trigger...

Page 2021: ...uffix m 1 3 Parameters ErrorPreamble ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe CCONdition CRCOperator Sets the operator to trigger on a specific frame check sequence value Suffix m 1 3 Parameters CRCOper...

Page 2022: ...ger on a specific pattern or a range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters DestAddrOptor EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less...

Page 2023: ...Han GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less than or equal Greater Than Greater than or equal These conditions require a destination address to be set with TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe SMIN INRange OORange I...

Page 2024: ...nge with TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TMIN and TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TMAX RST EQUal TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TMAX TypePatternMax Sets the end value of a length type range if TRIGger m ETHernet FRAMe TC...

Page 2025: ...S m ETHernet WORD n DESTaddress 2027 BUS m ETHernet WORD n SRCaddress 2027 BUS m ETHernet WORD n TYPE 2027 BUS m ETHernet WORD n DATA 2028 BUS m ETHernet WORD n CRC 2028 BUS m ETHernet WORD n DSYMbol...

Page 2026: ...in the preamble of the selected word ERR_SFD Error in the start frame delimiter SFD The value of a correct SFD byte is 171 The SFD is transmitted LSB first ERR_LENGTH Error in the number of bits in t...

Page 2027: ...d Suffix m 1 4 n Return values DestAddress String parameter Usage Query only BUS m ETHernet WORD n SRCaddress Returns the source address of the specified word Suffix m 1 4 n Return values SrcAddress S...

Page 2028: ...mat Use BUS m ETHernet WORD n BYTE o VALue to access the word bytes Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Data String parameter Example BUS ETHernet WORD3 DATA 60 FF00FFFF1234 Usage Query only BUS m ETHernet W...

Page 2029: ...cTranslation String parameter Usage Query only BUS m ETHernet WORD n BITRate Returns the primary bit rate Suffix m 1 4 n Return values PrimaryBitRate Range 0 to 100000000000 Increment 1 RST 0 Default...

Page 2030: ...et FRAMe DMAX 2031 SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SCONdition 2032 SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMIN 2032 SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMAX 2032 SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe TCONdition 2033 SEARch TR...

Page 2031: ...Parameters for setting and query SearchName String parameter SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe DMIN SearchName DestAddrPatt SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe DMIN SearchName Defines a destination address or s...

Page 2032: ...ST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName String parameter SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMIN SearchName SrcAddrPatt SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe SMIN SearchName Defines a source address o...

Page 2033: ...ting and query SearchName String parameter SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe TMIN SearchName TypePatternMin SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe TMIN SearchName Defines a frame length type or sets the start valu...

Page 2034: ...RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName String parameter SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe CMIN SearchName CRCPatternMin SEARch TRIGger ETHernet FRAMe CMIN SearchName Defines a CRC error con...

Page 2035: ...16 5 Search results To show the results on the screen use the following commands BUS m RESult on page 1671 In all SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m commands the suffix m selects the word number in the li...

Page 2036: ...PREAMBLE ERR_LENGTH OK No error detected ERR_PREAMBLE Error in the preamble of the selected word ERR_SFD Error in the start frame delimiter SFD The value of a correct SFD byte is 171 The SFD is transm...

Page 2037: ...rs SearchName String parameter Return values DestAddress String parameter Usage Query only SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m SRCaddress SearchName Returns the source address of the specified word within t...

Page 2038: ...e Return values FrameType MAC IDLE SLEep EOS UNKNown RST MAC Usage Query only SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m DATA SearchName Returns the data bytes of the specified word within the search result Suffix...

Page 2039: ...n String parameter Usage Query only SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m SSYMbol SearchName Returns the symbolic label or translation of the source address of the specified word within the search result if t...

Page 2040: ...2041 BUS m MDIO DATA THReshold HIGH 2041 BUS m MDIO DATA THReshold LOW 2042 BUS m MDIO PRESet 2042 BUS m MDIO COUPling 2042 BUS m MDIO CLOCk SOURce SourceClock Selects the source for the clock line ma...

Page 2041: ...me for data and clock lines For triggering on a serial bus analog or digital input channels are required See Chapter 24 4 2 Waveform parameter on page 1284 RST C1W1 BUS m MDIO CLOCk THReshold HIGH Thr...

Page 2042: ...eset Selects the default threshold settings according to the Ethernet standard 2 0 V and 0 8 V Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Preset DEFault MANual RST DEFault BUS m MDIO COUPling ThresCpl Overwrites the dat...

Page 2043: ...is after the last data bit Trigger pattern preamble 32 bits 1 32 bits X DATA Sets the trigger to the data field For more information on the data condition see MDIO in the Ethernet standard The trigge...

Page 2044: ...P10 Read frame in Clause 22 or Post Read increment address frame in Clause 45 OP11 Read frame in Clause 45 OPXX Any frame type RST OPXX Note that the user interface shows interpretations of the numeri...

Page 2045: ...WORD n REGI 2046 BUS m MDIO WORD n ST 2046 BUS m MDIO WORD n STARt 2047 BUS m MDIO WORD n STATe 2047 BUS m MDIO WORD n STOP 2048 BUS m MDIO WORD n SYMBol 2048 BUS m MDIO WORD n TYPE 2048 BUS m MDIO WC...

Page 2046: ...content REGAD DEVAD in the pres ent acquisition of the selected word and the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Return values RegAd Range 0 to 32 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m MDIO WORD n...

Page 2047: ...of the frame in the present acquisition of the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Return values State OK UNSYN UNSYncronized OPCO TA_ERROR INComplete SHORT SHORt OK No error detected UNSYN UNSYncroni...

Page 2048: ...resent acquisition of the selected word and the selected serial bus The translation is defined in the label list Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Translation Usage Query only BUS m MDIO WORD n TYPE Return...

Page 2049: ...MDIO FRAMetype SearchName FrameType SEARch TRIGger MDIO FRAMetype SearchName Allows to select the Type of Frame code or OP code OpCode operation code avail able only in search criteria type Data Note...

Page 2050: ...REGI SearchName RegAddr SEARch TRIGger MDIO REGI SearchName Allows to set the register address in Clause 22 or device address in Clause 45 of the frame pattern 5 bits available only in search criteria...

Page 2051: ...m commands the suffix m selects the packet number in the list of search results SEARch RESult MDIO WORD m DATA 2051 SEARch RESult MDIO WORD m PHYS 2052 SEARch RESult MDIO WORD m REGI 2052 SEARch RESul...

Page 2052: ...nly SEARch RESult MDIO WORD m REGI SearchName Returns the 5 bit register or device address field content REGAD DEVAD from the selected word within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchNam...

Page 2053: ...urns the state of the frame from the selected word within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values State OK UNSYN UNSYncronized OPCO TA_ERROR INComplete SHORT SHORt OK No e...

Page 2054: ...ss label from the selected word within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Translation Usage Query only SEARch RESult MDIO WORD m TYPE SearchName Returns the frame typ...

Page 2055: ...g examples see Configuring RFFE bus on page 1273 BUS m RFFE CLOCk SOURce 2055 BUS m RFFE DATA SOURce 2056 BUS m RFFE PRESet 2056 BUS m RFFE COUPling 2056 BUS m RFFE DATA THReshold HIGH 2056 BUS m RFFE...

Page 2056: ...ceData C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 RST C1W1 BUS m RFFE PRESet ThresholdPreset Sets default threshold voltages for 1 2...

Page 2057: ...values for each line Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresDatNeg Range 0 to 2 5 Increment 0 1 RST 0 48 Default unit V BUS m RFFE DATA THReshold HYSTeresis ThresDatHyst Set the hysteresises between VTP and VTN...

Page 2058: ...rs ThresClkNeg Range 0 to 2 5 Increment 0 1 RST 0 48 Default unit V BUS m RFFE CLOCk THReshold HYSTeresis ThresClkHyst Set the hysteresis between VTP and VTN for the clock signal Note that the high an...

Page 2059: ...ed gap Set the minimum gap time using BUS m RFFE MINGap TIME Suffix m 1 4 Parameters MinGapSelect ON OFF RST OFF BUS m RFFE MINGap TIME MinGapTime Sets the minimum idle time between the Bus Park Cycle...

Page 2060: ...examples see Triggering on RFFE bus on page 1274 TRIGger m RFFE TYPE 2061 TRIGger m RFFE ADDRess CONDition 2063 TRIGger m RFFE ADDRess MIN 2063 TRIGger m RFFE ADDRess MAX 2064 TRIGger m RFFE BCOunt C...

Page 2061: ...RZWR Triggers on Register 0 Write command sequences Optionally you can specify a slave address condition and a data pattern condition RWR Triggers on Register Write command sequences Optionally you c...

Page 2062: ...can specify a MID condition a register address condition and a data pattern condition MASR Triggers on Master Read command sequences Optionally you can specify a MID condition a register address condi...

Page 2063: ...AX TRIGger m RFFE ADDRess CONDition AddressOperator Sets the operator to trigger on a specific address pattern or a range Parameters AddressOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORa...

Page 2064: ...r than Greater or equal than These conditions require one pattern to be set with TRIGger m RFFE BCOunt MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range Set the minimum and maximum value using the cor...

Page 2065: ...IN DataPatternMin Specifies a pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Parameters DataPatternMin Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string pa...

Page 2066: ...DataIndexMax Sets the end value of a range if the index condition is set to INRange or OORange See TRIGger m RFFE DATA ICONdition Parameters DataIndexMax Range 1 to 32 Increment 1 RST 32 TRIGger m RFF...

Page 2067: ...rator to trigger on a mask pattern or a range Parameters MaskOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or eq...

Page 2068: ...FF RST ON TRIGger m RFFE ERRor LENGth LengthError Enables the trigger on a length error when an incorrect length of the command sequence has been found Parameters LengthError ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m R...

Page 2069: ...RFFE ERRor VERSion VersionError Enables the trigger on RFFE version error Parameters VersionError ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m RFFE INTerrupt Interrupt Sets the interrupt pattern for the interupt summary...

Page 2070: ...BYTE o STATe 2075 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n BYTE o VALue 2075 BUS m RFFE FCOunt Returns the number of command sequences in the current acquisition Suffix m 1 4 Return values FrameCount Range 0 to 100000...

Page 2071: ...Suffix m 1 4 n Return values FrameType UNDESC RZWR RWR RRD ERWR ERRD ERWL ERRL MASR MASW MASOHO IRSUM MSKW MCTR MCTW UNDEF ERRor RZWR Register 0 Write RWR Register Write RRD Register Read ERWR Extend...

Page 2072: ...Query only BUS m RFFE SEQuence n ADDRess Returns the register address of the selected command sequence Suffix m 1 4 n Return values FrameAddress Range Depends on the sequence type address can have 0 5...

Page 2073: ...A H08 H49 H54 H33 HFF Usage Query only BUS m RFFE SEQuence n SYMBol Returns the symbolic label that belongs to the address of the selected command sequence Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Translation Str...

Page 2074: ...command sequence Suffix m 1 4 n Return values ParityCtrl OK PARity PARity PArrity error RST OK Usage Query only BUS m RFFE SEQuence n RBTRate Returns the read bit rate of the selected command sequenc...

Page 2075: ...n o Selects the number of the data byte 1 n Return values FrameByteName Usage Query only BUS m RFFE SEQuence n BYTE o STATe Returns the state of the specified data byte Suffix m 1 4 n o Selects the n...

Page 2076: ...IGger RFFE SADD MIN 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE ADDRess MIN 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE BCOunt MIN 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE DATA IMIN 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE DATA DMIN 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MAX 208...

Page 2077: ...ster Read command sequence Optional search conditions are the same as for ERWR ERWL Extended Register Write Long command sequence Optional search conditions are the same as for ERWR ERRL Extended Regi...

Page 2078: ...and sequences use the following commands Slave address SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD CONDition SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MIN SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MAX Register address SEARch TRIGger RFFE ADDRess CONDiti...

Page 2079: ...he minimum and maximum value using the corresponding SEARch TRIGger RFFE MIN and SEARch TRIGger RFFE MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName String parameter Example See Searching RF...

Page 2080: ...g RFFE data on page 1274 SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MAX SearchName SIDMax SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MAX SearchName SEARch TRIGger RFFE ADDRess MAX SearchName AddressMax SEARch TRIGger RFFE ADDRess MAX Se...

Page 2081: ...of the command sequence has been found Parameters LengthError ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName String parameter SEARch TRIGger RFFE ERRor PARity SearchName ParityError SEARch...

Page 2082: ...equence Suffix n selects index of byte inside a command sequence In search result commands you have to specify the SearchName parameter It is a string parameter that contains the search definition nam...

Page 2083: ...uence Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameType UNDESC RZWR RWR RRD ERWR ERRD ERWL ERRL MASR MASW MASOHO IRSUM MSKW MCTR MCTW UNDEF ERRor See SEARch TRIGger RFFE TYPE RST RZWR Usage...

Page 2084: ...earchName Return values FrameSID Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult RFFE SEQuence m STOP SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameStop Range 100E...

Page 2085: ...56 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult RFFE SEQuence m DATA SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Data Usage Query only SEARch RESult RFFE SEQuence m SYMBol Search...

Page 2086: ...ly 24 17 19 Ethernet 100BASE T1 option R S RTO6 K560 Configuration 2086 Trigger 2090 Decode results 2097 Search settings 2103 Search results 2111 24 17 19 1 Configuration In all BUS m HBTO commands th...

Page 2087: ...provided forward single ended signal if BUS m HBTO FTYP is set to SINGle Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SourceDAminus C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 RST C2W1 BUS m HBTO FDAP SourceD...

Page 2088: ...f BUS m HBTO RTYP is set to SINGle Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SrcRevDAminus C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 BUS m HBTO RDAP SourceRevDAplus Selects the DA source of the provided r...

Page 2089: ...ined threshold value Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresholdUpper Range 0 to 2 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 4 Default unit V BUS m HBTO POLarity Polarity Selects the polarity of the data signal Suffix m 1 4 Paramet...

Page 2090: ...1 TRIGger m HBTO DADDress MIN 2091 TRIGger m HBTO DADDress MAX 2092 TRIGger m HBTO SADDress CONDition 2092 TRIGger m HBTO SADDress MIN 2092 TRIGger m HBTO SADDress MAX 2093 TRIGger m HBTO LENGth CONDi...

Page 2091: ...ETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with th...

Page 2092: ...AddrOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditi...

Page 2093: ...al LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding TRIGger m HBTO L...

Page 2094: ...eater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding TRIGger m HBTO CRC MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and max...

Page 2095: ...o be set with the corresponding TRIGger m HBTO DATA DMIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m HBTO DATA DMIN and TRIGger m HBTO D...

Page 2096: ...ger m HBTO DATA IMIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m HBTO DATA IMIN and TRIGger m HBTO DATA IMAX RST INRange TRIGger m HBTO...

Page 2097: ...ult on page 1671 In all BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n WORD o commands the suffix m selects the serial bus suffix n selects the frame in the decode table and suffix o selects the word in the selected frame...

Page 2098: ...RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n FTYPe Returns the type of frame for the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values FrameType IDLE MAC FILLer UNKNown IDLE IDLE frame This frame is use...

Page 2099: ...ame due to length type error ERR_CRC Erroneous frame due to CRC error RST OK Usage Query only BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n STARt Returns the start time of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values...

Page 2100: ...rns the source address of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values SrcAddress Usage Query only BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n TYPE Returns the value of length type field of the selected frame Suffix...

Page 2101: ...ery only BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n NUMWords Returns the number of decoded words for the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 n Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BU...

Page 2102: ...es PrimaryBitRate Range 0 to 100000000000 Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit bps Usage Query only BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n WORD o TYPE Returns the data type for the selected word Suffix m 1 4 n o Return...

Page 2103: ...ss MAX 2106 SEARch TRIGger HBTO LENGth CONDition 2106 SEARch TRIGger HBTO LENGth MIN 2106 SEARch TRIGger HBTO LENGth MAX 2107 SEARch TRIGger HBTO CRC CONDition 2107 SEARch TRIGger HBTO CRC MIN 2107 SE...

Page 2104: ...Han LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding SEARch TRIGger HBTO D...

Page 2105: ...AddrOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditi...

Page 2106: ...Operator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions...

Page 2107: ...Operator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions...

Page 2108: ...perator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions r...

Page 2109: ...xact value or a value range Parameters DataIdxOperator EQUal LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange RANGe EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Gr...

Page 2110: ...RIGger HBTO ERRor PREamble SearchName Enables disables search for preamble error Parameters ErrorPreamble ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger HBTO ERRor CRC Search...

Page 2111: ...BTO FRAMe m CRC 2114 SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m NUMWords 2114 SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m FTYPe 2114 SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m DSYMbol 2115 SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m SSYMbol 2115 SEARch RESult HBTO F...

Page 2112: ...e error ERR_SFD Erroneous frame due to SFD error ERR_LENGTH Erroneous frame due to length type error ERR_CRC Erroneous frame due to CRC error RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m STARt S...

Page 2113: ...search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values DestAddress Usage Query only SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m SRCaddress SearchName Returns the source address of the selected frame within...

Page 2114: ...umber of decoded words for the selected frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESul...

Page 2115: ...arch result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values DestTranslation Usage Query only SEARch RESult HBTO FRAMe m SSYMbol SearchName Returns the source symbols of the selected frame within th...

Page 2116: ...tion 2116 Decode results 2119 Trigger 2125 Search settings 2133 Search results 2141 24 17 20 1 Configuration In all BUS m TBTO commands the suffix m selects the serial bus BUS m TBTO ATTN Attenuation...

Page 2117: ...FDIF SrcDiff Sets the source of the provided forward differential signal if BUS m TBTO FTYP is set to DIFFerential Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SrcDiff C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3...

Page 2118: ...d reversed differential signal if BUS m TBTO RTYP is set to DIFFerential Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SrcRevDiff C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 BUS m TBTO RTYP SignalRevType Sets t...

Page 2119: ...2120 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n DATA 2120 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n DESTaddress 2121 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n DSYMbol 2121 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n FTYPe 2121 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n NUMWords 2122...

Page 2120: ...0000 Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit bps Usage Query only BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n CRC Returns the CRC frame check checksum of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the fram...

Page 2121: ...ected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values DestTranslation Usage Query only BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n FTYPe Returns the type of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 S...

Page 2122: ...oded words for the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n SRCa...

Page 2123: ...art Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n STATe Returns the state of the frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the fr...

Page 2124: ...o 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n TYPE Returns the value of length type field of the selected frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Sele...

Page 2125: ...rial buses To trigger on a serial bus make sure that TRIGger m SOURce SELect is set to SBUS The sources of the serial bus are channel signals use BUS m SOURce commands Decoding is enabled BUS m STATe...

Page 2126: ...to 0 5 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 01 Default unit V TRIGger m TBTO TYPE Type Selects the type of frame to be triggered on Suffix m 1 3 Parameters Type STARt MAC IDLE ERRor STARt Start of frame MAC MAC fram...

Page 2127: ...CRC MAX CRCPatternMax Sets the end value of the frame check range if TRIGger m TBTO CRC CONDition is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m 1 3 Parameters CRCPatternMax Numeric or string pattern see Chapt...

Page 2128: ...ADDress MAX DestAddrPattMax Sets the end value of the destination address range if TRIGger m TBTO DADDress CONDition is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m 1 3 Parameters DestAddrPattMax Numeric or str...

Page 2129: ...X RST EQUal TRIGger m TBTO DATA DMAX DataMax Sets the end value of the data range if TRIGger m TBTO DATA DCONdition is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m 1 3 Parameters DataMax Numeric or string patte...

Page 2130: ...et the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m TBTO DATA IMIN and TRIGger m TBTO DATA IMAX RST INRange TRIGger m TBTO DATA IMAX DataIndexMax Sets the end value of the index range if TRIG...

Page 2131: ...ut of range OOR For example a preamble error or invalid symbols in control blocks Suffix m 1 3 Parameters ErrorOOR ON OFF RST ON TRIGger m TBTO ERRor ZERO ErrorZERO Enables triggering if a zero ternar...

Page 2132: ...h CONDition is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m 1 3 Parameters TypePatternMax Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit val...

Page 2133: ...r 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X do not care TRIGger m TBTO SADDress MIN SrcAddrPattMin Specifies the source address bit pattern or sets the sta...

Page 2134: ...LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data patt...

Page 2135: ...Han INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the...

Page 2136: ...l LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pat...

Page 2137: ...eters DataIdxOperator EQUal LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange RANGe EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditi...

Page 2138: ...RIGger TBTO ERRor CRC SearchName Enables search for cyclic redundancy check CRC error Parameters ErrorCRC ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger TBTO ERRor FEC Search...

Page 2139: ...less than less or equal than greater than greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding SEARch TRIGger TBTO LENGth MIN command INRange OORange In ra...

Page 2140: ...Han GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal not equal less than less or equal than greater than greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set wi...

Page 2141: ...tart of frame MAC MAC frame This frame contains information that define how to go about transmitting and receiving frames IDLE IDLE frame This frame is used for clock synchronization ERRor Error frame...

Page 2142: ...100000 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult TBTO FRAMe m CRC SearchName Returns the CRC checksum of the selected frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return...

Page 2143: ...RESult TBTO FRAMe m FTYPe SearchName Returns the type of frame for the selected frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameType IDLE MAC OAM RSFEC BH CTLADD...

Page 2144: ...result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult TBTO FRAMe m SRCaddress SearchName Returns the source address...

Page 2145: ...RESult TBTO FRAMe m STATe SearchName Returns the state of the frame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values State OK ERRFEC ERRZERO ERROOR ERRCRC INComplete OK Vali...

Page 2146: ...rame within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values TypeLen Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult TBTO FRAMe m WORD n TYPE SearchName Returns t...

Page 2147: ...ted cell Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values WordValueString Usage Query only 24 17 21 USB option R S RTO6 K570 Configuration 2147 Trigger 2151 Decode results 2162 Search settings 216...

Page 2148: ...l 12 Mbit s HIGH USB high speed protocol 480 Mbit s HSIC USB high speed inter chip HSIC protocol 480 Mbit s RST LOW BUS m USB DPLus SOURce SourceDplus Selects the source for the D data signal in USB l...

Page 2149: ...e source for the data signal in the USB HSIC protocol Suffix m 1 4 Parameters SourceData C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 RST C1W1 Usage Asynchronous command BUS m USB STRobe SO...

Page 2150: ...ault unit V BUS m USB DIFFerential THReshold ThresDiff Defines the threshold level for the differential signal in the USB high speed protocol Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresDiff Range 2 to 2 Increment 0...

Page 2151: ...USB AMIN 2153 TRIGger m USB AMAX 2153 TRIGger m USB DATA 2154 TRIGger m USB DCONdition 2154 TRIGger m USB DPOPerator 2154 TRIGger m USB DPOSition 2154 TRIGger m USB ECONdition 2155 TRIGger m USB EMIN...

Page 2152: ...field Not available for USB High Speed and USB HSIC protocol types For more information on the reset condition see the USB standard The trigger instant is the end of the 10 ms period after the SE0 fi...

Page 2153: ...al LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less than or equal Greater than Greater than or equal These conditions require one address...

Page 2154: ...lit and high bandwidth isochronous transactions RST D0 TRIGger m USB DCONdition OperatorData Sets the operator equal or unequal to set a specific payload data pattern Parameters OperatorData OFF ANY E...

Page 2155: ...These conditions require one endpoint value to be set using TRIGger m USB EMIN INRange OORange In range out of range These conditions require a range of end point values to be set using TRIGger m USB...

Page 2156: ...period see USB stan dard for the definition of glitching RST ANY TRIGger m USB FCONdition FrameNoOperator Sets the operator to set a specific frame number or a frame number range The frame number val...

Page 2157: ...the trigger to the STALL field endpoint is halted or a con trol pipe request is not supported NYET Sets the trigger to the NYET field no response yet from receiver RST ACK TRIGger m USB PATT PayloadM...

Page 2158: ...peratorSEU Sets the operator to set a specific SEU or an SEU range The SEU values are set with TRIGger m USB SMIN and TRIGger m USB SMAX For SEU see SEU on page 831 Parameters OperatorSEU OFF ANY EQUa...

Page 2159: ...G PREamble Sets the trigger to the PREamble PID ERR Sets the trigger to the ERRor PID SPLit Sets the trigger to the SPLIT PID in USB high speed transac tions PING Sets the trigger to the PING PID in U...

Page 2160: ...be set using TRIGger m USB TMIN INRange OORange In range out of range These conditions require a range of ET values to be set using TRIGger m USB SMIN and TRIGger m USB SMAX RST OFF TRIGger m USB TMIN...

Page 2161: ...ssCheck ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger m USB WEND EndpointCheck Defines whether the endpoint check shall be activated or not Parameters EndpointCheck ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger m USB WETCheck WithETCheck Defines...

Page 2162: ...meters WithSEUCheck ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger m USB WSTC WithSCCheck Defines whether the Start Complete SC check shall be activated or not Parameters WithSCCheck ON OFF RST OFF 24 17 21 3 Decode results...

Page 2163: ...ber Suffix m 1 4 n Return values PID RES OUT ACK DATA0 DATa0 PING SOF NYET DATA2 DATa2 SPLIT SPLit IN NAK DATA1 DATa1 PRE SETUP SETup STALL STALl MDATA MDATa UNK RES RES Reserved OUT OUT Token PID IN...

Page 2164: ...D only valid in USB high speed and USB HSIC proto cols UNK UNK Unknown PID RST RES Usage Query only BUS m USB PACKet n ADDRess Returns the packet address for the selected serial bus and packet number...

Page 2165: ...f the bytes Example BUS USB PACKet4 DATA 6 18 52 86 120 154 188 Usage Query only BUS m USB PACKet n ENDPoint Returns the endpoint for the selected serial bus and packet number Suffix m 1 4 n Return va...

Page 2166: ...nd packet number Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Port Range 0 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m USB PACKet n SC Returns the Start Complete split transaction SSPLIT CSPLIT flag bits for the...

Page 2167: ...1 4 n Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m USB PACKet n STATus Returns the status of the packet with the selected packet number f...

Page 2168: ...rror 2170 SEARch TRIGger USB CRC16error 2170 SEARch TRIGger USB CRC5error 2170 SEARch TRIGger USB DATA 2171 SEARch TRIGger USB DCONdition 2171 SEARch TRIGger USB DPOPerator 2171 SEARch TRIGger USB DPO...

Page 2169: ...SB WSTC 2182 SEARch TRIGger USB ACONdition SearchName OperatorAddress SEARch TRIGger USB ACONdition SearchName Sets the operator to set a specific address or an address range Parameters OperatorAddres...

Page 2170: ...hName BitstuffError SEARch TRIGger USB BITSterror SearchName Defines whether a search for any bitstuffing error shall be activated or not Parameters BitstuffError ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting...

Page 2171: ...packet high speed data packet for high bandwidth isochronous transaction in a microframe MD Searches for an MDATA packet high speed data packet for split and high bandwidth isochronous transactions R...

Page 2172: ...er USB ECONdition SearchName EndpointOptor SEARch TRIGger USB ECONdition SearchName Sets the operator to set a specific endpoint or an endpoint range The endpoint values are set with SEARch TRIGger US...

Page 2173: ...r to set a specific frame number or a frame number range The frame number values are set with SEARch TRIGger USB FMIN and SEARch TRIGger USB FMAX Parameters FrameNoOperator OFF ANY EQUal NEQual LTHan...

Page 2174: ...rror SEARch TRIGger USB GLITcherror SearchName Defines whether a search for any glitch error shall be activated or not Parameters GlitchError ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName...

Page 2175: ...nge OORange In range out of range These conditions require a port number range to be set using SEARch TRIGger USB PMIN and SEARch TRIGger USB PMAX RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName S...

Page 2176: ...ual Less than Less than or equal Greater than Greater than or equal These conditions require one SEU value to be set using SEARch TRIGger USB SMIN INRange OORange In range out of range These condition...

Page 2177: ...ch for various errors Parameters ErrorCondition ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger USB SHANdshake SearchName HandshakePacket SEARch TRIGger USB SHANdshake Search...

Page 2178: ...NY PREamble ERR SPLit PING ANY Searches for any of the special PID packet types listed below PREamble Searches for any host issued preamble token enables down stream bus traffic to low speed USB devic...

Page 2179: ...n ET range The ET values are set with SEARch TRIGger USB TMIN and SEARch TRIGger USB TMAX Parameters OperatorET OFF ANY EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange OFF ANY The endpoint type...

Page 2180: ...SEARch TRIGger USB TOKen SearchName Defines which token packet type is searched for OUT IN SOF SETUP or Any token packet Parameters USBTokenType ANY OUT IN SOF SETup ANY Searches for any of the token...

Page 2181: ...nes whether a search for any Endpoint Type ET shall be activated or not Parameters WithETCheck ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger USB WFRN SearchName FrameNoChec...

Page 2182: ...port shall be activated or not Parameters WithPortCheck ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger USB WSEU SearchName WithSEUCheck SEARch TRIGger USB WSEU SearchName D...

Page 2183: ...Rch RESult USB PACKet m SC 2186 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m SEU 2186 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STARt 2186 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STATus 2187 SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STOP 2187 SEARch RESult USB...

Page 2184: ...he endpoint for the selected packet number within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Endp Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult USB PACKet m...

Page 2185: ...y parameters SearchName Return values PID RES OUT ACK DATA0 DATa0 PING SOF NYET DATA2 DATa2 SPLIT SPLit IN NAK DATA1 DATa1 PRE SETUP SETup STALL STALl MDATA MDATa UNK For a description of the return v...

Page 2186: ...PACKet m SEU SearchName Returns the SEU values for the selected packet number within the search result For SEU see SEU on page 831 Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values SEU Range 0 to 3...

Page 2187: ...y SEARch RESult USB PACKet m STOP SearchName Returns the stop time of the packet with the selected packet number within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Stop Range...

Page 2188: ...BThree THRHigh 2189 BUS m USBThree THRLow 2189 BUS m USBThree SCRMode 2189 BUS m USBThree TYPE 2189 BUS m USBThree SOURce SourceData Selects the source for the data signal in the USB 3 1 protocol Suff...

Page 2189: ...ld level for digitization of the data signal in the USB 3 1 proto col Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresholdLower Range 2 to 2 Increment 0 01 RST 0 05 Default unit V BUS m USBThree SCRMode ScrambleMode Sel...

Page 2190: ...192 BUS m USBThree DFE TCONt 2192 BUS m USBThree PROTocol 2192 BUS m CTLE DCGain DCGain Sets the adjustable DC gain This value can be chosen according to the channel loss characteristics For low loss...

Page 2191: ...o 40E 9 Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit Hz BUS m CTLE Z1FReq ZroOneFreq Sets the zero frequency for the transfer function of the CTLE algorithm Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ZroOneFreq Range 1 to 40E 9 Incre...

Page 2192: ...m USBThree DFE ESTCoeff AutoChEstimate Enables the use of estimate coefficients for the decision feedback equalization Suffix m 1 4 Parameters AutoChEstimate ON OFF RST ON BUS m USBThree DFE TCONt CI...

Page 2193: ...r defining the USB 3 1 settings For example to set the Frame type ACK Field Route String Data value you can use one of the following commands TRIGger USBThree FRAMe13 FLD1 DMIN 01100 Defines the param...

Page 2194: ...r 3 Hub 4 DLY 5 DFR 8 Vendor Device Test 1 VDT 2 Vendor Def 3 HDr 4 Hub 5 DLY 6 DFR 9 Port Capability 1 Link Speed 2 Num HP Buf 3 Dir 4 OTG 5 Tiebreake 6 HDr 7 Hub 8 DLY 9 DFR 10 Port Config 1 Link Sp...

Page 2195: ...eld name 4 HDr 5 Hub 6 DLY 7 DFR 13 ACK 1 Route String 2 Device Address 3 rty 4 D 5 EPTNum 6 TT 7 HE 8 NumP 9 SeqNum 10 TPF 11 StreamId 12 SSI 13 WPA 14 DBI 15 PP 16 NBI 17 HDr 18 Hub 19 DLY 20 DFR 14...

Page 2196: ...Num 4 NumP 5 StreamId 6 HDr 7 Hub 8 DLY 9 DFR 16 Status 1 Route String 2 Device Address 3 D 4 EPTNum 5 PP 6 HDr 7 Hub 8 DLY 9 DFR 17 Stall 1 Device Address 2 D 3 EPTNum 4 HDr 5 Hub 6 DLY 7 DFR 18 Func...

Page 2197: ...Y 6 DFR 20 Bus Interval Adjust 1 Device Address 2 BusIntAdj 3 HDr 4 Hub 5 DLY 6 DFR 21 Host Role Req 1 Device Address 2 RSP 3 HDr 4 Hub 5 DLY 6 DFR 22 Sublink Speed 1 Device Address 2 TPF 3 LSE 4 ST 5...

Page 2198: ...1 Device Address 2 D 3 EPTNum 4 HDr 5 Hub 6 DLY 7 DFR 25 Data Packet Header 1 Route String 2 Device Address 3 SeqNum 4 EOB 5 D 6 EPTNum 7 TT 8 S 9 Length 10 StreamId 11 SSI 12 WPA 13 DBI 14 PP 15 NBI...

Page 2199: ...1 TRIGger m USBThree DMIN 2201 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o DMIN 2201 TRIGger m USBThree DMAX 2202 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o DMAX 2202 TRIGger m USBThree BIT 2202 TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n...

Page 2200: ...pecifies the frame number Parameters Enable ON OFF RST OFF Example TRIGger USBThree FRAMe1 ENABle ON Enables the checking condition for the TSEQ frame TRIGger USBThree FRENable TS1 ON Enables the chec...

Page 2201: ...ameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less than or equal Greater than Greater than or equal These...

Page 2202: ...hree BIT Frame Field Bit TRIGger m USBThree FRAMe n FLD o BIT BitState Sets the bit state of a field that only consists of one bit Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted n Spec...

Page 2203: ...start value of an index range Suffix m 1 3 n Specifies the field number within the frame o Parameters IndexMin Specifies the index value or index start value within the field The index range incremen...

Page 2204: ...TATus 2206 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o STARt 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o STOP 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o VAL 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o FVAL 2208 BUS m...

Page 2205: ...ypes on page 842 RST UDEF Usage Query only BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n STATe Returns the status of the frame with the selected frame number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Selects the fra...

Page 2206: ...BThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o TYPE Returns the type of the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected frame number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Selects the fra...

Page 2207: ...o Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o STOP Returns the stop time of the field with the selected fi...

Page 2208: ...ing the SSIC search settings For example to set the Frame type ACK Field Route String Data value you can use one of the following commands SEARch TRIGger USBThree FRAMe13 FLD1 DMIN 01100 Defines the p...

Page 2209: ...SEARch TRIGger USBThree ERRor m ENABle SearchName Enable SEARch TRIGger USBThree ERRor m ENABle SearchName Enables the search for errors You can search for all error types in parallel Suffix m Specif...

Page 2210: ...thin the frame Parameters CondEnabler ON OFF ON Checking condition enabled OFF Checking condition disabled RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName String with the name of the search Exampl...

Page 2211: ...the search SEARch TRIGger USBThree DMIN SearchName Frame Field Data SEARch TRIGger USBThree FRAMe m FLD n DMIN SearchName DataMin SEARch TRIGger USBThree FRAMe m FLD n DMIN SearchName Specifies the da...

Page 2212: ...m FLD n BIT SearchName Sets the bit state of a field to be searched that only consists of one bit Suffix m Specifies the frame n Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters BitState ONE ZE...

Page 2213: ...hree FRAMe m FLD n IMIN SearchName Specifies the index at which the data is to be searched or sets the start value of an index range in which the data is to be searched Suffix m Specifies the field nu...

Page 2214: ...2216 SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m FLD n STATus 2216 SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m FLD n STARt 2217 SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m FLD n STOP 2217 SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m FLD n VAL 2218 SEARc...

Page 2215: ...rameCount Usage Query only SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m STATe SearchName Returns the status of the frame with the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName...

Page 2216: ...ment 100E 12 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult USBThree FRAMe m FLD n TYPE SearchName Returns the field name of the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected...

Page 2217: ...the frame with the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Quer...

Page 2218: ...e m FLD n FVAL SearchName Returns the formatted value of the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m n Selects the field...

Page 2219: ...F RST OFF BUS m USBPd HYSTeresis Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the data Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Hysteresis Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 05 Default unit V BUS m USBPd SOURce Sour...

Page 2220: ...ldMid Sets the middle threshold at default USB Type C currnet for the current advertisment mode Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ThresholdMid Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 66 Default unit V BUS m USBPd T...

Page 2221: ...0 Defines the parameter by using the index m for the frame number and n for the field number For an overview see Overview of frame and field numbers for USBPD TRIGger USBPD DMIN Control MsgID 01100 De...

Page 2222: ...o BIT 2224 TRIGger m USBPd DMAX 2224 TRIGger m USBPd FRAMe n FLD o DMAX 2224 TRIGger m USBPd DMIN 2225 TRIGger m USBPd FRAMe n FLD o DMIN 2225 TRIGger m USBPd DOPerator 2225 TRIGger m USBPd FRAMe n F...

Page 2223: ...omitted n Specifies the frame number Parameters Enable ON OFF RST OFF Example TRIGger USBPd FRAMe1 ENABle ON Enables searching for for the Test frame TRIGger USBPd FRENable Control Frame ON Enables s...

Page 2224: ...e n FLD o BIT BitState Sets the bit state of a field that only consists of one bit Suffix m 1 3 n o Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters BitState ONE ZERO DC ONE 1 ZERO 0 DC Don t ca...

Page 2225: ...within the frame o Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less than or equal Greater than Great...

Page 2226: ...Parameters IndexMin Specifies the index value or index start value within the field The index range increment and RST values depend on the field type TRIGger m USBPd IOPerator Frame Field Operator TRI...

Page 2227: ...FRAMe n STARt 2230 BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n STATe 2230 BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n STOP 2231 BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n TYPE 2231 BUS m USBPd RESult FCOunt Returns the number of decoded frames in th...

Page 2228: ...e selected frame number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Selects the frame number o Selects the field number Return values FieldState OK UNKNown INComplete PREamble SOP CRC LENGth FBFB SOP S...

Page 2229: ...alues Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n FLD o TYPE Returns the type of the field with the selected field number within th...

Page 2230: ...the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Info Usage Query only BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n STARt Returns the start time of the frame with the selected frame number for the selected serial b...

Page 2231: ...umber for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m USBPd RESult FRAMe n TYPE Returns the frame t...

Page 2232: ...rame and field name SEARch TRIGger USBPd ERENable 2232 SEARch TRIGger USBPd ERRor m ENABle 2232 SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRENable 2233 SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m ENABle 2233 SEARch TRIGger USBPd FIENabl...

Page 2233: ...s the frame number Parameters Enable ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName Example SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe1 ENABle ON Enables the checking condition for the Test frame SEARch T...

Page 2234: ...BPd FRAMe m FLD n BIT SearchName BitState SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m FLD n BIT SearchName Sets the bit state of a field to be searched that only consists of one bit Suffix m Specifies the frame n Sp...

Page 2235: ...n range to be searched Suffix m Specifies the frame n Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters DataMin Specifies the name of the generic trigger setting frame see SEARch RESult USBPd FRA...

Page 2236: ...chName IndexMax SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m FLD n IMAX SearchName Sets the end value of an index range if SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m FLD n IOPerator is set to INRange or RANGe Suffix m Specifies th...

Page 2237: ...INRange RANGe EQUal This condition requires one endpoint value to be set using SEARch TRIGger USBPd FRAMe m FLD n IMIN INRange RANGe This condition requires a range of endpoint values to be set using...

Page 2238: ...FRAMe m DATA SearchName Searches for data from the frame with the selected frame number for the selected serial bus This is the hex value of the first four bytes of data fields prefixed by the total n...

Page 2239: ...ket warning CRC Cyclic redundancy check error FBFB 4b5b error RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult USBPd FRAMe m FLD n STARt SearchName Returns the start time of the field with the selected field num...

Page 2240: ...selected field number within the frame with the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m n Selects the field number Query parameters SearchName Return values FieldType Usage Query only...

Page 2241: ...m STARt SearchName Returns the start time of the frame with the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increm...

Page 2242: ...SBPd FRAMe m TYPE SearchName Returns the frame type for the selected frame number within the search result Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameType STARt RESet CTRL DATA BIST RQST...

Page 2243: ...DPHY DPONe PROBe 2247 BUS m DPHY DPTWo PROBe 2247 BUS m DPHY DPTHree PROBe 2247 BUS m DPHY CP HSPeed HYSTeresis 2247 BUS m DPHY DPZero HSPeed HYSTeresis 2247 BUS m DPHY DPONe HSPeed HYSTeresis 2247 B...

Page 2244: ...h waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus Alternatively digital channels can be used if MSO option R S RTO6 B1 is installed Digital...

Page 2245: ...US m DPHY THCoupling ThresCpl Enables coupling i e the same threshold and hysteresis value is used for all lanes Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters ThresCpl ON OFF RST ON BUS m DPHY THPRes...

Page 2246: ...HLower ThresLPDP0Low Sets the lower threshold value for the respective lane used for the low power mode Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters ThresLPDP0Low Range 1 5 to 1 5 Increment 0 01 RST...

Page 2247: ...SCP BUS m DPHY DPZero HSPeed HYSTeresis HysteresisHSDP0 BUS m DPHY DPONe HSPeed HYSTeresis HysteresisHSDP1 BUS m DPHY DPTWo HSPeed HYSTeresis HysteresisHSDP2 BUS m DPHY DPTHree HSPeed HYSTeresis Hyste...

Page 2248: ...al bus are channel signals use BUS m SOURce commands Decoding is enabled BUS m STATe is set to ON TRIGger m DPHY TYPE 2249 TRIGger m DPHY DATA CONDition 2249 TRIGger m DPHY DATA MAX 2250 TRIGger m DPH...

Page 2249: ...URN Low power lane turnaround LP_HSRQ Low power high speed request RST HS_SOP TRIGger m DPHY DATA CONDition Format Set the condition for the data value You can define an exact value or a value range P...

Page 2250: ...rameter accepts the bit value X don t care TRIGger m DPHY DIDX CONDition Format Sets the condition for the data index You can define an exact value or a value range Parameters Format EQUal LTHan LETHa...

Page 2251: ...corresponding TRIGger m DPHY DTYPe MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m DPHY DTYPe MIN and TRIGger m DPHY DTYPe MAX RST EQUa...

Page 2252: ...EQUal TRIGger m DPHY ESCMode MAX LPEscapeModeMax Sets the the end value of an escape mode range if TRIGger m DPHY ESCMode CONDition is set to INRange or OORange Parameters LPEscapeModeMax Numeric or...

Page 2253: ...SDTa CONDition is set to INRange or OORange Parameters LPEscapeDataMax TRIGger m DPHY ESDTa MIN LPEscapeDataMin Specifies an escape mode data bit pattern or sets the the start value of a pattern range...

Page 2254: ...er m DPHY WCOunt CONDition Format Set the condition for the word count You can define an exact value or a value range Parameters Format EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQ...

Page 2255: ...RESult on page 1671 BUS m DPHY RESult FCOunt 2255 BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n CS 2255 BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n DATA 2256 BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n DTName 2256 BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n DTYPe 2257 BUS m...

Page 2256: ...ns the data or word count value Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values WordCountOrData 16 bit integer value Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 Example BUS DPHY RESult FR...

Page 2257: ...Query only BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n ECC Returns the error correction code ECC of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values ECC Range 0 to 255 Increment...

Page 2258: ...ber Return values PacketValue Range 0 to 9223372036854775808 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the s...

Page 2259: ...y contained in the acquisition RST OK Usage Query only BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values...

Page 2260: ...frame RST HS_SP Usage Query only BUS m DPHY RESult FRAMe n NUMPackets Returns the number of packets in the indicated frame Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values NumPac...

Page 2261: ...ger DPHY ESDTa CONDition 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MAX 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MIN 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESINdex CONDition 2267 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESINdex MAX 2267 SEARch TRIGger DPHY...

Page 2262: ...mum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger DPHY DATA MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY DATA MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger DPHY DATA MAX SearchName DataMax SEARch T...

Page 2263: ...g SEARch TRIGger DPHY DIDX MIN command INRange RANGe In range Set the minimum and maximum value using SEARch TRIGger DPHY DIDX MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY DIDX MAX RST INRange Parameters for setting a...

Page 2264: ...with SEARch TRIGger DPHY DATA MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY DATA MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger DPHY DTYPe MAX SearchName HSDataTypeMax SEARch TRIGger DPHY DTY...

Page 2265: ...TRIGger DPHY ESCMode MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESCMode MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESCMode MAX SearchName LPEscapeModeMax SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESCMod...

Page 2266: ...TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MAX OFF ANY Any pa...

Page 2267: ...TRIGger DPHY ESINdex MIN command INRange RANGe In range Set the minimum and maximum value using SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESINdex MIN and SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESINdex MAX RST INRange Parameters for setting...

Page 2268: ...ss than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one pattern to be set with the corresponding SEARch TRIGger DPHY WCOunt MIN command INRange OORange In range Out...

Page 2269: ...SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m CS 2269 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DATA 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DTName 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DTYPe 2270 SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m ECC 2271 SEARch RESult D...

Page 2270: ...ult Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values WordCountOrData Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m DTName SearchName Returns the data type name for t...

Page 2271: ...alues ECC Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m PACKet n IDX SearchName Returns the index of the data payload for the selected frame within the search result Suf...

Page 2272: ...ge 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult DPHY FRAMe m STATe SearchName Returns the overall state of the selected frame within the search result Suffi...

Page 2273: ...Query parameters SearchName Return values FrameType HS_SP HS_LP HS_INCOMPLETE LP_HSREQ LP_TA LP_ESC HS_SP High speed short packet frame HS_LP High speed long packet frame HS_INCOMPLETE Incomplete hig...

Page 2274: ...US m MPHY VARiant 2274 BUS m MPHY DLANes 2274 BUS m MPHY DZERo SOURce 2275 BUS m MPHY DONE SOURce 2275 BUS m MPHY DTWO SOURce 2275 BUS m MPHY DTHRee SOURce 2275 BUS m MPHY DZERo THReshold 2275 BUS m M...

Page 2275: ...BUS m MPHY DTHRee SOURce DataSource Selects the source of the corresponding data lane Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters DataSource C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4...

Page 2276: ...eshold value of the data lanes Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus Parameters ThresholdPreset THRES_60MV THRES_120MV THRES_240MV MANual THRES_60MV THRES_120MV THRES_240MV Sets the threshold value of t...

Page 2277: ...LWTWo CONDition 2280 TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo MIN 2281 TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo MAX 2281 TRIGger m MPHY LWTHree CONDition 2281 TRIGger m MPHY LWTHree MIN 2282 TRIGger m MPHY LWTHree MAX 2282 TRIGger m MPHY L...

Page 2278: ...ggered on Suffix m 1 3 Parameters Type START BURST ADAPT LCC DLPDUSOF DLPDUCOF DLPDUEOF DLPDUNAC DLPDUAFC PACP TRIGUPR0 TRIGUPR1 TRIGUPR2 ERRor START M PHY or UniPro start of frame BURST M PHY burst f...

Page 2279: ...p to 75 power saving is achieved READCAP Recovers data about the OMC s capabilities READMFG Retrieves manufacturing ID and vendor specific information READVEND Retrieves the additional four delimited...

Page 2280: ...EQUal TRIGger m MPHY LWONe MIN LCCWORD1Min Specifies the WORD 1 pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters LCCWORD1Min Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit...

Page 2281: ...QUal TRIGger m MPHY LWTWo MIN LCCWORD2Min Specifies the WORD 2 pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters LCCWORD2Min Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit p...

Page 2282: ...QUal TRIGger m MPHY LWTHree MIN LCCWORD3Min Specifies the WORD 3 pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters LCCWORD3Min Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit...

Page 2283: ...RIGger m MPHY LWFour MAX RST EQUal TRIGger m MPHY LWFour MIN LCCWORD4Min Specifies the WORD 4 pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters LCCWORD4Min Numeric or string p...

Page 2284: ...et with the corresponding TRIGger m MPHY DATA DMIN command INRange OORange In range Out of range set the minimum and maximum value of the range with TRIGger m MPHY DATA DMIN and TRIGger m MPHY DATA DM...

Page 2285: ...m MPHY DATA IMIN command INRange RANGe In range Set the minimum and maximum value using TRIGger m MPHY DATA IMIN and TRIGger m MPHY DATA IMAX RST INRange TRIGger m MPHY DATA IMIN DataIndexMin Specifi...

Page 2286: ...SNumber MAX RST EQUal TRIGger m MPHY FSNumber MIN FSNMin Specifies the FSN bit pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters FSNMin Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 2...

Page 2287: ...RIGger m MPHY CRC MAX RST EQUal TRIGger m MPHY CRC MIN CRCMin Specifies the CRC bit pattern or sets the start value of a pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters CRCMin Numeric or string pattern see Chap...

Page 2288: ...REQ value don t care RST DC TRIGger m MPHY CREDit CONDition CreditOperator Sets the condition for Credit You can define an exact value or a value range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters CreditOperator EQUal NEQ...

Page 2289: ...1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care TRIGger m MPHY PBEGin CONDition CondPACPBegin Sets the condition for PACP Begin You can define an exact value or a value range Suffix m 1...

Page 2290: ...care TRIGger m MPHY PFID CONDition CondPACPFunc Sets the condition for PACP Function ID You can define an exact value or a value range Suffix m 1 3 Parameters CondPACPFunc EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan G...

Page 2291: ...x m 1 3 Parameters PACPFunIDMax Numeric or string pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care TRIGger m MPHY PRPLength Width S...

Page 2292: ...m MPHY ERRor UNKNown ErrorUnknown Enables disables trigger on unidentified UniPro frame error Suffix m 1 3 Parameters ErrorUnknown ON OFF RST ON 24 17 25 3 Decode results M PHY To show the results on...

Page 2293: ...R0 TRIGUPR1 TRIGUPR2 SKIP FILLER SPACER UNKNOWN BURST M PHY burst frame ADAPT M PHY Adapt frame This control frame is used for clock bit syn chronization LCC M PHY LCC frame This control frame is used...

Page 2294: ...INVALID INCOMPLETE UNCorrelated CRCERROR VOOR LENGTHERROR OK Valid frame RSVDERROR Erroneous frame due to reserved bit error CMDERROR Erroneous frame due to LCC error SYMBOLERROR Erroneous frame due t...

Page 2295: ...Selects the frame Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n CELL o DATA Returns the data value for the selected cell Suffix m 1 4 Selec...

Page 2296: ...ted cell Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame o Selects the cell Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m MPHY RESul...

Page 2297: ...AMe n DATA Returns the data for the selected frame corresponds to the Data column in the decode results table Suffix m 1 4 Selects the serial bus n Selects the frame Return values Data Usage Query onl...

Page 2298: ...PD PING PNGR DPH DPHN DPP DPPA ITP LC SKIP BRST BDAT BERC BCNT IDLE CP0 CP1 CP2 CP3 CP5or6 UHP ULMP UTP UDVN UDEF ERRor CTLB DATB SYNC SDS RST UDEF Usage Query only BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n STARt Ret...

Page 2299: ...C 2306 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA DCONdition 2306 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA DMIN 2306 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA DMAX 2307 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA ICONdition 2307 SEARch TRIGger MPHY DATA IMIN 2307 SEARch...

Page 2300: ...RRor START M PHY or UniPro start of frame BURST M PHY burst frame ADAPT M PHY Adapt frame This control frame is used for clock bit syn chronization LCC M PHY LCC frame This control frame is used for l...

Page 2301: ...es the power saving state to ultra low power In this state up to 75 power saving is achieved READCAP Recovers data about the OMC s capabilities READMFG Retrieves manufacturing ID and vendor specific i...

Page 2302: ...and SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWONe MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWONe MIN SearchName LCCWORD1Min SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWONe MIN SearchName Specifies the WOR...

Page 2303: ...and SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTWo MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTWo MIN SearchName LCCWORD2Min SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTWo MIN SearchName Specifies the WOR...

Page 2304: ...nd SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTHree MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTHree MIN SearchName LCCWORD3Min SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWTHree MIN SearchName Specifies the...

Page 2305: ...and SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWFour MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWFour MIN SearchName LCCWORD4Min SEARch TRIGger MPHY LWFour MIN SearchName Specifies the W...

Page 2306: ...nge EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding SE...

Page 2307: ...the index You can define an exact value or a value range Parameters DataIdxOperator EQUal LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange RANGe EQUal LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Less than Less or equal than Gr...

Page 2308: ...e EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions require one data pattern to be set with the corresponding SEAR...

Page 2309: ...ator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Less than Less or equal than Greater Than Greater or equal than These conditions requ...

Page 2310: ...Gger MPHY CREQ SearchName REQ SEARch TRIGger MPHY CREQ SearchName Specifies the CREQ bit pattern Parameters REQ ONE ZERO DC ONE Sets the trigger condition to binary 1 ZERO Sets the trigger condition t...

Page 2311: ...Dit MIN and SEARch TRIGger MPHY CREDit MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY CREDit MIN SearchName CreditMin SEARch TRIGger MPHY CREDit MIN SearchName Specifies...

Page 2312: ...nd SEARch TRIGger MPHY PBEGin MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY PBEGin MIN SearchName PACPBEGINMin SEARch TRIGger MPHY PBEGin MIN SearchName Specifies the P...

Page 2313: ...SEARch TRIGger MPHY PFID MAX RST EQUal Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY PFID MIN SearchName PACPFunIDMin SEARch TRIGger MPHY PFID MIN SearchName Specifies the PACP Func...

Page 2314: ...ables disables search for LCC error Parameters LCCError ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger MPHY ERRor SYMBol SearchName ErrorSymbol SEARch TRIGger MPHY ERRor SYMB...

Page 2315: ...HY FRAMe m CELL n DATA 2316 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n TYPE 2316 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n STARt 2316 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n STOP 2317 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n STATe...

Page 2316: ...values WordValue Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n TYPE SearchName Returns the data type within the search result for the selected cell Suffix...

Page 2317: ...ame Return values Stop Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m CELL n STATe SearchName Returns the state type within the search resu...

Page 2318: ...NOWN BURST M PHY burst frame ADAPT M PHY Adapt frame This control frame is used for clock bit syn chronization LCC M PHY LCC frame This control frame is used for line configura tion depending on the L...

Page 2319: ...SYMBOLERROR UNKNOWNERROR INVALID INCOMPLETE UNCorrelated CRCERROR VOOR LENGTHERROR OK Valid frame RSVDERROR Erroneous frame due to reserved bit error CMDERROR Erroneous frame due to LCC error LENGTHER...

Page 2320: ...t selects the trigger event Only the A trigger is available for triggering on serial buses To trigger on a serial bus make sure that TRIGger m SOURce SELect is set to SBUS The sources of the serial bu...

Page 2321: ...324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IMAX 2324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC IMIN 2324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IMIN 2324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC IOPerator 2325 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IOPerator...

Page 2322: ...able Can be omitted n Specifies the field number within the frame o Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters CondEnabler ON OFF RST OFF Example TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe1 FLD1 ENABle ON En...

Page 2323: ...a TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o DMIN DataMin Specifies the data pattern or sets the start value of a data pattern range Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted n Specifies t...

Page 2324: ...ts the end value of an index range if TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IOPerator is set to INRange or RANGe Suffix m 1 3 Only 1 A trigger 2 3 not available Can be omitted n Specifies the field number...

Page 2325: ...ger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IMAX RST INRange 24 17 25 7 Search settings USB SSIC Option R S RTO6 K570 There are two commands for each parameter that you can use for defining the SSIC search settings...

Page 2326: ...number Parameters Enable ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName String with the name of the search Example SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe1 ENABle ON Enables searching for the TSEQ...

Page 2327: ...c data pattern in the selected field of the selected frame Suffix m Specifies the frame number n Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters CondEnabler ON OFF ON Checking condition enabled...

Page 2328: ...he end value of a data pattern range if SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n DOPerator is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m Specifies the frame number n Specifies the field number within the frame...

Page 2329: ...the frame number n Specifies the field number within the frame Parameters DataOperator EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan INRange OORange EQUal NEQual LTHan LETHan GTHan GETHan Equal Not equal Le...

Page 2330: ...Frame Field Data SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n IMIN SearchName IndexMin SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n IMIN SearchName Specifies the index at which the data is to be searched or sets...

Page 2331: ...arameters for setting and query SearchName 24 17 26 8B 10B option R S RTO6 K590 24 17 26 1 Configuration In all BUS m EBTB commands the suffix m selects the serial bus BUS m EBTB BITRate 2332 BUS m EB...

Page 2332: ...turn values EstimatedBitrate Range 100 to 100E 9 Increment 10 RST 1 25E 9 Default unit bps Usage Query only BUS m EBTB DIFFerential SOURce SrcDiff Selects the source of the provided differential signa...

Page 2333: ...ects the display format for the results in the decode table and for the results of BUS m EBTB SYMBol n DATA Suffix m 1 4 Parameters DisplayFormat KD EB TB KD K D codes EB 8 bit pattern TB 10 bit patte...

Page 2334: ...1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 RST C1W1 Usage Asynchronous command BUS m EBTB DPLus THReshold ThresholdDplus Sets the high threshold D of the signal if BUS m EBTB TYPE SINGle S...

Page 2335: ...m EBTB SYNC CommaSymbol Sets the sync symbol a control symbol used for low level control functions Suffix m 1 4 Parameters CommaSymbol K285 K281 K287 CUS RST K285 BUS m EBTB TYPE SignalType Selects th...

Page 2336: ...ts the trigger event Only the A trigger is available for triggering on serial buses To trigger on a serial bus make sure that TRIGger m SOURce SELect is set to SBUS The sources of the serial bus are c...

Page 2337: ...on if TRIGger m EBTB SYMType is set to Dxy Parameters DYSymbol Range 0 to 7 Increment 1 RST 0 TRIGger m EBTB EBPA EBPattern Sets the 8 bit pattern to be triggered on if TRIGger m EBTB STYPe is set to...

Page 2338: ...th TRIGger m EBTB DX and TRIGger m EBTB DY Parameters SymbolType DXY K280 K281 K282 K283 K284 K285 K286 K287 K237 K277 K297 K307 RST K285 TRIGger m EBTB TBPA TBPattern Sets the 10 bit pattern to be tr...

Page 2339: ...EBTB SYMBol n KDCode 2341 BUS m EBTB SYMBol n TENBit 2341 BUS m EBTB SYMBol n DATA Returns the data of the specified symbol The format is determined by the remote command BUS m EBTB DISF Suffix m 1 4...

Page 2340: ...te of the specified symbol UNK An unknown error was detected for the specified symbol DISPARITY DISParity A disparity error was detected for the specified symbol GLITCH GLITch A glitch error was detec...

Page 2341: ...4 17 26 4 Search settings SEARch TRIGger EBTB DISParityerr 2341 SEARch TRIGger EBTB DX 2342 SEARch TRIGger EBTB DY 2342 SEARch TRIGger EBTB EBPA 2342 SEARch TRIGger EBTB GLITcherror 2342 SEARch TRIGge...

Page 2342: ...h TRIGger EBTB DY SearchName DYSymbol SEARch TRIGger EBTB DY SearchName Sets the y value of the data character Dx y to be searched for if SEARch TRIGger EBTB SYMType is set to Dxy Parameters DYSymbol...

Page 2343: ...n SEARch TRIGger EBTB SYME SearchName Selects the format of the symbol to be searched for if SEARch TRIGger EBTB STYPe is set to EXPRession Parameters Expression Parameters for setting and query Searc...

Page 2344: ...specific error condition Parameters Type SYMBol ERRor RST SYMBol Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger EBTB UNK SearchName UnkError SEARch TRIGger EBTB UNK SearchName Defines if...

Page 2345: ...e data of the specified symbol Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values Data Usage Query only SEARch RESult EBTB SYMBol m STARt SearchName Returns the start time of the specified symbolwithi...

Page 2346: ...h error was detected for the specified symbol RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult EBTB SYMBol m STOP SearchName Returns the stop time of the specified symbol within the search result Suffix m Query...

Page 2347: ...THRHigh 2348 BUS m PCIE LTHRee THRHigh 2348 BUS m PCIE LZER THRLow 2349 BUS m PCIE LONE THRLow 2349 BUS m PCIE LTWO THRLow 2349 BUS m PCIE LTHRee THRLow 2349 BUS m PCIE SMLanes 2349 BUS m PCIE DSCRam...

Page 2348: ...4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 RST C1W1 BUS m PCIE LONE SOURce SourceL1 BUS m PCIE LTWO SOURce SourceL2 BUS m PCIE LTHRee SOURce SourceL3 Sets the signal sources for the corresponding logical...

Page 2349: ...ecovery BUS m CDR BITRate 2349 BUS m CDR PLL BWIDth 2349 BUS m CDR PLL DAMPing 2350 BUS m CDR PLL ORDer 2350 BUS m CDR PLL RELBwidth 2350 BUS m CDR RESults 2350 BUS m CDR SYNC 2351 BUS m CDR BITRate B...

Page 2350: ...PLL ORDer PLLOrder Sets the order of the PLL first or second order PLL of higher order can compensate for more complex jitter behavior Suffix m 1 4 Parameters PLLOrder FIRSt SECond RST SECond BUS m C...

Page 2351: ...ing on serial buses To trigger on a serial bus make sure that TRIGger m SOURce SELect is set to SBUS The sources of the serial bus are channel signals use BUS m SOURce commands Decoding is enabled BUS...

Page 2352: ...58 TRIGger m PCIE TLP ORDE 2358 TRIGger m PCIE TLP REID 2358 TRIGger m PCIE TLP SNOO 2358 TRIGger m PCIE TLP SNUM 2359 TRIGger m PCIE TLP TCHN 2359 TRIGger m PCIE TLP TYPE 2359 TRIGger m PCIE TYPE 235...

Page 2353: ...HIRTEEN FOURTEEN FIFTEEN RST ANY TRIGger m PCIE DLLP MULT HABS VHAbsent Sets the state of the absent virtual hieararchies VH to be triggered on for the data link layer trigger Parameters VHAbsent ANY...

Page 2354: ...type for the data link layer to be triggered on Parameters Type MRINIT MRRESET MRUPDATEFC MRINITFC1 MRINITFC2 RST MRINIT TRIGger m PCIE DLLP MULT VHFC InitVHFC Sets the virtual hierarchies flow contro...

Page 2355: ...ce field indicating what TLPs are affected by the ACK NAK to be trig gered on for the data link layer trigger Parameters ACKNAKSequence TRIGger m PCIE DLLP TYPE Type Sets the DLLP t type to be trigger...

Page 2356: ...FF TRIGger m PCIE ERRC INVP InvalidSymbol Enables triggering on invalid symbol errors Parameters InvalidSymbol ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger m PCIE ERRC LCRC LCRC Enables triggering on link cyclic redundancy...

Page 2357: ...leterID Sets the completer ID to be triggered on for the transaction layer type trigger Parameters TLPCompleterID 16 bit pattern see Chapter 24 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parame...

Page 2358: ...ge routing type to be triggered on for the transaction layer type trigger Parameters MsgRouting ANY ROOTCOMPLEX ADDRESS DEVICEID DEViceid BROADCAST LOCAL GATHERED DEVICEID DEViceid RST ANY TRIGger m P...

Page 2359: ...REE FOUR FIVE SIX SEVEN RST ANY TRIGger m PCIE TLP TYPE Type Sets the transaction type to be triggered on for the transaction layer type trigger Parameters Type ANY MEM IO CFG MSG CPL FETCH SWAP CAS R...

Page 2360: ...et n STATe 2365 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n STOP 2366 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n TAG 2366 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n TYPE 2366 BUS m PCIE RESult PCOunt 2367 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n BITRate 2367 BUS...

Page 2361: ...ation Request Retry Status CA Completer Abort RST RESERVED Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n DATA Returns the data value of the specified packet Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Data Usage Query...

Page 2362: ...the frame with the selected packet number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n o Selects the field number Return values ValueFormatted String parameter Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet...

Page 2363: ...lected field number within the frame with the selected packet number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n o Selects the field number Return values Type Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet...

Page 2364: ...y BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n LEN Returns the length of the specified packet Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Length Range 0 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n RQID Retur...

Page 2365: ...Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n STATe Returns the state of the specified packet Suffix m 1 4 n Return values State OK...

Page 2366: ...E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n TAG Returns the tag of the specified packet Suffix m 1 4 n Return values Tag Range 0 to 255 Increment...

Page 2367: ...RESET UNK SKPOS EIOS FTSOS TS1OS TS2OS EIEOS COMPL MCOMPL DCOMPL UDEF IDLE SDS EDB EDS SDAT SCTR PMUX UNKTlp UNKDllp SINV RST UNK Usage Query only BUS m PCIE RESult PCOunt Returns the packet count for...

Page 2368: ...TRIGger PCIE DLLP VPAT 2373 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC CRC 2373 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC DISP 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC ECRC 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC INVP 2374 SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC LCRC 237...

Page 2369: ...or the data link layer Parameters VirtualChnID ANY ZERO ONE TWO THREE FOUR FIVE SIX SEVEN RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT AUTH SearchName Authorized S...

Page 2370: ...SearchName Sets the state of the absent virtual hieararchies VH to be searched for for the data link layer Parameters VHAbsent ANY YES NO RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TR...

Page 2371: ...for for the data link layer Parameters Type ANY P NP CPL P Posted credit NP Non posted credit CL Completion credit RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT TY...

Page 2372: ...EEN RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT VLNR SearchName VirtualLink SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT VLNR SearchName Sets the virtual link VL number to be se...

Page 2373: ...ers Type ANY MRDLLP ACK NAK INITFC1 INITFC2 UPDATEFC PM VENDOR RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP VPAT SearchName VendorBtPatt SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP VPAT S...

Page 2374: ...end to end cyclic redundancy checksum ECRC errors Parameters ECRC ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE ERRC INVP SearchName InvalidSymbol SEARch TRIGger PCIE...

Page 2375: ...les searching for electrical idle exit ordered sets Parameters Format ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE OSET EIDL SearchName Format SEARch TRIGger PCIE OSE...

Page 2376: ...ning sequence 1 ordered sets Parameters Format ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE OSET TSTWo SearchName Format SEARch TRIGger PCIE OSET TSTWo SearchName Ena...

Page 2377: ...rameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP CPLS SearchName CplStatus SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP CPLS...

Page 2378: ...4 4 6 Bit pattern parameter on page 1286 The string parameter accepts the bit value X don t care Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP MSGR SearchName MsgRouting SEARch T...

Page 2379: ...n the transaction layer type Parameters Snoop ANY YES NO RST ANY Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP SNUM SearchName TLPSeqNo SEARch TRIGger PCIE TLP SNUM SearchName Se...

Page 2380: ...chName parameter It is a string parameter that contains the search definition name For a description of the returned values see the corresponding commands in Chap ter 24 17 27 4 Decode results on page...

Page 2381: ...e Return values Address Usage Query only SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m CPID SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values CompleterID Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only...

Page 2382: ...t 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FCOunt SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values FieldCount Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult...

Page 2383: ...NCerror RST OK Usage Query only SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FLD n TYPE SearchName Suffix m n Query parameters SearchName Return values Type Usage Query only SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m FLD n VAL Searc...

Page 2384: ...archName Return values Length Range 0 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m RQID SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values RequesterID Range 0 to 6...

Page 2385: ...ult PCIE PACKet m STATe SearchName Suffix m Query parameters SearchName Return values State OK MALF CRC16 ECRC LCRC LEN POE MEE UNCorrelated FCRC FPERror UNKNown OUTRange INComplete SYNCerror RST OK U...

Page 2386: ...FGRD1 CFGWR1 MSG MSGD CPL CPLD CPLLK CPLDLK FA32 FA64 SWP32 SWP64 CAS32 CAS64 LPRFX EPRFX ACK NAK PMEL1 PMEL23 PMASRL1 PMRA VENDS IFC1P IFC1NP IFC1CPL IFC2P IFC2NP IFC2CPL UPDFCP UPDFCNP UPDFCCPL MRUP...

Page 2387: ...BUS m DDR DATA SOURce 2388 BUS m DDR DATA THReshold 2388 BUS m DDR STRBe HYSTeresis 2388 BUS m DDR STRBe SOURce 2388 BUS m DDR STRBe THReshold 2389 BUS m DDR BITRate 2389 BUS m DDR STANdard Standard...

Page 2388: ...nd BUS m DDR DATA THReshold DataThreshold Sets the threshold value for the digitization of the data line Suffix m 1 4 Parameters DataThreshold Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 75 Default unit V Usa...

Page 2389: ...eclares the nominal bit rate of the data signal for the DDR eye diagram analysis Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Bitrate Range 1000 to 10E 9 Increment 100E 3 RST 800E 6 Default unit bps Usage Asynchronous com...

Page 2390: ...US m DDR RESult FRAMe n FLD o FVAL Returns the formatted value of the field with the selected field number within the frame with the selected frame number for the selected serial bus Suffix m 1 4 n Se...

Page 2391: ...mber Return values State OK UNKNown INComplete LENGth RST OK Usage Query only BUS m DDR RESult FRAMe n FLD o STOP Returns the stop time of the field with the selected field number within the frame wit...

Page 2392: ...l bus and frame number Suffix m 1 4 n Return values NumWords Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only BUS m DDR RESult FRAMe n STARt Returns the start time of the frame with the select...

Page 2393: ...S m DDR RESult FRAMe n TYPE Returns the frame type for the selected serial bus and frame number Suffix m 1 4 n Usage Query only 24 17 28 3 Search settings There are two commands for each parameter tha...

Page 2394: ...DDR FRAMe m FLD n IMIN 2397 SEARch TRIGger DDR IOPerator 2397 SEARch TRIGger DDR FRAMe m FLD n IOPerator 2397 SEARch TRIGger DDR ERENable SearchName ErrorName Enabler SEARch TRIGger DDR ERRor m ENABl...

Page 2395: ...alue of a data pattern range if SEARch TRIGger DDR FRAMe m FLD n DOPerator is set to INRange or OORange Suffix m n Parameters DataMax Parameters for setting and query SearchName SEARch TRIGger DDR DMI...

Page 2396: ...er than Greater than or equal These conditions require one endpoint value to be set using SEARch TRIGger DDR FRAMe m FLD n DMIN INRange OORange In range out of range These conditions require a range o...

Page 2397: ...D n IMIN SearchName IndexMin SEARch TRIGger DDR FRAMe m FLD n IMIN SearchName Sets the index at which the data is to be searched or sets the start value of an index range in which the data is to be se...

Page 2398: ...SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FLD n FVAL 2398 SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FLD n STARt 2399 SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FLD n STATus 2399 SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FLD n STOP 2400 SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FL...

Page 2399: ...ame number within the search result Suffix m n Selects the field number Query parameters SearchName Return values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only...

Page 2400: ...4 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m FLD n VAL SearchName Returns the value of the field with the selected field number within the frame with...

Page 2401: ...turn values Start Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 100E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only SEARch RESult DDR FRAMe m STATe SearchName Returns the status of the frame with the selected frame nu...

Page 2402: ...superposition of repetitively sampled digital data Advanced eye diagrams which are generated by superimposing waveform slices from a multi bit acquisition To use advanced eye diagrams option R S RTO6...

Page 2403: ...hannels peak detect envelope and average waveforms are not supported Suffix m 1 4 Parameters MainSource C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 Usage Asynchronous command EYE m HORizon...

Page 2404: ...estamps are superimposed Suffix m 1 4 Parameters HorizPosition Range 100 to 100 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command EYE m HORizontal UINTerval RANGe RangeUI Sets the number...

Page 2405: ...ve EITHer RST EITHer Usage Asynchronous command EYE m TIMReference CLOCk FACTor Factor Sets a clock multiplier factor Available if EYE m TIMReference SOURce is set to CLOCk Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Fac...

Page 2406: ...TIMReference SOURce is set to CLOCk Suffix m 1 4 Parameters Level UPPer MIDDle LOWer RST MIDDle Usage Asynchronous command EYE m TIMReference CLOCk OFEStimation Executes an estimation of the signal fo...

Page 2407: ...ange 0 to 1 Increment 0 01 RST 0 5 Default unit UI Usage Asynchronous command EYE m TIMReference CLOCk SOURce SourceType Selects the source of the clock channel if EYE m TIMReference SOURce is set to...

Page 2408: ...istortion are separated Suffix m 1 4 Parameters EnabClassifier ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command Display EYE m MSLices MaxSliceCount Sets the number of waveform slices for a single acquisition...

Page 2409: ...m 1 4 Usage Event Asynchronous command EYE m DISPlay PERSistence STATe State If enabled each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration defined using EYE m DISPlay PERSi...

Page 2410: ...QUALify GATE RELative STOP 2411 EYE m QUALify GATE CURSor 2412 EYE m QUALify GATE ZDIagram 2412 EYE m QUALify GATE STATe State Enables the gate Suffix m 1 4 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Async...

Page 2411: ...Lify GATE COUPling NONE EYE2 QUALify GATE MODE ABS EYE2 QUALify GATE ABSolute STARt 0 0002 EYE2 QUALify GATE ABSolute STOP 0 0002 Usage Asynchronous command EYE m QUALify GATE RELative STARt RelativeS...

Page 2412: ...or1 Usage Asynchronous command EYE m QUALify GATE ZDIagram ZoomDiagram Selects the zoom diagram to be used for eye gating The zoom area is is used as gate Suffix m 1 4 Parameters ZoomDiagram String wi...

Page 2413: ...ST GTHan Usage Asynchronous command EYE m QUALify SIGNal LSELect LevelSelection Selects the threshold You can use the lower middle or upper reference level These levels are the reference levels that a...

Page 2414: ...s to the data signal Suffix m 1 4 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command EYE m FILTer BPATtern MODE Mode Selects which bits contribute to the eye generation Suffix m 1 4 Parameters...

Page 2415: ...don t care EYE m FILTer BPATtern SLEFt Shifts the pattern one bit to the left Suffix m 1 4 Usage Event Asynchronous command EYE m FILTer BPATtern SRIGht Shifts the pattern one bit to the right Suffix...

Page 2416: ...the eye diagram Suffix m 1 4 Parameters CommTyp ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command Results of eye EYE m RESult SLICe n COUNt 2416 EYE m RESult SLICe n LPOSition 2416 EYE m RESult SLICe n POSit...

Page 2417: ...3 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only Asynchronous command EYE m RESult TACQs Returns the total number of acquisitions accumulated into the eye Suffix m 1 4 Return values Acquisitions Range 0 to 10...

Page 2418: ...t contributed to the eye diagram Query parameters MaskTestName String parameter Return values SlicesCompleted Range 0 to 100E 24 Increment 1 RST 0 Usage Query only Asynchronous command MTESt RESult CO...

Page 2419: ...RESult VIOLation m STARt MaskTestName MTESt RESult VIOLation m STOP MaskTestName Return the start and stop time of the slice with the indicated violation Suffix m Violation index corresponds to the nu...

Page 2420: ...erlapping commands must be executed in a defined order e g to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC...

Page 2421: ...gital channel Parameters Display ON OFF DIGital m TECHnology Technology Selects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits and applies it to all digital channels The setting affect...

Page 2422: ...change of signal states due to noise for the channel group to which the indicated digital channel belongs The setting affects only the settings of the first MSO bus Bus1 You can set the hyste resis f...

Page 2423: ...ects only the settings of the first MSO bus Bus1 You can set the deskew for all buses with BUS m PARallel BIT n DESKew Suffix m 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters Deskew Range 200 0E 09 to...

Page 2424: ...DISPlay Suffix m 1 4 Selects the parallel bus Parameters Enable ON OFF RST OFF BUS m PARallel BIT n STATe Assigned Assigns the selected digital channel to the indicated bus displays it and enables the...

Page 2425: ...ects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits and applies it to all digital channels Suffix m 1 4 Selects the parallel bus Parameters Technology V15 V25 V165 V125 V09 VM13 V38 V2...

Page 2426: ...AXIMUM MAXimum ROBUST ROBust NORMAL NORMal MAXIMUM MAXimum Maximum value that is possible and useful for the signal and its settings ROBUST ROBust Different hysteresis values for falling and rising ed...

Page 2427: ...DeskewOffset Range 200E 9 to 200E 9 Increment 200E 12 RST 0 Default unit s BUS m PARallel BIT n LABel Label Sets a name for the indicated digital channel The name is displayed in the diagram For the...

Page 2428: ...RST OFF BUS m PARallel DISPlay SHBU ShowBus Shows or hides the indicated parallel bus If enabled the resulting bus signal and bus values are displayed in the diagram Suffix m 1 4 Selects the parallel...

Page 2429: ...m 1 2 Selects the parallel bus The clocked bus is available on parallel buses 1 and 2 Parameters ClockSource D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Clock channel RST D1 BUS m PARallel...

Page 2430: ...n 1 5 Parameters ShowDecodeTable ON OFF RST OFF BUS m PARallel DECTable n COUNt Returns the number of clock edges in the decode table Suffix m 1 4 n 1 5 Usage Query only BUS m PARallel DECTable n DATA...

Page 2431: ...igger 2433 Width trigger 2434 Timeout trigger 2435 Setup Hold trigger 2436 State trigger 2437 Pattern trigger 2437 Serial pattern trigger 2440 24 18 4 1 General commands TRIGger m SOURce SELect 2431 T...

Page 2432: ...ignal connected to the External Trigger Input For this source only the analog edge trigger is available SBUS Serial bus D0 D15 Digital channels option R S RTO6 B1 See also Chapter 24 18 4 Trigger sett...

Page 2433: ...pr TRIGger m PARallel TIMeout EXPRession DEFine LogicalExpr TRIGger m PARallel STATe EXPRession DEFine LogicalExpr TRIGger m PARallel PATTern EXPRession DEFine LogicalExpr TRIGger m PARallel SPATtern...

Page 2434: ...is true When triggering on a negative pulse the trigger event occurs on the low to high transition of the pulse if the timing condition is true Parameters Polarity POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POSitiv...

Page 2435: ...el WIDTh RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide The width is set with TRIGger m PARallel WIDTh WIDTh Parameters WidthDelta Range 0 to 432 Increment 600E 12 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Asynchronous command 2...

Page 2436: ...el SETHold HTIMe 2436 TRIGger m PARallel SETHold STIMe 2437 TRIGger m PARallel SETHold CSOurce EDGE ClockEdge Sets the edge of the clock signal The crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold...

Page 2437: ...RIGger m PARallel STATe BIT 0 15 2437 TRIGger m PARallel STATe CSOurce EDGE Slope Sets the edge of the clock signal The crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold defines the time at which t...

Page 2438: ...igger event occurs when the pattern comes false during the specified time limit Use TRIGger m PARallel PATTern WIDTh RANGe TRIGger m PARallel PATTern WIDTh WIDTh and TRIGger m PARallel PATTern WIDTh D...

Page 2439: ...en the pattern comes false before or after the given time range The time limit definition is the same as for WITHin range SHORter LONGer Triggers when the pattern comes false before or after the given...

Page 2440: ...ts the edge of the clock signal The bit value is determined at the crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold Parameters ClockEdge POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POSitive Usage Asynchronous co...

Page 2441: ...008 50 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 1000 4 Number of values per sample interval For digital data the result is 1 1 Suffix m 0 15 Number of the digital channel Usage Query only DIGita...

Page 2442: ...y Firmware software V 2 40 BUS m PARallel DATA VALues Returns the data of the indicated parallel bus Requirements BUS m PARallel STATe is set to ON BUS m PARallel DISPlay SHBU is set to ON Number form...

Page 2443: ...Gen1 Gen2 and applies them to Gen2 Gen1 Suffix m 1 2 Usage Event WGENerator m ENABle State Enables the waveform generator and outputs the waveform Suffix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF WGENerator m SO...

Page 2444: ...ator Suffix m 1 2 Parameters FunctionType SINusoid SQUare RAMP DC PULSe SINC CARDiac GAUSs LORNtz EXPRise EXPFall SINC Cardial sine RST SINusoid WGENerator m FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of...

Page 2445: ...ult unit WGENerator m FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle SquareDutyCycle Sets the duty cycle for the generated square waveform Suffix m 1 2 Parameters SquareDutyCycle Range 0 01 to 99 99 at minimum frequency actu...

Page 2446: ...Dulation PWM FREQuency 2451 WGENerator m MODulation PWM SYMMetry 2451 WGENerator m MODulation PWM FUNCtion 2451 WGENerator m MODulation TYPE ModulationType Sets the modulation type Suffix m 1 2 Parame...

Page 2447: ...centage of time the ramp modulation waveform is rising for amplitude modulation if WGENerator m MODulation TYPE is set to AM Suffix m 1 2 Parameters RampSymmetry Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST 50 Defa...

Page 2448: ...M DCYCle SquareDutyCycle Sets the duty cycle of a square waveform for frequency modulation if WGENerator m MODulation TYPE is set to FM Suffix m 1 2 Parameters SquareDutyCycle Range 10 to 90 Increment...

Page 2449: ...2 Parameters RampSymmetry Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST 50 Default unit WGENerator m MODulation FM FUNCtion SignalType Sets the type of the modulation signal for the frequency modulation if WGENerato...

Page 2450: ...ncy set with WGENerator m MODulation FSK FONE and the modulation frequency set with WGENerator m MODulation FSK FTWO Suffix m 1 2 Parameters Rate Range 1E 3 to 1E 6 Increment 1 RST 1000 Default unit H...

Page 2451: ...ampSymmetry Sets the symmetry the percentage of time the ramp modulation waveform is rising for pulse width modulation if WGENerator m MODulation TYPE is set to PWM Suffix m 1 2 Parameters RampSymmetr...

Page 2452: ...T 1E 3 Default unit s WGENerator m SWEep FEND StopFrequency Sets the stop frequency of the sweep range Suffix m 1 2 Parameters StopFrequency Range 1E 3 to 100E 6 Increment 1 RST 1E 6 Default unit Hz 2...

Page 2453: ...vedWfmSrc WFM1 WFM2 WFM3 WFM4 RST WFM1 Example WGENerator1 ARBGen MULTichannel NAME ArbMultichannelCurve_2017 02 16_01 bin WGENerator1 ARBGen MULTichannel IMPort WF1 WGENerator1 ARBGen MULTichannel OP...

Page 2454: ...form files see WGENerator m ARBGen MULTichannel OPEN Suffix m 1 2 Parameters FilePath WGENerator m ARBGen OPEN Loads the arbitrary waveform that is selected with the WGENerator m ARBGen NAME command T...

Page 2455: ...ignSrc NONE C1W1 C1W2 C1W3 C2W1 C2W2 C2W3 C3W1 C3W2 C3W3 C4W1 C4W2 C4W3 R1 R2 R3 R4 DIFF1 DIFF2 COMMON1 COMMON2 RST NONE WGENerator m ARBGen SRATe SampleRate Sets the sample rate for the arbitrary wav...

Page 2456: ...r HLEVel 2457 PGENerator PRESet 2457 PGENerator RUNMode 2457 PGENerator RUNSingle 2457 PGENerator BITRate BitRate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second for the pattern generator Parameters Bi...

Page 2457: ...ch the signal of the pattern generator will be output after the trigger event Parameters RunMode SINGle CONTinuous RST CONTinuous PGENerator RUNSingle Executes a single period of the pattern generator...

Page 2458: ...for the currently selected load WGENerator m OUTPut LOAD If the load is changed the value of the amplitude is adapted to this new setting Suffix m 1 2 Parameters Amplitude Range 0 01 to 12 Increment...

Page 2459: ...1 2 Parameters Low Range 6 to 5 99 Increment 0 1 RST 0 5 Default unit V WGENerator m VOLTage OFFSet Offset Sets a voltage offset Suffix m 1 2 Parameters Offset Range 5 995 to 5 995 Increment 0 1 RST...

Page 2460: ...Return values LevelAbs Range 0 to 12 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit V Usage Query only WGENerator m MODulation NLPCent LevelPct Sets the noise level in percentage of the amplitude Suffix m 1 2 Para...

Page 2461: ...Usage Event GENerator ALIGnment DC RESult DATE Queries the date of the last performed DC offset alignment Return values Date Usage Query only GENerator ALIGnment DC RESult TIME Queries the time of th...

Page 2462: ...ected set of parameters amplitude frequency and noise Suffix m 1 2 Parameters CplEnabSt ON OFF RST OFF WGENerator m COUPling AMPLitude CoupleAmplitude Enables the coupling of all amplitude parameters...

Page 2463: ...of the generators Suffix m 1 2 Parameters CoupleNoise ON OFF RST OFF WGENerator m COUPling AWForm CplArbitraryWfm Enables the coupling of the arbitrary waveform of the generators Suffix m 1 2 Paramet...

Page 2464: ...execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used after the command or a command set For more information see www rohde schwarz com rc via scpi chapter Command Sequence and Synchro...

Page 2465: ...the signal Parameters DutyCycle For repetition rates 5 MHz the value is fixed at 50 Range 10 to 90 Increment 10 RST 50 Default unit Usage Asynchronous command PSRC CLOCkmode ClockMode Sets the depende...

Page 2466: ...on page 1259 24 20 2 1 Calibration TDRT DEFault 2466 TDRT CALibration OPEN NAME 2466 TDRT CALibration OPEN EXECute 2466 TDRT TYPE 2467 TDRT PULSe OUT 2467 TDRT PULSe REFerence 2467 TDRT SLENgth 2467 T...

Page 2467: ...ard or DUT Parameters Channel C1W1 C2W1 C3W1 C4W1 RST C2W1 Usage Asynchronous command TDRT PULSe REFerence Channel Sets the channel to which the Ref connector of the pulse source is connected Paramete...

Page 2468: ...data 2468 TDRT BW 2469 TDRT DOMain 2469 TDRT PERMittivity 2469 TDRT SIGNal m STATe 2469 TDRT SIGNal m SCALe 2470 TDRT SIGNal m OFFSet 2470 TDRT SIGNal m POSition 2470 TDRT SIGNal m DATA HEADer 2471 TD...

Page 2469: ...the permittivity with TDRT PERMittivity Parameters OutputDomain TIME MDIStance INDistance MDIStance distance in m IDIStance distance in inch RST TIME Usage Asynchronous command TDRT PERMittivity Perm...

Page 2470: ...iv Usage Asynchronous command TDRT SIGNal m OFFSet Offset Set the offset of the indicated TDR TDT signal Suffix m 1 3 See TDRT SIGNal m STATe on page 2469 Parameters Offset Range 1E 12 to 100E 12 Incr...

Page 2471: ...a of the waveform points for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The data can be used in MATLAB for example Without parameters the complete waveform is retrieved Using the off...

Page 2472: ...mpling settings To switch on the input channels use CHANnel m STATe Some of the commands in the following chapter are asynchronous An overlapping or asynchronous command does not automatically finish...

Page 2473: ...1 4 Parameters IQInputType REAL COMPlex REAL Real RF signal One real RF signal requires one input channel thus up to four real signals can be recorded in parallel COMPlex Complex I Q signal in baseban...

Page 2474: ...mand IQ BWIDth Returns the filter bandwidth See also IQ RBWidth on page 2474 Return values AbsBw Range 40 to 8E 9 RST 4E 9 Default unit Hz Usage Query only Asynchronous command IQ SRATe SampleRate Set...

Page 2475: ...Mode on page 2473 is set to RFIF Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters IQCarrierFreq Range 10E 3 to 10E 9 Increment 100 RST 1E 6 Default unit Hz Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m IQ SBR...

Page 2476: ...pper sideband in inverse position ILOWer Lower sideband in inverse position RST NUPPer Usage Asynchronous command CHANnel m IQ WARNing STATe Returns ON if the sampling setup results in an unfavorable...

Page 2477: ...568E 006 0 0001013283545 1 5832555391E 006 0 00014297277085 2 233616442E 006 0 000192677413 3 0105845781E 006 0 00020517286612 3 2058260331E 006 0 002648930531 4 1546467401E 005 0 0028401580639 4 4135...

Page 2478: ...ommand TRIGger m NFC BITRate Bitrate Sets the bit rate of the signal For NFC A and NFC B the bit rate is always 106 kBit per second For NFC F the bit rate can be either 212 or 424 kBit per second Suff...

Page 2479: ...ey must be serviced sequentially To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used after the command or a command set For more information see www rohde sc...

Page 2480: ...he period is calculated as the time dif ference between two consecutive clock edges of the same polarity 43 DRATe Data rate Frequency of the clock signal If no clock signal is available it is recovere...

Page 2481: ...and MEASurement m JITTer PULSe JittPlsPola Sets the polarity of pulses for which the pulse width is measured to obtain the cycle cycle width and the cycle cycle duty cycle The command is available for...

Page 2482: ...e MEASurement m MAIN and or MEASurement m ADDitional are set to measurements TIE UINTerval DRATe Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters JitterCDRMod...

Page 2483: ...data rate SDR signals with bit start at the positive clock edge NEGative The negative clock slope can be used for example for SDR sig nals with bit start at the negative clock edge EITHer For clock e...

Page 2484: ...nd or MEASurement m ADDitional are set to measurements SKWDelay SKWPhase Suffix m 1 10 See Selection of the measurement group MEASurement m on page 1479 Parameters JittskwRelt MATChing INVerse MATChin...

Page 2485: ...Jitter m SIGNal CLFFactor 2487 ADVJitter m SIGNal CFEStimation 2488 ADVJitter m SIGNal CLFRequency 2488 ADVJitter m SIGNal CLOFfset 2488 ADVJitter m SIGNal DATRate 2488 ADVJitter m SIGNal SAMTime 2489...

Page 2486: ...a quick advanced jitter analysis Suffix m 1 2 Usage Event ADVJitter m SIGNal BITRate NominalBitRate Suffix m 1 2 Parameters NominalBitRate Range 1000 to 10E 9 Increment 10 RST 1E 9 Default unit bps A...

Page 2487: ...4 M5 M6 M7 M8 R1 R2 R3 R4 DIFF1 DIFF2 COMMON1 COMMON2 ADVJitter m SIGNal EDGE EdgeType The clock edge sets the point in time when the state of the data signal is checked Suffix m 1 2 Parameters EdgeTy...

Page 2488: ...m 1 2 Parameters Frequency Range 1000 to 10E 9 Increment 10 RST 1E 9 Default unit Hz ADVJitter m SIGNal CLOFfset Offset Sets a clock offset for the explicit clock signal Suffix m 1 2 Parameters Offse...

Page 2489: ...0 01 RST 0 5 Default unit UI ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE COUPling ModeType Sets if the gate is coupled to the zoom or cursor Suffix m 1 2 Parameters ModeType NONE CURSor ZOOM RST NONE ADVJitter m SIGNal G...

Page 2490: ...ues percent or absolute Suffix m 1 2 Parameters ModeType ABS REL RST ABS ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE RANGe RELative STARt StartValue Sets the relative start of the gate area in percent if ADVJitter m SIGN...

Page 2491: ...e available only if the instrument is able to support its maximum nominal bit rate Suffix m 1 2 Parameters SerStandardType CUSTOM USB20 USB31GEN1 USB31GEN2 DISPPORT11 DISPPORT12 FIBCHAN1 FIBCHAN2 FIBC...

Page 2492: ...ram The calculated value is the time difference between the two distributions center points 7 TJ Measures the total Time Interval Error TIE of the input signal It is defined as the time between each t...

Page 2493: ...oise or other bounded uncorrelated noise is the combined effect of both noise types If periodic components are activated RN OBUN are displayed otherwise RN BUN RN O BUN is typically used if track or s...

Page 2494: ...del parameters Usually this noise component follows a Gaussian probability distribution The algorithm computes the standard deviation and the peak peak value of the level error LE caused by RN within...

Page 2495: ...VJitter m RESult STATistics State Enables statistics measurements for the advanced jitter analysis Suffix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF ADVJitter m RESult STEPresponse State Enables a step res...

Page 2496: ...Suffix m 1 2 n 1 29 See Table 24 20 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF ADVJitter m RESult UNIT UnitType Selects between the absolute and relative unit for the displayed results Suffix m 1 2 Parameters U...

Page 2497: ...AKpeak peak to peak value of the long term measurement results WFMCount number of waveforms acquisitions the measurement is based on STDDev standard deviation of the long term measurement results Suff...

Page 2498: ...0 Usage Query only ADVJitter m RESult PERiodic n FREQuency Returns the frequency of the selected periodic component Suffix m 1 2 n Number of periodic components Return values FreqValue Range 0 to 1E 1...

Page 2499: ...Event Asynchronous command ADVJitter m DCOMposition CLEJitcomp Clears all selected jitter components Suffix m 1 2 Usage Event Asynchronous command ADVJitter m DCOMposition SELJitcomp Selects all jitte...

Page 2500: ...g falling or both This setting is mostly relevant for histograms Suffix m 1 2 Parameters LevelType HIGH LOW BOTH RST BOTH Bathtub ADVJitter m DCOMposition TARBer 2500 ADVJitter m RESult BATHtub 2501 A...

Page 2501: ...itter DDJ and random jitter RJ components Suffix m 1 2 Parameters BathtubType DDJ DDJP DDJB DDJO TJ DDJRj TJ Total jitter DDJRJ Data dependent jitter and random jitter RST TJ ADVJitter m RESult PJ Sta...

Page 2502: ...2 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON ADVJitter m RESult OBUN State If enabled the other bounded uncorrelated noise components are considered for the noise bathtub Suffix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF RST...

Page 2503: ...y for the deterministic jitter DDP components or the data dependent jitter DD components Suffix m 1 2 Parameters SyntheticEyeTyp DD DDPH DDPV DDP RST DDP Diagram ADVJitter m RESult VERTical HBINs 2504...

Page 2504: ...nd a ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n OFFSet Suffix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON ADVJitter m RESult VERTical BMTYpe MeasType Selects the basic measurement type to apply the vertical scale to Su...

Page 2505: ...easurement scale of the noise histogram and track is set automati cally If disabled you can manually set a ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n SCALe and a ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n OFFSet Suffix m 1...

Page 2506: ...ult unit s div ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n OFFSet Offset Sets the offset for the selected component You can set separate offset values for n 1 symbol rate n 2 symbol duration n 4 16 sets only one...

Page 2507: ...ix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF ADVJitter m DCOMposition JINTerleaved State Displays interleaved histogram values Suffix m 1 2 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 24 22 2 3 Advanced settings ADVJ...

Page 2508: ...ate Runs an estimate of the step response for the advanced jitter analysis measurements Suffix m 1 2 Usage Event Asynchronous command ADVJitter m DCOMposition POSStep Position Sets the steps position...

Page 2509: ...higher than the set value they are considered for the random jitter component Suffix m 1 2 Parameters MaxNumber Range 0 to 10 Increment 1 RST 5 ADVJitter m DCOMposition NVERtical MaxNumber Sets the ma...

Page 2510: ...PLL FF PLLStart CFRequency Constant frequency CDR uses the nominal bit rate to generate the clock signal The method assumes that the frequency of the signal is constant during the complete acquisition...

Page 2511: ...HAN4 HDMI12 HDMI14 HDMI20 PCIGEN1 PCIGEN2 SATAGEN1500 SATAGEN11667 SATAGEN1 SATAGEN2500 SATAGEN21667 SATAGEN2 SATAGEN3500 SATAGEN31667 SATAGEN3 SASGEN1 SASGEN2 XAUI RST CUSTOM Usage Asynchronous comma...

Page 2512: ...Gbps available instrument band width Increment 10 RST 1E 9 Default unit bps Usage Asynchronous command CDR SOFTware m ESLope Edge Selects the edges of the data stream that are used for the clock recov...

Page 2513: ...select when the CDR algorithm returns clock edges Suffix m 1 2 Number of the software CDR setup Parameters Results ALL AISYnc ALL All clock edges are used AISYnc The clock edges of the synchronization...

Page 2514: ...mmand CDR SOFTware m PLL RELBwidth PLLRelBw Sets the relative bandwidth that is the ratio of the nominal bit rate to the PLL band width Suffix m 1 2 Number of the software CDR setup Parameters PLLRelB...

Page 2515: ...t period Suffix m 1 2 Parameters UntIntvlOffs Range 0 to 1 Increment 0 01 RST 0 5 Default unit UI Usage Asynchronous command 24 22 4 Clock data recovery hardware based option R S RTO6 K13 CDR HARDware...

Page 2516: ...te Increment 10 RST 1E 9 Default unit bps Usage Asynchronous command CDR HARDware ESLope Edge Selects the edges of the data stream that are used for the clock recovery Either Both positive and negativ...

Page 2517: ...RelBw Range 500 to 3000 Increment 1 RST 1667 Usage Asynchronous command CDR HARDware PLL DAMPing DampingFactor Sets the damping factor which is only relevant for second order PLL Parameters DampingFac...

Page 2518: ...oltage for the trigger level Range Depends on vertical scale channel offset and other settings The trigger level must be within the current display range Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Example TR...

Page 2519: ...riod Parameters UntIntvlOffs Range 0 to 1 Increment 0 01 RST 0 5 Default unit UI Usage Asynchronous command 24 22 6 Eye mask testing The eye mask testing is available if the option R S RTO6 K12 is act...

Page 2520: ...the channel for the current source Parameters CurrentSource CHAN1 CHANnel1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHANnel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 CHAN1 CHANnel1 CHAN2 CHANnel2 CHAN3 CHAN nel3 CHAN4 CHANnel4 RST CURRent1 CHAN2...

Page 2521: ...kew setup Parameters OverwriteCurrSkew ON OFF RST ON POWer DESKew TIME Queries the result of the auto deskew Return values AutoDeskewOffs Range 100E 9 to 100E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only P...

Page 2522: ...4 POWer REPort FILE NEW 2524 POWer REPort FILE SAVE 2524 POWer REPort TEST ADD 2524 POWer REPort TEST INSert 2524 POWer REPort TEST REMove 2524 POWer REPort INVert 2525 POWer REPort TEST DSEA 2525 POW...

Page 2523: ...at the title page of a report if the title page is inclu ded in the report Parameters String POWer REPort FONT COLO FontColor Sets the font color Parameters FontColor Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1...

Page 2524: ...String containing path and file name POWer REPort FILE DELete Deletes the selected report file Usage Event POWer REPort FILE NEW Creates a new report file Usage Event POWer REPort FILE SAVE Saves the...

Page 2525: ...Transient Response SPEC Spectrum Index Usage Setting only POWer REPort INVert InvertScreenshotClr POWer REPort TEST DSEA MeasType POWer REPort TEST ISE MeasType POWer REPort TEST SEA MeasType POWer R...

Page 2526: ...which the reports are saved Setting parameters DirectoryPath Parameters for setting and query MeasType QUAL RUSH HARM MODU DONR SLEW SOA TURN SWIT EFF RIPP TRANS SPEC POWer REPort TEST COMMent MeasTyp...

Page 2527: ...QUALity RESult CURRent RMS 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer APParent 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer PFACtor 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer PHASe 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer REACtive 2528 POWer QU...

Page 2528: ...t to the report list Usage Event POWer QUALity RESult CURRent CREStfactor POWer QUALity RESult CURRent FREQuency POWer QUALity RESult CURRent PEAK POWer QUALity RESult CURRent RMS POWer QUALity RESult...

Page 2529: ...m STARt 2530 POWer INRush GATE m STOP 2530 POWer INRush GATE m VALue 2530 POWer INRush MAXCurrent 2530 POWer INRush TRIGger 2530 POWer INRush REPort ADD 2531 POWer INRush ADD Adds a gate Usage Event...

Page 2530: ...6 Default unit s POWer INRush GATE m VALue Value Returns the value of the inrush current Suffix m Parameters Value Range 1000 to 1000 Increment 0 RST 0 Default unit A POWer INRush MAXCurrent MaxExpCur...

Page 2531: ...Quency n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics RESult m MAXValue n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics RESult m STDValue n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics RESult m VALue n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics STAN 2533 POWer HARMonics...

Page 2532: ...Monics EXECute Starts the current harmonic measurement Usage Event POWer HARMonics REPort ADD Adds the result to the report list Usage Event POWer HARMonics RESult m STDinuse Returns the used standard...

Page 2533: ...TDISP NOVOLTDISP RST NOVOLTDISP Example POW HARM STAN RTC POW HARM EVAL REVISED POW HARM VOLT NOVOLTDISP Selects an evaluation with the revised current law and no volt age display 24 23 7 Modulation a...

Page 2534: ...s the result to the report list Usage Event POWer MODulation RESult ACTual MeasType POWer MODulation RESult AVG MeasType POWer MODulation RESult EVTCount MeasType POWer MODulation RESult NPEak MeasTyp...

Page 2535: ...n TYPE AnalysisType Sets the type of measurement Parameters AnalysisType TURNON CONT RST CONT 24 23 8 Dynamic ON resistance POWer DONRes AUTO 2535 POWer DONRes AVG 2535 POWer DONRes EXECute 2536 POWer...

Page 2536: ...urns the the dynamic on resistance value Return values Resistance Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 RST 0 Default unit Usage Query only 24 23 9 Slew rate POWer SLEWrate SOURce 2537 POWer SLEWrate AUTO 2537 POW...

Page 2537: ...ers Autoscale AUTO MANUAL RST MANUAL POWer SLEWrate AVGDeriv AvgDerivative Activates or deactivates average Parameters AvgDerivative ON OFF RST ON POWer SLEWrate EXECute Starts the slew rate measureme...

Page 2538: ...rms after which the envelope and average eval uation restarts The setting is relevant if ACQuire ARESet MODE is set to WFMS Parameters NofWaveforms Range 2 to 16777215 Increment 10 RST 1000 Usage Asyn...

Page 2539: ...m measurement results Query parameters MeasType MIN MAX Usage Query only 24 23 10 S O A POWer SOA EXECute 2539 POWer SOA LINear ADD 2539 POWer SOA LOGarithmic ADD 2539 POWer SOA LINear COUNt 2540 POWe...

Page 2540: ...y POWer SOA LINear INSert GateIndex POWer SOA LOGarithmic INSert GateIndex Inserts a point Setting parameters GateIndex Usage Setting only POWer SOA LINear POINt m CURRent Amp POWer SOA LOGarithmic PO...

Page 2541: ...le Sets the scale for the measurement Parameters Scale LOG LINEAR RST LOG POWer SOA SWITch Switch Switches between linear and logarithmic scale Parameters Switch LOGLINEAR LINEARLOG RST LOGLINEAR 24 2...

Page 2542: ...1E 6 to 1E 6 Increment 1E 3 RST 10 Default unit V POWer ONOFf DTOFf ACTrigLevOff POWer ONOFf DTON ACTrigLevOn POWer ONOFf DSOFf StateLevelOff POWer ONOFf DSON StateLevelOn Sets the percentage of the...

Page 2543: ...ult unit s POWer ONOFf TYPE MeasType Selects the measurement type Parameters MeasType TON TOFF TON Turn on measurement TOFF Turn off measurement RST TON 24 23 12 Switching loss POWer SWITching AUTO 25...

Page 2544: ...hing RESult POWer AVG 2546 POWer SWITching RESult POWer EVTCount 2546 POWer SWITching RESult POWer NPEak 2546 POWer SWITching RESult POWer PPEak 2546 POWer SWITching RESult POWer RMS 2546 POWer SWITch...

Page 2545: ...OWer SWITching GATE TON STARt T0 POWer SWITching GATE TON STOP T1 Sets the value for the respective cursor Parameters T1 POWer SWITching RESult ENERgy ACTual MeasType POWer SWITching RESult ENERgy AVG...

Page 2546: ...term measurement results EVTCount number of measurement results in the long term measurement NPEak negative peak value of the long term measurement results PPEak positive peak value of the long term m...

Page 2547: ...iency RESult m WFMCount Return the specified statistic result of the specified measurement type ACTual current measurement result AVG average of the long term measurement results EVTCount number of me...

Page 2548: ...2551 POWer RIPPle RESult MINimum PPEak 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult MINimum RMS 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult MINimum STDDev 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult MINimum WFMCount 2551 POWer RIPPle RESult NDCYcle ACTual 2...

Page 2549: ...2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev NPEak 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev PPEak 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev RMS 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev STDDev 2554 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev WFMCount 2554 PO...

Page 2550: ...erm measurement results PPEak positive peak value of the long term measurement results RMS RMS value of the long term measurement results STDDev standard deviation of the long term measurement results...

Page 2551: ...MCount VoltageMeasType Return the specified statistic result for the minimum value of the waveform ACTual current measurement result AVG average of the long term measurement results EVTCount number of...

Page 2552: ...VoltageMeasType POWer RIPPle RESult PDCYcle AVG VoltageMeasType POWer RIPPle RESult PDCYcle EVTCount VoltageMeasType POWer RIPPle RESult PDCYcle NPEak VoltageMeasType POWer RIPPle RESult PDCYcle PPEa...

Page 2553: ...long term measurement results Query parameters VoltageMeasType VOLTage CURRent RST VOLTage Return values Result Statistic result Usage Query only POWer RIPPle RESult PERiod ACTual VoltageMeasType POWe...

Page 2554: ...current measurement result AVG average of the long term measurement results EVTCount number of measurement results in the long term measurement NPEak negative peak value of the long term measurement r...

Page 2555: ...Autoscale AUTO MANUAL RST MANUAL POWer TRANsient EXECute Starts the transient response measurement Usage Event POWer TRANsient FREQuency SmpsFrequency Sets the SMPS switching frequency Parameters Smps...

Page 2556: ...value Parameters ExpHighOutputSignLev Range 1000 to 1000 Increment 1E 3 RST 1 Default unit V POWer TRANsient SIGLow ExpLowOutputSignLev Sets the expected signal low voltage value Parameters ExpLowOutp...

Page 2557: ...OWer SPECtrum EXECute 2557 POWer SPECtrum FREQuency 2557 POWer SPECtrum REPort ADD 2558 POWer SPECtrum RCOunt 2558 POWer SPECtrum RESult m FREQuency 2558 POWer SPECtrum RESult m LEVel 2558 POWer SPECt...

Page 2558: ...x m 1 Return values Level Usage Query only 24 24 Deembedding option R S RTO6 K121 Some of the commands in the following chapter are asynchronous An overlapping or asynchronous command does not automat...

Page 2559: ...of the measurement setup on the measured signal Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel that is configured for deembedding Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage Asynchronous command DEEMbedding m ADD Index...

Page 2560: ...hronous command DEEMbedding m CCOunt Returns the total number of components in the measurement setup including disabled components Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel that is configured for deembedding R...

Page 2561: ...RESet Sets the complete deembedding configuration to the default values Use this command always before setting up the deembedding because RST does not affect the deem bedding settings Suffix m 1 4 Sel...

Page 2562: ...ing m NAME Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel that is configured for deembedding Usage Event DEEMbedding m DELete Deletes the deembedding configuration file specified with DEEMbedding m NAME Suffix m 1...

Page 2563: ...for deembedding n 1 n Index of the component in the measurement setup The DUT has index 1 the probe has index n Parameters Type PROBe FIXTure CABLe DUT ADAPter INPut OTHer RTZA10 RTZA16 RTZA17 PP PC R...

Page 2564: ...up The DUT has index 1 the probe has index n Return values TotalPorts ONE TWO THRee FOUR RST TWO Usage Query only Asynchronous command 24 24 3 2 DUT settings DEEMbedding m COMPonent n MODE 2564 DEEMbe...

Page 2565: ...ue OFF ON Usage Asynchronous command DEEMbedding m COMPonent n LOAD IMPedance Value Shows the source impedance of the DUT If an R S RT ZM probe is connected the value depends on the selected probe mod...

Page 2566: ...e the used submodule semi rigid cables or none Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel to which the probe is connected n 30 R S RT ZMA30 or 40 R S RT ZMA40 Parameters Value D16 D25 D45 D75 NONE SRCS For R S...

Page 2567: ...are cables and adapters which are described by s2p files In case of a 4 port setup 2 cables or 2 adapters are used If they are identi cal for example when a matched pair cable is used they can be des...

Page 2568: ...of the S parameter file and load the S parame ters See also S Parameters Filetype on page 1208 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel that is configured for deembedding n 1 Selects the component The DUT ha...

Page 2569: ...dding is useful for the defined effective bandwidth Suffix m 1 4 Selects the channel that is configured for deembedding Return values MaxFilterAtt Range 1E 9 to 1E 9 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit...

Page 2570: ...warz com rc via scpi chapter Command Sequence and Synchro nization Chapter 24 3 Programming examples on page 1259 DIAGnostic SERVice WFAModel 2570 DIAGnostic SERVice WFASeries 2570 DIAGnostic SERVice...

Page 2571: ...Libration TIME Returns the time of the last selfalignment Return values Time Usage Query only Asynchronous command CALibration RESult Returns the result of the last selfalignment and the current align...

Page 2572: ...ontrol status reporting system on page 1245 STATus OPERation register 2572 STATus QUEStionable registers 2573 24 26 1 STATus OPERation register STATus OPERation commands provide information on the act...

Page 2573: ...mmary bit bit 7 of the status byte The status byte can be used to create a service request Parameters Enable Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus OPERation ENABle 5 The ALIGnment event bit 0 an...

Page 2574: ...75 STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition 2575 STATus QUEStionable MARGin CONDition 2575 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition 2575 STATus QUEStionable DEEMbedding CONDition 2575 STATus QUEStionable LA...

Page 2575: ...MARGin NTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable DEEMbedding NTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable LAMPlitude NTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable ZVCoverload...

Page 2576: ...1 in the enable part and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition occurs in the summary bit and is reported to the next higher level Parameters Value Bit mask in decimal repr...

Page 2577: ...sition Value STATus QUEStionable ADCState PTRansition Value STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition Value STATus QUEStionable MARGin PTRansition Value STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition Value STA...

Page 2578: ...g start mode AUTO Then restart your instrument Tracing will be started automatically during the restart using the already configured settings If you use an XML file as trace file ensure that tracing i...

Page 2579: ...mat ASCii XML TRACe REMote MODE FILE SIZE FileSize Sets the maximum size of the remote trace file Parameters FileSize Integer value TRACe REMote MODE FILE STARtmode StartMode Defines how the remote tr...

Page 2580: ...LTer Input Output Error Trigger DeviceClear StatusRegister Connection RemoteLocalEvents Locking Defines the content of the remote trace file Parameters Input ON OFF Input data Output ON OFF Output dat...

Page 2581: ...TRACe REMote MODE FILE RPC Enable Enables and disables output of rpc calls to remote trace Parameters Enable ON OFF TRACe REMote MODE FILE PARSer Enable Enables and disables output of parser transitio...

Page 2582: ...ions Legacy command Replaced by Comment I2C TRIGger m I2C MODE TRIGger m I2C TYPE on page 1679 Replaced since FW 5 20 SPI TRIGger m SPI MODE SEARch TRIGger SPI MODE TRIGger m SPI TYPE on page 1713 SEA...

Page 2583: ...2537 ACQuire ARESet TIME 1335 ACQuire ARESet TIME 2538 ACQuire AVAilable 1461 ACQuire CDTA 1332 ACQuire COUNt 1334 ACQuire CURRent 1437 ACQuire DRESolution 2430 ACQuire INTerpolate 1332 ACQuire MUWave...

Page 2584: ...m RESult COMPonents n OFFSet 2506 ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n SCALe 2505 ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n SPECtrum 2496 ADVJitter m RESult COMPonents n STATistics MAXPeakpeak 2496 ADVJitter m RESul...

Page 2585: ...GE 2487 ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE COUPling 2489 ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE CURSor 2489 ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE RANGe ABSolute STARt 2489 ADVJitter m SIGNal GATE RANGe ABSolute STOP 2490 ADVJitter m SIGNal...

Page 2586: ...e n ACKState 1812 BUS m CAN FRAMe n ACKValue 1812 BUS m CAN FRAMe n BITRate 1813 BUS m CAN FRAMe n BSEPosition 1815 BUS m CAN FRAMe n BYTE o STATe 1816 BUS m CAN FRAMe n BYTE o VALue 1816 BUS m CAN FR...

Page 2587: ...1777 BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o IMAX 1777 BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o IMIN 1777 BUS m CMSB FILTer FRAMe n FLD o IOPerator 1777 BUS m CMSB FILTer FRENable 1775 BUS m CMSB FRAMe n APPend 1764...

Page 2588: ...3 BUS m CMSB RESult n CELL o VALue 1784 BUS m CMSB RESult n CONE 1781 BUS m CMSB RESult n CTHRee 1781 BUS m CMSB RESult n CTWO 1781 BUS m CMSB RESult n STARt 1780 BUS m CMSB RESult n STATe 1779 BUS m...

Page 2589: ...d 2387 BUS m DDR STRBe HYSTeresis 2388 BUS m DDR STRBe SOURce 2388 BUS m DDR STRBe THReshold 2389 BUS m DPHY CONFig 2243 BUS m DPHY CP HSPeed HYSTeresis 2247 BUS m DPHY CP HSPeed THReshold 2247 BUS m...

Page 2590: ...BUS m DPHY THCoupling 2245 BUS m DPHY THPReset 2245 BUS m DPHY VARiant 2245 BUS m EBTB BITDetermi 2336 BUS m EBTB BITRate 2332 BUS m EBTB DIFFerential SOURce 2332 BUS m EBTB DIFFerential THRHigh 2332...

Page 2591: ...73 BUS m EXPResult SAVE 1673 BUS m EXPResult TIME 1673 BUS m FAUToset 1671 BUS m FLXRay BITRate 1869 BUS m FLXRay CHTYpe 1869 BUS m FLXRay FCOunt 1878 BUS m FLXRay FRAMe n ADID 1881 BUS m FLXRay FRAMe...

Page 2592: ...ATe 2098 BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n STOP 2099 BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n TYPE 2100 BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n WORD o TYPE 2102 BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n WORD o VALue 2102 BUS m HBTO RESult FRAMe n WORD o...

Page 2593: ...747 BUS m I2S FOFFset 1742 BUS m I2S FRAMe n LEFT STATe 1749 BUS m I2S FRAMe n LEFT VALue 1748 BUS m I2S FRAMe n RIGHt STATe 1749 BUS m I2S FRAMe n RIGHt VALue 1748 BUS m I2S FRAMe n STARt 1748 BUS m...

Page 2594: ...OCk SOURce 2040 BUS m MDIO CLOCk THReshold HIGH 2041 BUS m MDIO CLOCk THReshold LOW 2041 BUS m MDIO COUPling 2042 BUS m MDIO DATA SOURce 2041 BUS m MDIO DATA THReshold HIGH 2041 BUS m MDIO DATA THResh...

Page 2595: ...AMe n CELL o STOP 2296 BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n CELL o TYPE 2297 BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n DATA 2297 BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n FTYPe 2293 BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n INFO 2297 BUS m MPHY RESult FRAMe n...

Page 2596: ...BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n ADDR 2360 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n BITRate 2367 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n CPID 2360 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n CPS 2360 BUS m PCIE RESult PACKet n DATA 2361 BUS m PCIE RE...

Page 2597: ...PADZero 2073 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n PCTRl 2074 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n RBTRate 2074 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n SADD 2072 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n STARt 2071 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n STATe 2070 BUS m RFFE SEQuence n...

Page 2598: ...n WORD o FMISo 1719 BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o FMOSi 1720 BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o MISO 1719 BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o MOSI 1720 BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o STARt 1718 BUS m SPI FRAMe n WORD o STOP 1718 BU...

Page 2599: ...2117 BUS m TBTO MODE 2118 BUS m TBTO POLarity 2118 BUS m TBTO RDAM 2117 BUS m TBTO RDAP 2118 BUS m TBTO RDIF 2118 BUS m TBTO RESult FCOunt 2119 BUS m TBTO RESult FRAMe n BITRate 2120 BUS m TBTO RESult...

Page 2600: ...BUS m USB DMINus THReshold 2150 BUS m USB DPLus SOURce 2148 BUS m USB DPLus THReshold 2149 BUS m USB PACKet n ADDRess 2164 BUS m USB PACKet n CRC 2164 BUS m USB PACKet n DATA 2165 BUS m USB PACKet n...

Page 2601: ...AMe n FLD o STATus 2206 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o STOP 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o TYPE 2206 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n FLD o VAL 2207 BUS m USBThree RESult FRAMe n INFO 2204...

Page 2602: ...TH m FFT PHASe SCALe 1577 CALCulate MATH m FFT PHASe SUPPression 1577 CALCulate MATH m FFT PHASe THReshold 1577 CALCulate MATH m FFT PHASe UNWRap 1577 CALCulate MATH m FFT SPAN 1568 CALCulate MATH m F...

Page 2603: ...ESults 2513 CDR SOFTware m REVLockpll 2514 CDR SOFTware m SAMTime 2515 CDR SOFTware m SERStandard 2510 CDR SOFTware m SYNC 2512 CHANnel m BANDwidth 1340 CHANnel m COUPling 1337 CHANnel m CPLing 1340 C...

Page 2604: ...Nnel m WAVeform n HISTory STATe 1461 CHANnel m WAVeform n TYPE 1333 CHANnel m WAVeform n STATe 1333 CURSor m AOFF 1469 CURSor m FFT SETCenter 1478 CURSor m FFT TOCenter 1478 CURSor m FUNCtion 1469 CUR...

Page 2605: ...562 DEEMbedding m DELete 2562 DEEMbedding m MATTenuation 2569 DEEMbedding m MGAin 2569 DEEMbedding m NAME 2561 DEEMbedding m OPEN 2562 DEEMbedding m PRESet 2561 DEEMbedding m REMove 2560 DEEMbedding m...

Page 2606: ...POINt INSert 1299 DISPlay COLor PALette POINt REMove 1299 DISPlay COLor PALette POINt VALue 1299 DISPlay COLor PALette REMove 1298 DISPlay COLor SIGNal m ASSign 1297 DISPlay COLor SIGNal m COLor 1297...

Page 2607: ...am DATA 1657 EXPort HISTogram INCidence 1656 EXPort HISTogram NAME 1657 EXPort HISTogram SAVE 1657 EXPort HISTogram SELect 1656 EXPort MEASurement DATA 1660 EXPort MEASurement NAME 1659 EXPort MEASure...

Page 2608: ...E m QUALify GATE COUPling 2410 EYE m QUALify GATE CURSor 2412 EYE m QUALify GATE MODE 2410 EYE m QUALify GATE RELative STARt 2411 EYE m QUALify GATE RELative STOP 2411 EYE m QUALify GATE ZDIagram 2412...

Page 2609: ...COPy SSD 1663 HCOPy WBKG 1662 HDEFinition BWIDth 1387 HDEFinition RESolution 1387 HDEFinition STATe 1387 IQ BWIDth 2474 IQ INSRate 2473 IQ RBWidth 2474 IQ RLENgth 2474 IQ SRATe 2474 IQ STATe 2473 LAYo...

Page 2610: ...ERTical RELative STARt 1445 LAYout ZOOM VERTical RELative STOP 1445 MEASurement m ADDitional 1484 MEASurement m AMPTime ALEVel 1493 MEASurement m AMPTime ARIThmetic CONStant 1500 MEASurement m AMPTime...

Page 2611: ...RGin 1511 MEASurement m EYEJitter LCHeck n UPPer LIMit 1510 MEASurement m EYEJitter LCHeck n UPPer MARGin 1511 MEASurement m EYEJitter LCHeck n VALid 1510 MEASurement m FSRC 1482 MEASurement m GATE AB...

Page 2612: ...MEASurement m OPTical OMAMplitude RELative STOP 1519 MEASurement m OPTical UNIT 1519 MEASurement m PROTocol F2FRame FLDFrom 1540 MEASurement m PROTocol F2FRame FLDTo 1540 MEASurement m PROTocol F2FRam...

Page 2613: ...RIThmetic CUNState 1505 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic CUUNit 1505 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic CUUState 1506 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic OPERator 1506 MEASurement m SPECtrum ARIThmetic...

Page 2614: ...38 MEASurement m ENABle 1480 MMEMory ATTRibute 1646 MMEMory AUTonaming DATE 1667 MMEMory AUTonaming DEFaultpath 1667 MMEMory AUTonaming INDex 1667 MMEMory AUTonaming PREFix 1666 MMEMory AUTonaming RES...

Page 2615: ...GHlight INFinite 1317 MTESt HIGHlight STATe 1317 MTESt HIGHlight TIME 1317 MTESt LABel 1317 MTESt ONViolation BEEP 1594 MTESt ONViolation PRINt 1595 MTESt ONViolation REPort 1596 MTESt ONViolation RUN...

Page 2616: ...MTESt SOURce 1584 MTESt TOLerance 1584 MTESt WFMLupdate 1593 MTESt WFMRescale XWIDth 1593 MTESt WFMRescale YPOSition 1594 MTESt WFMRescale YSTRetch 1594 MTESt WFMRescale YWIDth 1593 MTESt STATe 1583...

Page 2617: ...m STDValue n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics RESult m VALue n VALue 2532 POWer HARMonics STAN 2533 POWer HARMonics VOLT 2533 POWer INRush ADD 2529 POWer INRush COUNt 2529 POWer INRush EXECute 2530 POWer IN...

Page 2618: ...8 POWer QUALity RESult POWer PHASe 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer REACtive 2528 POWer QUALity RESult POWer REALpower 2528 POWer QUALity RESult VOLTage CREStfactor 2528 POWer QUALity RESult VOLTage FR...

Page 2619: ...le RESult FREQuency WFMCount 2550 POWer RIPPle RESult FREQuency ACTual 2550 POWer RIPPle RESult MAXimum AVG 2550 POWer RIPPle RESult MAXimum EVTCount 2550 POWer RIPPle RESult MAXimum NPEak 2550 POWer...

Page 2620: ...2553 POWer RIPPle RESult PERiod RMS 2553 POWer RIPPle RESult PERiod STDDev 2553 POWer RIPPle RESult PERiod WFMCount 2553 POWer RIPPle RESult PERiod ACTual 2553 POWer RIPPle RESult STDDev AVG 2554 POW...

Page 2621: ...ng AUTO 2544 POWer SWITching COND 2545 POWer SWITching EXECute 2544 POWer SWITching GATE COND STARt 2545 POWer SWITching GATE COND STOP 2545 POWer SWITching GATE NCON STARt 2545 POWer SWITching GATE T...

Page 2622: ...ROBe m DEEMbedding REMProbeload 1360 PROBe m DEEMbedding TIPModule CSPFile 1359 PROBe m DEEMbedding TIPModule ZMA n SUBModule 1359 PROBe m DEEMbedding TIPModule ZMA n SUBModule 2566 PROBe m DEEMbeddin...

Page 2623: ...m SETup PRMode 1354 PROBe m SETup STATe 1344 PROBe m SETup TERM ADJust 1357 PROBe m SETup TERM MEASure 1357 PROBe m SETup TERM MODE 1357 PROBe m SETup TERM STATe 1356 PROBe m SETup TYPE 1344 PROBe m...

Page 2624: ...ute TDIStance 1557 REFLevel m ABSolute TITube 1562 REFLevel m ABSolute TOTube 1562 REFLevel m ABSolute ULEVel 1558 REFLevel m AUTO COUNt 1556 REFLevel m AUTO MODE 1554 REFLevel m AUTO STATe 1555 REFLe...

Page 2625: ...RELative POSition 1637 SEARch RESDiagram VERT RELative SPAN 1637 SEARch RESult ARINc WCOunt 1998 SEARch RESult ARINc WORD m DATA 1997 SEARch RESult ARINc WORD m LABel 1996 SEARch RESult ARINc WORD m...

Page 2626: ...h RESult CMSB m FRAMe n STATe 1793 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n STOP 1794 SEARch RESult CMSB m FRAMe n TYPE 1794 SEARch RESult CXPI FCOunt 1954 SEARch RESult CXPI FRAMe m DATA 1954 SEARch RESult CXPI...

Page 2627: ...m SSYMbol 2039 SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m STARt 2036 SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m STATe 2036 SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m STOP 2037 SEARch RESult ETHernet WORD m TYPE 2037 SEARch RESult FLXRay FC...

Page 2628: ...n VALue 1707 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m DATA 1705 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m RWBStart 1705 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m STARt 1702 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m STATus 1702 SEARch RESult I2C FRAMe m STOP 1702...

Page 2629: ...e m DATA 2317 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m FTYPe 2318 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m STARt 2319 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m STATe 2319 SEARch RESult MPHY FRAMe m STOP 2320 SEARch RESult PCIE PACKet m ADDR 23...

Page 2630: ...STOP 1928 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m SYMBol 1928 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m SYNCduration 1929 SEARch RESult SENT FRAMe m TYPE 1929 SEARch RESult SHOW 1638 SEARch RESult SORT ASCending 1638 SEARch RESu...

Page 2631: ...SB PACKet m STOP 2187 SEARch RESult USB PCOunt 2187 SEARch RESult USBPd FCOunt 2238 SEARch RESult USBPd FRAMe m DATA 2238 SEARch RESult USBPd FRAMe m FLD n FVAL 2238 SEARch RESult USBPd FRAMe m FLD n...

Page 2632: ...ATa BRS 1825 SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa DPOPerator 1822 SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa DPOSition 1823 SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa DPTO 1823 SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa ESI 1825 SEARch TRIGger CAN FDATa SCERror 1824...

Page 2633: ...XPI DATA DMIN 1946 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA ICONdition 1947 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA IMAX 1947 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DATA IMIN 1947 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXTension CONDition 1948 SEARch TRIGger CXPI DEXT...

Page 2634: ...IGger DPHY ESCMode MAX 2265 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESCMode MIN 2265 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa CONDition 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MAX 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESDTa MIN 2266 SEARch TRIGger DPHY ESIN...

Page 2635: ...h TRIGger FLXRay DMIN 1887 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPOPerator 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPOSition 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay DPTO 1888 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FCONdition 1889 SEARch TRIGger FLXRay FESerr...

Page 2636: ...03 SEARch TRIGger I2C ACCess 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ACONdition 1695 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADData 1695 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m ADRType 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO m ENABle 1697 SEARch TRIGger I2C ADDO...

Page 2637: ...SEARch TRIGger LIN IMAX 1855 SEARch TRIGger LIN IMIN 1855 SEARch TRIGger LIN IPERror 1858 SEARch TRIGger LIN SERRor 1854 SEARch TRIGger LIN SFIDentifier 1853 SEARch TRIGger LIN SIDData 1853 SEARch TR...

Page 2638: ...EARch TRIGger MILStd STATus SREQuest 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus SUBSystem 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd STATus TERMinal 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd TPSPecifier 1979 SEARch TRIGger MILStd TYPE 1974...

Page 2639: ...SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FIENable 2326 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m ENABle 2326 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n BIT 2327 SEARch TRIGger MPHY SSIC FRAMe m FLD n DMAX 2328 SEARch TRIGger MPH...

Page 2640: ...Gger PCIE DLLP MULT TYPE 2371 SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT VHFC 2371 SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT VHGR 2372 SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP MULT VLNR 2372 SEARch TRIGger PCIE DLLP POWM 2372 SEARch TRIGger...

Page 2641: ...ARch TRIGger RFFE ERRor SSC 2081 SEARch TRIGger RFFE ERRor VERSion 2082 SEARch TRIGger RFFE INTerrupt 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD CONDition 2078 SEARch TRIGger RFFE SADD MAX 2080 SEARch TRIGger RFFE...

Page 2642: ...Ndition 1721 SEARch TRIGger SPI MISopattern 1722 SEARch TRIGger SPI MOSipattern 1722 SEARch TRIGger SPI PALignment 1723 SEARch TRIGger SPI TYPE 1721 SEARch TRIGger STATe A LOGic 1629 SEARch TRIGger ST...

Page 2643: ...ch TRIGger TBTO LENGth MIN 2140 SEARch TRIGger TBTO SADDress CONDition 2140 SEARch TRIGger TBTO SADDress MAX 2140 SEARch TRIGger TBTO SADDress MIN 2141 SEARch TRIGger TBTO TYPE 2141 SEARch TRIGger TIM...

Page 2644: ...SEARch TRIGger USB WSEU 2182 SEARch TRIGger USB WSTC 2182 SEARch TRIGger USBPd BIT 2234 SEARch TRIGger USBPd DMAX 2234 SEARch TRIGger USBPd DMIN 2235 SEARch TRIGger USBPd DOPerator 2235 SEARch TRIGge...

Page 2645: ...18 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh STATe 1607 SEARch TRIGger WINDow ACOPy 1608 SEARch TRIGger WINDow DELTa 1619 SEARch TRIGger WINDow RANGe 1619 SEARch TRIGger WINDow TIMerange 1620 SEARch TRIGger WINDow WIDTh 1...

Page 2646: ...MASK CONDition 2576 STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle 2576 STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition 2577 STATus QUEStionable MASK EVENt 2576 STATus QUEStionable TE...

Page 2647: ...ecution DURation 2581 TRACe REMote MODE FILE ENABle 2580 TRACe REMote MODE FILE FILTer 2580 TRACe REMote MODE FILE FORMat 2579 TRACe REMote MODE FILE FUNCtions 2581 TRACe REMote MODE FILE NAME 2579 TR...

Page 2648: ...Merror 1807 TRIGger m CAN FTYPe 1802 TRIGger m CAN ICONdition 1803 TRIGger m CAN IMAX 1803 TRIGger m CAN IMIN 1803 TRIGger m CAN ITYPe 1802 TRIGger m CAN NDBYtes 1806 TRIGger m CAN SYMBolic DMAX 1833...

Page 2649: ...ger m CXPI DATA IMIN 1935 TRIGger m CXPI DEXTension CONDition 1936 TRIGger m CXPI DEXTension MAX 1936 TRIGger m CXPI DEXTension MIN 1936 TRIGger m CXPI DLC CONDition 1937 TRIGger m CXPI DLC MAX 1937 T...

Page 2650: ...er m EBTB UNK 2338 TRIGger m ECOupling 1428 TRIGger m EDGE SLOPe 1392 TRIGger m ETHernet ERRor CRC 2020 TRIGger m ETHernet ERRor LENGth 2021 TRIGger m ETHernet ERRor PREamble 2021 TRIGger m ETHernet F...

Page 2651: ...FLXRay PMIN 1874 TRIGger m FLXRay STFRame 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay SYFRame 1872 TRIGger m FLXRay SYMBol 1877 TRIGger m FLXRay TYPE 1871 TRIGger m FORCe 1430 TRIGger m GLITch POLarity 1393 TRIGger m GLIT...

Page 2652: ...I2C DPOPerator 1683 TRIGger m I2C DPOSition 1683 TRIGger m I2C DPTO 1683 TRIGger m I2C DRNack 1680 TRIGger m I2C DWNack 1680 TRIGger m I2C TYPE 1679 TRIGger m I2S SOWords 1746 TRIGger m I2S TCONditio...

Page 2653: ...PHYS 2044 TRIGger m MDIO REGI 2044 TRIGger m MDIO ST 2043 TRIGger m MDIO TYPE 2043 TRIGger m MILStd CDST ICONdition 1964 TRIGger m MILStd CDST IMAX 1965 TRIGger m MILStd CDST IMIN 1965 TRIGger m MILS...

Page 2654: ...86 TRIGger m MPHY CRC MAX 2287 TRIGger m MPHY CRC MIN 2287 TRIGger m MPHY CREDit CONDition 2288 TRIGger m MPHY CREDit MAX 2289 TRIGger m MPHY CREDit MIN 2289 TRIGger m MPHY CREQ 2287 TRIGger m MPHY DA...

Page 2655: ...er m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o DOPerator 2323 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o ENABle 2322 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IMAX 2324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FRAMe n FLD o IMIN 2324 TRIGger m MPHY SSIC FR...

Page 2656: ...DEFine 2433 TRIGger m PARallel WIDTh POLarity 2434 TRIGger m PARallel WIDTh RANGe 2434 TRIGger m PARallel WIDTh WIDTh 2434 TRIGger m PATTern MODE 1408 TRIGger m PATTern TIMeout MODE 1409 TRIGger m PAT...

Page 2657: ...419 TRIGger m QUALify n B ENABle 1418 TRIGger m QUALify n C LOGic 1419 TRIGger m QUALify n C ENABle 1418 TRIGger m QUALify n CD LOGic 1420 TRIGger m QUALify n D LOGic 1419 TRIGger m QUALify n D ENABle...

Page 2658: ...907 TRIGger m SENT SDMX 1907 TRIGger m SENT SICN 1906 TRIGger m SENT SIDType 1906 TRIGger m SENT SIMN 1906 TRIGger m SENT SIMX 1906 TRIGger m SENT STATus 1904 TRIGger m SENT STYPe 1905 TRIGger m SENT...

Page 2659: ...m SWIRe ERRor PARity 2004 TRIGger m SWIRe TIME CONDition 2004 TRIGger m SWIRe TIME MAX 2005 TRIGger m SWIRe TIME MIN 2005 TRIGger m SWIRe TYPE 2005 TRIGger m TBTO CRC CONDition 2126 TRIGger m TBTO CR...

Page 2660: ...ger m USB ACONdition 2153 TRIGger m USB AMAX 2153 TRIGger m USB AMIN 2153 TRIGger m USB DATA 2154 TRIGger m USB DCONdition 2154 TRIGger m USB DPOPerator 2154 TRIGger m USB DPOSition 2154 TRIGger m USB...

Page 2661: ...d FRAMe n FLD o IOPerator 2226 TRIGger m USBPd FRENable 2223 TRIGger m USBPd IMAX 2225 TRIGger m USBPd IMIN 2226 TRIGger m USBPd IOPerator 2226 TRIGger m USBThree BIT 2202 TRIGger m USBThree DMAX 2202...

Page 2662: ...Single 2456 WGENerator m ARBGen SAMPles 2454 WGENerator m ARBGen SELect 2455 WGENerator m ARBGen SRATe 2455 WGENerator m ARBGen SOURce 2455 WGENerator m COUPling AMPLitude 2462 WGENerator m COUPling A...

Page 2663: ...43 WGENerator m SWEep FSTart 2452 WGENerator m SWEep TIME 2452 WGENerator m SWEep FEND 2452 WGENerator m VOLTage DCLevel 2458 WGENerator m VOLTage HIGH 2458 WGENerator m VOLTage INVersion 2459 WGENera...

Page 2664: ...r 1376 ZVC Z m ID SWVersion 1376 ZVC Z m V n BANDwidth 1373 ZVC Z m V n DATA HEADer 1378 ZVC Z m V n DATA VALues 1378 ZVC Z m V n IMPedance 1373 ZVC Z m V n OFFSet 1373 ZVC Z m V n OVERload RSTO 1374...

Page 2665: ...asurements 322 Area measurements 320 Arithmetic 130 Arranging waveforms 50 Audio Configuring 536 Track 542 Trend 545 Trigger settings 537 Auto clear Search results 439 Auto Norm Key trigger 35 Auto tr...

Page 2666: ...s 284 Settings 288 Cursors 56 Configuring display 288 Configuring measurement 286 Coupling 292 Display 292 Position 290 Start measurement 286 Track waveform 286 291 Type 290 Custom Filter settings 572...

Page 2667: ...IN 613 Envelope 130 FFT 383 Mathematics 272 Measurements 300 Envelope waveform Cursor measurement 291 Error report 1256 ESR 1246 Ethernet Configuration settings 727 Configuring 731 Trigger settings 73...

Page 2668: ...Trigger 197 GPIB Address 1242 Remote control interface 1241 GPIB bus control Remote 1289 Grid 44 Grounding 26 H Hamming window FFT 381 Hann window FFT 381 Hardware information 103 Hardware check 103...

Page 2669: ...face 1241 IP address 1241 LAN configuration 1234 Ping 1236 Remote control interface 1241 Resource string 1241 Level knob 35 Level measurements 317 Limit checks Actions 366 Configuring 364 Enable 365 P...

Page 2670: ...71 Setup 258 Max value measurement 317 Maximum sample rate 112 MDIO Configuration settings 743 Configuring 746 Trigger settings 747 Triggering 750 MDIO protocol Basics 742 Mean measurement 317 Measure...

Page 2671: ...surement 285 286 Spectrum measurement 285 293 Peak to peak measurement 317 Performance 94 Considerations for FFT 375 FFT parameters 373 Performance test 125 Ping 1236 Position 38 Horizontal 36 115 Ver...

Page 2672: ...isplaying 310 Hysteresis 308 Level settings 310 Settings 310 Tubes 308 Reference point 36 45 115 Reference signal 1 GHz internal 125 External 125 OCXO 125 Reference waveforms 37 48 Displaying 249 Load...

Page 2673: ...SENT short serial message 663 SENT transmission sequence 662 Setup Hold 430 Show results 439 Slew rate 429 Sorting results 439 Source 421 Timeout 427 Trigger level 423 424 425 428 429 431 Trigger sear...

Page 2674: ...trigger 216 Standard deviation Histograms 340 Standard deviation measurement 317 State trigger 209 MSO 1004 Statistics Enable 359 Measurement results 356 Status Measurements 302 Status byte Remote 128...

Page 2675: ...tings 896 MDIO settings 747 Mode 35 220 MSO settings 997 Pattern 210 Pattern MSO 1005 PCIe settings 942 Position 44 Run 220 Runt 199 Search 422 SENT 643 SENT error condition 648 SENT serial message se...

Page 2676: ...3 Data query 1342 Loading 452 Saving 452 Waveform arithmetic 130 Waveform count Histograms 340 Waveform export CSV 457 Data query 1342 Files and formats 453 Header files 453 Remote control 1649 Value...

Page 2677: ...am 45 Key 37 Methods 239 MSO 994 Multiple 247 On the touchscreen 245 Position Range 247 Procedures 245 Quick access 56 241 Saving data 473 Settings 241 Settings for data export 460 Start stop values 2...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands